000000 – CONSOLIDATED TABLE OF CONTENTS

CONSOLIDATED TABLE OF CONTENTS

Division Section Title Pages

PART1

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

02210 GROUND INVESTIGATION 05
02220 SITE CLEARING 03
02314 DEWATERING 06
02320 EXCAVATION AND FILLING 22

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
031000 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 09
032100 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 08
033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 67
033420 SAND CEMENT SCREED 05
033430 SELF-LEVELING SCREED 05
034900 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED CONCRETE (GRC) 13
037100 MASS CONCRETE 08

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 16
042250 LIGHT WEIGHT CONCRETE MASONRY 07
044200 EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING 16

DIVISION 05 – METALS
055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 14
055130 METAL LADDERS 03
055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 12
057300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 16
057313 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 12

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 07
062000 FINISH CARPENTRY 06
064300 WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS 08
066500 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS 09

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 08
071350 PVC MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 10
071354 THERMOPLASTIC SHEET WATERPROOFING FOR SUBSTRUCTURE 11
071416 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 12
071418 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 09
071600 CEMENTITIOUS AND REACTIVE WATERPROOFING 08

Newton Lusail School

Technical Specification – Rev. 00 000000 - 1
 000000 – CONSOLIDATED TABLE OF CONTENTS

071800 TRAFFIC COATINGS 08

072100 THERMAL INSULATION 06
074113.16 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 13
075215 COMPOSITE MEMBRANE WATER PROOFING 11
075216 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS 13
MEMBRANE ROOFING
076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 08
077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES 06
078100 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 12
078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 09
078446 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07
079200 JOINT SEALANTS 11
06610 GRP - GLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC 06
VENDOR LIST

PART 2

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS
081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 13
081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08
084213 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES 13
084413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 17
085113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 09
086300 METAL FRAME SKYLIGHT 10
087100 DOOR HARDWARE 18
088000 GLAZING 16
088300 MIRRORS 07
089119 FIXED LOUVERS 08

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
092400 CEMENT PLASTERING 10
092900 GYPSUM BOARD 18
093013 CERAMIC TILING 17
093033 STONE TILING 11
095123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 13
095133 ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS 10
096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 08
096536 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING 08
096723 RESINOUS FLOORING 07
096766 FLUID APPLIED ATHLETIC FLOORING 06
096813 TILE CARPETING 08
096816 SHEET CARPETING 07
097200 WALL COVERING 07
099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 11
099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 16

Newton Lusail School

Technical Specification – Rev. 00 000000 - 2
 000000 – CONSOLIDATED TABLE OF CONTENTS

099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 09

099600 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 22

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
102113.17 PHENOLIC-CORE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 06
102800 TOILET BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 06
104413 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 07
104416 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 05

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
116800 PLAY FIELD EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES 05

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
129300 SITE FURNISHINGS 07

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

133123 PVDF COATED WHITE POLYESTER TENSILE FABRIC 08

DIVISION 14 – SPE CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

142100 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14

PART 3

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

104413 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 07
104416 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 05
210000 FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS 32
210500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 11
210513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 04
EQUIPMENT
211000 WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 25
211339 FOAM-WATER SYSTEMS 10
212210 CLEAN-AGENT FIRE-EXTINGUISHING 13
212220 AEROSOL-AGENT FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 13
213113 ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS 13
213116 DIESEL-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS 12
213400 PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS 06

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
220000 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 41
220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 12
220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 05
220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 07
220519 METERS AND GUAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 07
220523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 13
220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMPING PIPING AND 11

Newton Lusail School

Technical Specification – Rev. 00 000000 - 3
 000000 – CONSOLIDATED TABLE OF CONTENTS

EQUIPMENT
220548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 09
AND EQUIPMENT
220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 09
220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 12
221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 17
221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 12
221123.13 DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS 10
221123.14 IRRIGATION WATER PUMPS 08
221224 WATER STORAGE TANKS 06
221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 10
221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 14
221329 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS 08
221413 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 08
221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 07
223200 DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT 11
223600 SWIMMING POOL 27
224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 11

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

230000 HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 27
230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 04
230517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 07
230523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 14
230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 10
230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 06
230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 04
230700 HVAC INSULATION 32
230800 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 12
230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 51
230923.11 CONTROL VALVES 20
230923.12 CONTROL DAMPERS 21
230923.13 ENERGY METERS 16
230923.14 FLOW INSTRUMENTS 56
230923.17 LEVEL INSTRUMENTS 09
230923.23 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS 31
230923.27 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS 20
231113 FUEL OIL PIPING SYSTEMS 13
232113 HYDRONIC PIPING 15
232300 REFRIGERATION PIPING AND SPECIALIST 06
232513 WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS 11
233113 METAL DUCTS 08
233300 DUCT ACCESSORIES 09
233413 AXIAL FAN 08
233423 CENTRIFUGAL FANS 09

Newton Lusail School

Technical Specification – Rev. 00 000000 - 4
 000000 – CONSOLIDATED TABLE OF CONTENTS

233600 AIR TERMINAL UNIT 09

233700 AIR OUT LET AND INLET 07
236200 PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 11
237313 MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 31
238123 CLOSED CONTROL AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 05
238126 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 16
238219 FAN COIL UNITS 08
328400 PLANTING IRRIGATION 27
VENDOR LIST

PART 4

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 12
260513 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES 10
260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND 16
CABLES
260526 GROUNDING & BOUNDING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 09
260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 06
260533 RACEWAYS AND ACCESSORIES 09
260536 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 13
260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL 10
SYSTEMS
260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 09
260573.13 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES 06
260573.16 COORDINATION STUDIES 10
260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 11
260926 LIGHTING CONTROL PANELBOARDS 15
261326 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE, METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR 29
262040 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES 12
262200 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 12
262413 SWITCHBOARDS 29
262416 PANELBOARDS 08
262419 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS 22
262500 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES 12
262713 ELECTRICITY METERING 07
262726 WIRING DEVICES 09
262923 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 13
263213 ENGINE GENERATOR 20
263323.13 CENTRAL BATTERY EQUIPMENT FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING 25
263353 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 22
263533 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT 07
263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES 11
264113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES 06
265119 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 20

Newton Lusail School

Technical Specification – Rev. 00 000000 - 5
 000000 – CONSOLIDATED TABLE OF CONTENTS

265213 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 13

271100 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 32
271300 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING 21
271513 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING 15
271523 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER HORIZONTAL CABLING 15
272000 DATA COMMUNICATIONS 27
272133 WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM 14
273000 VOICE COMMUNICATIONS 46
274116 INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS 54
274133 SMATV AND IPTV SYSTEMS 29
275116 PUBLIC ADDRESS & BGM SYSTEMS 26
275313 CLOCK SYSTEM 10

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

281000 ACCESS CONTROL 27
282300 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 18
284621.11 ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS 33
VENDOR LIST

PART 5

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
313116 TERMITE CONTROL 04

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

321400 UNIT PAVING 16
321713 PARKING BUMPERS 03
321716 MANUFACTURED TRAFFIC-CALMING DEVICES 03
321723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 04
321813 SYNTHETIC GRASS SURFACING 07
321816.13 PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING 08
323119.53 DECORATIVE METAL SECURITY FENCES AND GATES 06
323129 WOOD FENCES AND GATES 06
329000 PLANTING 20
VENDOR LIST

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Newton Lusail School

Technical Specification – Rev. 00 000000 - 6
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

SECTION 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 1

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The Qatar construction specification (QCS 2014) shall form the basis of the project specification. The
technical specification is supplemental to QCS (latest revision) and should be read in conjunction
with QCS and all other contract documents. In case of contradiction or discrepancy between QCS
and technical specifications, CONTRACTOR shall incorporate whichever is more stringent.

B. The scope of works for all mechanical works and systems comprises engineering, supply,
delivery, installation, testing and commissioning, handover, training, maintenance and
warranty as described or reasonably implied in the Contract. Contractor is obliged to
provide fully functioning works and systems in conformance with the requirements of the
Contract. In the event certain items are not fully described or indicated in the Contract,
but deemed essential by the Engineer (in all reasonableness) for the performance of the
works and systems then the provision of such items shall form part of Contractor’s scope
of works at no additional cost to Employer.

C. All cold water draw-off points / taps will be supplied from domestic water storage tank and
entered to the plate heat Exchanger supplied from Chilled water system for the domestic
water cooling purpose. The cold water draw-off taps water temperature to be maintained
at 280C.

D. Domestic hot water draw-off points / taps will be supplied via a hot water storage tank
supplied from LTHW Boiler system for the domestic water heating purpose. The hot
water storage tank secondary outlet temperature to be maintained at 600C.

E. The minimum and maximum residual pressures for hot and cold water faucets shall be as
under:

i. Guest washrooms: Min.: 1.5 bars, Max.: 5.5 bars and the optimum: 2.0 bars.

ii. Residential Suites washrooms: Min.: 1.5 bars, Max.: 2.8 bars and the optimum: 2.0 bars.

iii. Public Washrooms: Min.: 2.0 bars, Max.: 5.5 bars and the optimum: 3.0 bars.

iv. Hose Bibbs: Min.: 3.5 bars, Max.: 4.5 bars and the optimum: 4.0 bars.

v. Kitchen sink, cleaner sink and janitor sink: Min.: 3.5 bars, Max.: 4.5 bars and the
optimum: 4.0 bars.

vi. Kitchen and Laundry Equipment: as recommended by the Equipment Manufacturer.

F. The maximum flow rate for hot and cold water faucet shall be as prescribed in the Section
224000 “PLUMBING FIXTURES”

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 2

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

G. Inlet pressure for the Sub-meter of water supply shall not exceed 2.8 bars as recommended
by Kahramaa.

H. Where reverse flow along the cold feed is prevented, provide an expansion vessel in
accordance with BS 6144 to accommodate expansion water. This vessel shall be sized in
accordance with the volume of water heated and the water temperature rise so as to limit
the pressure to the maximum working pressure for the system. The expansion vessel shall
accommodate an expansion equal to 4% of the total volume of water heated. Any
discharge from relief valves shall be readily visible and disposed of safety.

I. The contractor is responsible to connect drainage line (soil/waste) and water line (including
isolation valves) to any equipment as per final equipment/furniture layout whatever
showing in the design drawings or not without any variation in time and cost.

J. Contractor shall be responsible to co-ordinate the equipment and services and shall produce
properly coordinated shop drawings to demonstrate the installation comply with the
performance requirement with shop drawing, calculations and details.

K. Shop drawings shall take into account actual measurement and setting out dimensions/levels
obtained and determined by Contractor on site, actual equipment/material used, actual
routing of services, co-ordination with all installation, and site conditions/constraints.

L. The installation, materials and all components shall comply with all statutory instruction and
regulations current at the time of tender whether so detailed or not, and shall confirm in
all respects with the following:

1. Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS2014).

2. Safety Health and Welfare regulations issued by the State of Qatar.
3. Water Regulations issued by the Ministry of Electricity and Water – Water
Department (Kahramaa).
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
5. The Fire Department Regulations.
6. Doha, Qatar, Civil Defiance Authorities.
7. All relevant British, International Standards and Code of Practice.

a. BSCP 310 Water Supply

b. BSCP 2005 Sewerage
c. BS 5572 Code of Practice for Sanitary Pipe-work
d. BS 8301 Building Drainage

8. Should any conflict arise between the codes and standard mentioned above,
regulations issued by the State of Qatar shall take precedence.
9. Other electromechanical codes and standards:

a. AABC Associated Air balance Council

b. ACMV Air Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation
c. AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association (USA)

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 3

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

d. ANSI American National Standards Institute

e. ARI Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
f. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-conditioning
Engineers (USA)
g. AWWA American Water Works Association
h. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers (USA)
i. AWS American Welding Society
j. ASTA Association of Short-circuit Testing Authorities
k. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials (USA)
l. ADC Air Diffusion Council
m. HEI Heat Exchange Institute
n. UBC Uniform Building Codes
o. BSI British Standard Institute
p. BS/BSS British Standard or British Standard Specification
q. IEC International Electrotechnical Committee
r. IEE Institute of Electrical Engineers (UK)
s. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
t. INCE Institute of Noise Control Engineering
u. IP Index of Protection
v. ISO International Standardization Organization
w. NEC National Electrical Code
x. IPC International Plumbing Code
y. NCAC National Council of Acoustical Consultants
z. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association (USA)
aa. NFPA National Fire Protection Association (USA)
bb. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning contractors National
Association Inc. (USA)
cc. PESDG Plumbing Engineering Services Design Guide
dd. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

M. Where there is conflict between any local authority or codes requirements and the drawings
or specifications, requirements of local authorities & codes shall govern without any
additional cost and/or time.

N. it is the contractor responsibility and liability to systematically, accurately, and diligently

coordinate all works of all trades, as depicted on each trade drawing, with each other’s
and with all products data sheets.

O. Plumbing provisions/connections shall be provided as per the final ID and kitchen specialist
design without any variation in time/cost.

P. The contractor shall provide all valves, fitting and equipment for all plumbing system
whatever shown in the design document or not and provide complete solutions for the
systems for proper operation and high efficient system as per codes and standers and
manufacturer recommendation/perquisites.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 4

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

Q. The contractor shall check the equipment location including but not limited to (pumps,
boilers, calorifiers, heat exchanger, etc..) and provide complete selection and solutions
before ordering any equipment.

R. Final design of specialty system shall be provided in complete design and calculation from
system specialist to obtain engineer approval before ordering any component. Required
components and changing in the design (if any) for code and regulation compliance, high
efficient and proper operation shall be provided for engineer approval without any
additional cost and/or time.

S. GSAS requirement
1. The contractor shall submit all required document and calculations which required for
the GSAS 3 stars
2. All equipment and systems selection shall complied with the requirements of GSAS 3
stars
3. The mentioned power in the schedule of equipment are the maximum value and the
contractor shall select any equipment with high efficiency which meet the GSAS 3
stars and in any case the contractor/ manufacturer are obliged to comply without
variations in time/cost.
4. The motor for the air handling units/ fan coil units can be EC type to comply with
GSAS if needed
5. The contractor shall not procure any equipment unless assuring the compliance with
the GSAS 3 stars

1.2 THE PLUMBING AND SANITARY INSTALLATION

A. The Plumbing and Sanitary installation shall include the following:

1. Liaison with the local supply Authority to obtain and coordinate provision of
discharge points to city sewer drainage system.
2. Complete domestic water supply system including domestic water storage tanks,
domestic water booster pumps and associated accessories.
3. Complete hot water supply system including Individual electric hot water heaters as
per design drawings complete with water distribution pipe-work and associated
accessories.
4. Complete storm water removal pipe-work system and associated accessories.
5. Complete two pipes sewerage system (sewerage and waste water) and associated
accessories.
6. Supply and Installation of all sanitary wares and fittings including flush valves, auto-
sensors, WCs, urinals, water taps, bidets, wash basins, mop sinks and sinks.
7. Power supply wiring and control cabling works for plumbing and sanitary fixture
automatic sensors/devices.
8. All associated electrical works.
9. All associated automatic control works.
10. All associated interfacing works with M&E Services including electrical, fire alarm
and protection, air conditioning and mechanical ventilation, etc.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 5

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

11. All associated acoustic and vibration control works.

12. Other works as shown on the Drawings and described elsewhere in the Contract
documents.
13. Any additional

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL (QA/QC)

A. Comply with current applicable codes, ordinances, and regulations of the authority or
authorities having jurisdiction, the rules, regulations and requirements of the utility
companies/authorities serving the project and Employer’s insurance underwriter.

B. Approval or acceptance by the Engineer shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibilities
under the Contract for the quality of materials and the standard of workmanship in the
works.

C. No work shall be covered up or put out of view without the agreement of the Engineer.
Contractor shall provide/allow the Engineer full opportunity for the examination and
measurement of any work which is about to be covered or put out of view. Upon request
by the Engineer, the Contractor shall expose their Works and allow/provide access to the
Engineer to inspect any part of the works during the course of the manufacturing or site
installation/erection.

D. When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit evidence including written
certificates and full testing reports from approved/recognized testing organization
certifying that his proposed equipment or material has been tested and conform to the
specified standard

E. Contractor should submit a time Schedule of all project Construction stages and critical
milestones from builders works to the Engineer’s takeover including the Local Authorities
approval. Takeover of the project shall not exceed the project deadline.

F. Contractor, prior to the commencement of the Works , Testing and Commissioning, shall
submit for the Engineer’s approval comprehensive QA/QC programme for the installation
pre commissioning and testing and commissioning which shall include, but not be limited
to the following:

1. QA/QC programme of the manufacturing process of equipment;

2. Organizational chart as per QCS-2014 requirements for the following:
a. Staff Organization Chart.
b. Health & Safety Organization Chart.
c. Pre commissioning and Testing & commissioning Organization Chart.
d. Quality Organization plan.
3. Flow Charts of : Health & Safety Plan , Quality Plan ,ITP / Inspection Test Plan and
Commissioning Plan of the system as per QCS-2014 detailing all procedures from
builder works to the handing over.
4. Method statement of all site Equipment lifting and Maneuvering including the
necessary required temporary slab cut-outs;

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 6

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

5. Method statement of all site erection/installation works;

6. Method of protection for material/equipment during delivery, and stored on and off
the site; and
7. Testing and commissioning programmes, procedures, etc.

G. All equipment, material and items incorporated in the Works under this Contract are to be
new and of top class quality.

H. Equipment/material of non-reputable make may not be accepted solely at the discretion of

the Engineer.

I. The use of electrically dissimilar metals in contact with each other shall be avoided. If this is
not possible, the contact surfaces of the two (2) metals shall be insulated from each other
by an approved method.

J. All components shall be easily accessible for maintenance/replacement.

K. All instrumentation and equipment required for inspection, testing and commissioning shall
be calibrated and maintained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit all valid
calibration records from manufacturer and/or recognized laboratories and testing
authorities before the use of such instrumentation and equipment.

L. Necessary Steel platforms and proper walkway bridges shall be provided for maintenance
purpose

1.4 WARRANTIES

A. The Contractor shall warrant that the capacity, rating or duty of all equipment used in the
installation shall not be less than the performance specified on the Drawing or in the
Specification when operating under the specified conditions and in accordance with the
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Any equipment/system not meeting this
requirement shall be rejected.

B. Any other Notices as required by all local Authorities

C. Warranty Certificate by both Contractor and specialist (wherever applicable) shall be issued
prior takeover Certificate.

D. During the warranty period, perform the periodic routine and preventive maintenance as per
the Equipment Manufacturer’s requirement to verify its proper operation.

E. Warranty period:
1. In General: 400 days commenced from date of takeover Certificate or (as per contract)
for all plumbing systems’ whole installation.
2. For Equipment and special systems: as prescribed in relevant sections for each
Equipment / special systems and / or as per the Contract.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 7

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.5 VENDOR LIST:

1. Refer to “Tender particular” volume 01 annex B

2. Any other products not listed in vendor list subject to the ENGINEER and DESIGNER
approval.

1.6 FACTORY TEST VISIT

1. The following equipment shall be tested at the supplier’s manufacturing facilities in the
presence of the consultant and client representatives:
a. boilers
b. Calorifiers
c. Pumps

2. The contractor shall submit for consultant’s approval, the test procedure for performance
tests at least 4 weeks prior to witness testing.

3. Notice of witness testing shall be given at least 6 weeks prior to the actual test.

4. Contractor shall bear all costs for performance testing of each equipment, inclusive of
business class air fare for 4 persons with their boarding and lodging expenses and local
transport.

5. In case of failure of any tests, retesting shall be required and the above conditions shall be
applicable.

1.7 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES

A. Equipment tests will considered as accepted only when the values being tested are equal to
the design parameters and or within the allowable limits / tolerances ±10% .

1.8 MAINTENANCE DURING DEFECT WARRANTY / LIABILITY PERIOD

A. Immediately answering the breakdown calls, the Contractor shall attend to such calls within
a maximum time limit of three hours during Night and Two hours during Daytime of
receiving such Calls.

B. During the defects warranty period, the Contractor shall at his own cost repair all faults or
defects in the works which in the opinion of the Engineer are due to faulty materials and
workmanship.

C. If the Contractor fails to remedy such faults and or defects within a reasonable time, the
Employer may deploy other Contractor to do such work under the expenses of the contractor
and without prejudice to such other rights as the Employer may have under the Contract.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 8

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.9 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. During the course of the Contract, the Contractor shall keep progressive record drawings of
all installation works.

B. As-built drawings shall be submitted prior to the issue of Taking over Certificate by the
Engineer.

C. As-fitted schematic system diagrams, properly framed, shall also be provided and mounted
on the wall inside each plant room.

D. The As-Built drawings must be checked and verified by the Contractor prior submission to
the Engineer for final Confirmation and Approval.

E. Prior to close any of false ceilings, the Partial As-built drawing for the Particular area should
be arranged by the Contractor and accepted by the Engineer.

1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL

A. The Operation and Maintenance Instruction manual shall be in A4 size paper and be bound
in rigid covers covered and engraved with lettering giving the Employer’s name, project
name, the Engineer’s name.

B. Final draft manuals must be submitted for the Engineer’s review before Taking Over
Certificate is issued. After acceptance by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit five (5)
sets and a soft copy of this manual for record before Taking Over certificate is issued.

C. Separate Binders shall be provided as each services for the following Systems:

1. Domestic Cold & Hot Potable Water Systems including Filtration.

2. Flushing Non Potable Water System including Recycling Grey Water

Treatment.

3. Drainage Water System including Sump Pumps and Pits.

D. In general, each manual shall consist, but not be limited to the following section:

1. General

a. This section shall include the purpose of the manual and brief description of the
manual directory.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 9

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

2. System Description

a. This section shall include the following as a minimum:

1) Description of the overall system.

2) General operation of plant, starting up and shutting down procedures,
location of each equipment, normal and emergency operation of
systems/equipment, control settings and tolerances.
3) Size and capacity of all the major equipment and components of the
system.
4) The proposed initial setting of protective devices and other adjustable
components of the system. Space shall be reserved for the insertion of
final commissioned and accepted settings.
5) Normal sequence of equipment and plant operation and alternative
sequence to maintain operation of part of the total facilities during
abnormal circumstances.

3. Technical Specification

a. This section shall include the technical descriptions and functions of all
equipment and components and shall include:

1) Schedules of equipment showing quantities, locations, types, operating

duties.
2) Technical description of all systems and equipment, including circuit
diagrams of each printed circuit board and component layout diagram for
each printed circuit board installed for this project.
3) Wiring diagrams.
4) Manufacturer’s drawings.
5) Equipment list, stating the make, model, serial number, accepted settings
(after commissioning).
6) Original / Legible Coloured Copy Catalogues, certificates and
performance data sheets for all equipment.

4. Maintenance

a. This section shall include the required operating, Troubleshooting and Routine
maintenance procedures of all the equipment. This shall include the following
as a minimum:

1) Inspection manual for all system/equipment;

2) Operation manual for all system/equipment;
3) Procedure of changing components of equipment requiring regular
replacement;
4) Periodic Routine Maintenance, Maintenance instructions, calibration
procedures and fault finding instructions for all systems;
5) Precautions when carrying out operation and maintenance procedures;

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 10

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

6) Storage and inventory systems; and

7) Procedures for system fault finding (System Troubleshooting matrix).
8) Maintenance schedule of equipment.

5. Safety

a. This section shall include the following as a minimum:

1) Proper procedure of equipment operation;

2) General description of plant hazards, where appropriate, including the
following:

a) Protection against electrical hazards;

b) Protection against mechanical and physical hazards;
c) Protection against fire and explosion hazards.
d) Protection against chemical hazards;
e) Protection during fuel and chemical handling; and
f) First aid and accident reporting.

6. Directory of Suppliers

a. This section shall list the name of suppliers and agents of each type of
equipment, materials and accessories. Correspondence address, telephone
number, fax number and E-mail address shall be included.

7. List of Spares

a. This section shall list all the spares, consumable materials, and maintenance
tools that will be maintained and kept to ensure continued satisfactory operation
of the equipment and systems.

8. Organization of Maintenance Team

a. This section shall include detailed organization of the Maintenance team

deployed for the Defect Notification Period with names and CV’s, of all key
staff. Contact telephone or pager numbers for emergency and/or twenty-four
(24) hour call shall also be included.

9. List of As-Built Drawings

a. This section shall contain a full list of all “as-built” and “as-manufactured”
drawings.

10. Project Commissioning Acceptance Reports/ Records.

11. Warranty / Guarantee Certificate.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 11

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.11 CONTRACTOR’S OBLIGATIONS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF SHOP

DRAWINGS

A. Contractor’s obligations for the production of Shop Drawings shall, in addition to other
requirements specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, include the following:

1. Adjustments and enhancement of services as a result of space co-ordination to provide

sufficient installation and maintenance access to facilitate easy future operation and
maintenance
2. Re-routing and re-organization of services to achieve the clear headroom/ceiling
height
3. Adjustments and enhancements to suit the construction works on site
4. Adjustments and enhancements to suit equipment/systems offered
5. Adjustments and enhancements to suit public utility connections
6. Adjustments and enhancements to suit existing public utilities locations for avoiding
diversions of these existing utilities
7. Adjustments and enhancements due to coordination and interfacing with M&E
Services (e.g. power supply, water supply, electro-magnetic compatibility, etc.)
8. Changes required as a result of certain construction sequence and methods
9. Adjustments and modifications of the installation arrangement to suit the specified
phased completion and early hand-over areas
10. Adjustments and/or enhancements to correct or clarify any discrepancies in the
Contract Documents, Working Drawings, Specification and other performance
requirement subject to the approval of the Engineer.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible and liable for the preparation of all Shop Drawings
necessary or required under the Specifications and/or for the construction of the Works. The
Shop Drawings prepared by the Contractor shall be based on the Contract Document. These
Shop Drawings shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

C. During the course of the Contract, The Contractor shall produce and commence submission
of detailed shop drawings sufficiently early for the Engineer’s review. These shop drawings
shall be submitted progressively in accordance with the construction programme. Clearance
or approval of any such drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from any
specified performance or material requirements, nor nullify the Engineer’s right to reject
unsatisfactory works on the site.

D. Installation works carried out by the Contractor before the relevant shop drawings submitted
and approved by the Engineer are at the Contractor’s own risk.

E. Shop drawings shall show at least the following general categories of information:

1. Penetrations through floors, walls, and other structural members;

2. Plinth details for Plantroom Equipment,…etc.
3. Equipment positions and operating weights;

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 12

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

4. Entry positions, access routes, , Maintenance allocated space ,weight of equipment or

components during delivery to site;
5. Services access openings;
6. Location, details of concealed/buried conduits, inserts, and pipes;
7. Temporary openings in floors/walls;
8. Detailed workshop and manufacturing drawings;
9. Equipment schedules;
10. Electrical wiring and control diagram;
11. General layout plans and sections (1:50 scale for plans and 1:20 scale for sections);
12. Schematic / P&I (Piping and Instrumentations) diagram;
13. Support and mounting details and schedule ;
14. Material/Component specifications;
15. Setting out dimensions and level; and
16. BMS Interfacing details and co-ordination with Engineering, structural and all
installation Works.
17. Plant Configuration and Sequence of operation.
18. Insulation Details and schedule.

F. In preparing the Shop Drawings, the Contractor shall provide all construction-related
engineering input and undertake construction co-ordination, inter-facing, cross-checking,
sequencing and construction detailing subject to the absolute approval of the Engineer.

G. Shop drawings shall be constantly updated to reflect modifications and changes

agreed/accepted by the Engineer and to reflect changes issued by the Engineer’s instructions.

H. Shop drawings produced shall be properly co-ordinated with the works of all installation.
Where required for proper co-ordination and to achieve required headroom, The Contractor
shall make modification of services layout/routing, duct aspect ratios, pipe-work gradient,
etc. (from those shown on the Contract Drawings) and reflect all these on the shop drawings
for he Engineer’s approval.

I. The Contractor shall co-ordinate and provides on time the details of builders works required
to e incorporated into the construction works. For builder’s work information has already
been given on the Drawings or the Contract drawings, Such information is to be checked by
the contractor to ensure suitability and sufficiency for his works.

J. The Engineer’s comments and corrections made on shop drawings shall not relieve the
Contractor of his contractual responsibilities to comply with requirements of the
Specification and Local Authorities regulations.

K. Shop drawings shall be updated progressively to reflect “as-built” conditions.

L. In preparing the Shop Drawings, the Contractor shall co-ordinate the information in the
Contract, engineering the installation and demonstrates the installation adequacy,
practicality, suitability, compliance of any statutory requirements and integrity of other
information in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase
whatsoever to the Contract Sum for the Works or any extension of time to complete the
Works.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 13

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

M. In preparing the shop Drawings, the Contractor shall take full account of the latest structural
and architectural drawings and any relevant drawings by other Contractors. The Contractor
shall make any adjustments to services equipment and layout necessary to comply with
variations included upon the structural and architectural drawings and any design costs
associated with such variations shall be included as an integral part of the Contract Works.

N. The shop Drawings shall be stamped and signed by specialist contractor / supplier (wherever
applicable) prior to submit for the Engineer’s review and approval.

O. The Contractor shall submit three /3 set of Hard copies (prints) and One/1 AutoCad copy on
CD for each shop drawings submitted for the Engineer’s review and approval.

P. All modification, alteration on the new revision drawings to incorporate the Engineer’s
previous comments shall be clouded.

Q. Indicate the following on the lower right hand corner of each shop drawing:
1. The submittal identification number;
2. Title of the sheet or brochure;
3. Name and location of the project;
4. Names of the Project Manager, Architect, Consultant, Contractor, subcontractor,
manufacturer, supplier and vendor.
5. The date of the submittal and the date of each correction.
6. Version and Revision.
7. Number all pages and drawings in product data Brochures consecutively from
beginning to end.

1.12 COORDINATED INSTALLATION DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor shall submit co-ordinated installation drawings, showing the services that
form the Contract and co-ordinated with all other trades.

B. Drawings shall show all critical dimensions, including dimensions for pipework, ductwork,
plant and equipment.

C. Drawings shall generally be to the scale listed below:

1. General layout and component location drawing of each floor level, showing sizes and
dimensions, etc – Scale 1:50.
2. Plantroom layouts, elevations, and sections showing sizes, dimensions, etc. – Scale
1:20.
3. Sections and elevations of ceiling voids, floor voids, partitions and risers to clearly
identify the installation and proposed co-ordination of services – Scale 1:20.
4. For large areas of horizontal MEP layouts – scale 1:100 drawing.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 14

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

D. For each room or area of the building containing mechanical, Electrical and public health
equipment, submit the following:
1. Floor Plans: Plan and elevation layout drawings indicating the equipment in the exact
location in which it is intended to be installed. These plans shall be of a scale not less
than 1:20. They shall be prepared in the following manner.
a. Illustrate all mechanical equipment proposed to be contained therein. Include
top and bottom elevations of all mechanical equipment. The drawings shall be
prepared utilising the dimensions contained in the individual equipment
submittals. Indicate code and manufacturer’s required clearances.
b. Illustrate all other equipment therein such as pipework, ductwork, diffusers,
terminal units, structural elements, etc.
c. Indicate the operating weight of each piece of equipment.
d. Illustrate concrete plinths.
e. Indicate maximum normal allowable operating temperature for each piece of
equipment (as per each respective manufacturer’s recommendation).

E. Submittals are required for review and co-ordination of all services.

F. In preparing the Co-ordinated Installation Drawings, the Contractor shall take full account of
the latest structural and architectural drawings and any relevant drawings by other
Contractors. The Contractor shall make any adjustments to services equipment and layout
necessary to comply with variations included upon the structural and architectural drawings
and any design costs associated with such variations shall be included as an integral part of
the Contract Works.

G. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing all working detail and fabrication drawings
as necessary for the execution of the works.

H. Drawings shall be in the latest release of AutoCAD. The contractor shall obtain from the
Architect a complete set of construction drawings in AutoCAD format including current
building backgrounds. The Contractor shall base coordinated installation drawings on the
Construction drawings and any amendments.

I. Provide dimensioned drawings in plan and elevation showing required all cast in place
brackets, unistrut etc.

J. The Contractor shall submit three /3 set of Coloured Hard copies (prints) and One/1
AutoCad copy on CD for each coordinated drawings submitted for the Engineer’s review
and approval.

K. All modification, alteration on the new revision drawings to incorporate the Engineer’s
previous comments shall be clouded.

L. Indicate the following on the lower right hand corner of each shop drawing:
1. The submittal identification number;
2. Title of the sheet or brochure;
3. Name and location of the project;

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 15

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

4. Names of the Project Manager, Architect, Consultant, Contractor, subcontractor,

manufacturer, supplier and vendor.
5. The date of the submittal and the date of each correction.
6. Version and Revision.
7. Number all pages and drawings in product data Brochures consecutively from
beginning to end.

1.13 SUBMITTALS AND REVIEWS

A. Submit co-ordinated installation drawings, manufacturer’s shop drawings, and product data
sheets, materials with physical samples and test reports as specified.

1. Following notice to proceed by the Project Manager, include the following

on the construction schedule to ensure submittals are provided in a timely
manner.

2. Within one month after notice to proceed by the Project Manager, submit a
complete typed list of all equipment manufacturers and material suppliers for
the equipment proposed for this project, as well as names of all subcontractors.

3. Within one month after notice to proceed by the Project Manager, prepare an
index of all submittals for the project. Include a submittal identification number,
a cross-reference to the Specification sections or Drawing number, and an item
description. Prefix the submittal identification number by the Specification
sections to which they apply. Indicate on each submittal, the submittal
identification number in addition to the other data specified.

4. After the Contract is awarded, obtain complete shop drawings, product data
and samples from the manufacturers, supplier’s vendors, and all subcontractors,
for all materials and equipment as specified. Submit data and details of such
materials and equipment for review. Prior to submission, certify that the shop
drawings, product data and samples are in compliance with the Contract
Documents. Check all materials and equipment upon their arrival on the job site
and verify their compliance with the Contract Documents. Modify any work,
which proceeds prior to receiving accepted shop drawings as required to
comply with the Contract Documents and the shop drawings.

5. A minimum period of Fifteen /15 days from the date of receiving the
submittal and / or as per the Contract documents, exclusive of transmittal time,
will be required in the Consultant’s office each time a shop drawing, product
data and/or samples are submitted for review. A minimum of Twenty one /21
days from the date of receiving the submittal and / or as per the contract
documents required for review the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

6. Submit three prints / hard copies (prints) and one AutoCad on CD of all
drawings. Submit three copies of manufacturer’s product submittals.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 16

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

7. The work described in shop drawing submissions shall be carefully checked,

by all trades, for clearances (including those required for maintenance and
servicing), field conditions, maintenance of architectural conditions and co-
ordination with other trades. Each submitted shop drawing shall include a
certification that related job conditions have been checked by the Contractor
and each subcontractor, and that conflicts do not exist.

B. Review of submittals is for general compliance with the design concept and Contract
Documents. Comments or absence of comments shall not relieve the Contractor from
compliance with the Contract Documentations. The Contractor remains solely responsible
for details and accuracy, for confirming and for co-coordinating the work with that of other
trades. The Contractor is not relieved of the responsibility for dimensions or errors that may
be contained on submissions, or for deviations from the requirements of the Contract
Documentations.

C. Submittals to be stamped by the Engineer as follows:

Status Stamp Interpretation

A Approved Fabrication, manufacture, or construction may

proceed, the submittal complies with Contract
Documents.

B Approved Except Fabrication, manufacture, or construction may

as Noted proceed after providing submittal complies with
the contract documents and the consultant’s
comments are complied with.
The submittal does not comply with the
C Revise and Contract Documents; do not proceed with
Resubmit fabrication, manufacture, or construction. The
work, material and shop drawings are not
permitted at the job site. Resubmit appropriate
material and / or shop drawings.
The submittal does not comply with the
D Rejected Contract Documents; do not proceed with
fabrication, manufacture, or construction. The
work, material and shop drawings are
substandard , not as per the specified and / or
approved vendor list and have various delivery
and function problems in the previous projects
and not permitted at the job site. Don’t
Resubmit the material and / or shop drawings.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 17

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

D. All modification, alteration on the new revision drawings to incorporate the Engineer’s
previous comments shall be clouded.

E. Submittals shall be provided in the following format:

1. Identify each sheet or printed submittal pages (using arrows, underlining or

circling) to show applicable sizes, types, model numbers, ratings, capacities and
options actually being proposed. Cross out non-applicable information. Note all
options specified or provided.

2. Submit materials and equipment by specification section number,

manufacturer, trade name, and model number. Include copies of applicable
brochure or catalogue material.

3. Include dimensional data for roughing in and installation and technical data
sufficient to verify that equipment meets the requirements of the Contract
Documents. Include wiring, piping and service connection data.

4. Inadequate or incomplete shop drawings, product data, and/or samples will

not be reviewed and will be returned to the Contractor for resubmittal.

5. Unless the above information is included, the submittal will be returned for
re-submission. Re-submittals of product data or brochures shall include a cover
letter summarizing the corrections made in response to the review comments.

F. Maintain a complete set of reviewed and stamped shop drawings and product data on site.

G. For Material and Equipment submittals, the Contractor shall provide full compliance
statement to the Specifications. Full Comparison between the proposed and specified itemes
in case of the material deviates from the specified. At any Case, the proposed item/(s) shall
be higher quality and / or equal to the specified item/(s).

H. Indicate the following on the lower right hand corner of each shop drawing and on the front
cover of each product data brochure cover:

i - The submittal identification number;

ii - Title of the sheet or brochure;

iii- Name and location of the project;

iv- Names of the Project Manager, Architect, Consultant, Contractor,

subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier and vendor;

v- The date of the submittal and the date of each correction.

vi- Version and Revision.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 18

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

vii- Number all pages and drawings in product data Brochures consecutively
from beginning to end.

1.14 ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION

A. The Contractor shall complete the mechanical and electrical installation to meet the entire
performance requirement in this document. All necessary changes and adjustments of the
mechanical and electrical system to take into account of the Contractor’s actually equipment
offered and service layout shop drawings, to meet the Acoustic Performance Requirements
shall be included in the Contract. Equipment used shall also meet the maximum sound power
level specified in the contract.

B. Plumbing System Noise Levels and Criteria

1. Pump sets on the rooftop or in plant rooms below or over critical areas of NC 40 or
better shall be installed on inertia blocks isolated with minimum 75mm static
deflection un-housed spring-neoprene in-series isolators, with non-skid neoprene pads.
Pipe supports on the rooftop and in the plant rooms shall be isolated with minimum
63mm static deflection spring neoprene in-series isolators.
2. Pump sets in other areas shall be isolated with minimum 50mm static deflection un-
housed spring-neoprene in-series isolators, with non-skid neoprene pads. Pipe
supports shall be isolated with minimum 25mm static deflection spring-neoprene in-
series isolators
3. The weight of the inertia block shall be 1.5 times the weight of the pump set. The
inertia weight design should consider water and pipe weight carried by each pump set.
4. The water tanks shall be isolated on minimum 50mm static deflection spring-neoprene
in series restraint isolators.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL AT INDOOR LOCATIONS

A. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects, and free of damage and
corrosion.

B. Products and materials shall not contain asbestos, Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB), or any
other material which is considered hazardous by the authority having jurisdiction.

C. Replace materials of less than specified quality and relocate work incorrectly installed as
directed by the Engineer.

D. Provide name/data plates on major components of equipment with manufacturer’s name.

Model number, serial number, capacity data and electrical characteristics attached in a
conspicuous place. Also, Equipment and Valves tag Nos. to be provided.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 19

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

E. Install materials and equipment with qualified trade people.

F. Maintain uniformity of manufacturer for equipment used in similar application and sizes.

G. Fully lubricate equipment where required.

H. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for installing, connecting, and adjusting equipment.

Provide a copy of such instructions at the equipment during installation.

I. Equipment capacities, ratings, etc, are scheduled or specified for job site operating
conditions. Equipment sensitive to altitude shall be de-rated with the method of de-rating
identified on the submittals.

J. Energy consuming equipment shall meet local energy ordinances and by-laws.

2.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLED AT OUTDOOR LOCATION

A. For equipment and services intended to be installed at outdoor locations or exposed to

external weather conditions, the Contractor shall ensure that these equipment and services
are properly protected by weatherproof external casing or cladding. All associated motors,
terminal, and electrical components shall be weatherproof type and suitable for outdoor
installation, IP 65 or greater. Weather protection shield shall also be provided for all moving
parts of the equipment and associated accessories external to the weatherproof equipment
casing.

B. All external equipment included air-conditioning units on roof shall be specially graded
against corrosive environment.

C. This outdoor weatherproof requirement shall also apply to services installed in close
proximity of external openings and louvers.

2.3 PANEL AT EXPOSED LOCATIONS

A. For all Mechanical and Electrical panels outside plant rooms and at exposed locations such
as car park, services area, public space, etc. shall be provided with a lockable front door.

2.4 EQUIPMENT SELECTION

A. The capacities of all plant and equipment described in the Contract are minimum capacities
and the Contractor shall take into account of the offered equipment capacities to meet the
performance requirement in the Contract and actual installation requirements.

B. Physical sizes of all plant and equipment shall suit the space allocated, taking into account
the requirement for access and proper maintenance.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 20

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

C. Any proposal to deviate from the Specification and Drawings is subject to the Engineer’s
approval at his sole discretion. Upon approval, any necessary changes to Engineering and
installation as a result of these deviations shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

D. Proposed equipment shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer before ordering is
placed. All necessary information requested by the Engineer for the review of the proposal
shall be submitted.

2.5 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS

A. The Contractor to liaise with the Engineer to determine the recommended lists of spare parts
for three years operation and maintenance covering all systems and sub-systems of the
specification. This list will be subject to the Engineer’s discretion; by which the Contractor is
committed to order these spare parts in part or in whole at any time up to the issue of the
Performance Certificate without any cost escalation.

B. All spare parts and maintenance equipment shall be provided in original packing, clearly
identified and labeled. Provide complete schedules of spare parts and maintenance
equipment clearly cross-referenced with the “Record Drawings” and maintenance
instructions and manuals.

C. All spare parts and maintenance equipment shall be as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer and or at least as detailed specifically in other related sections. List of spare
parts . List of spare parts shall be subject to the final approval of the Engineer.

D. Spare Parts as mentioned in “E” above shall be supplied and handed-over by the Contractor
under his expenses without additional cost to the Employer prior Take over Certificate.

E. Provide spare parts and maintenance equipment for all pumps, control panel etc. requiring
maintenance and replacement.

2.6 SAMPLE

Physical Sample shows Fabrication Techniques Quality and Workmanship of component

Parts compatibility of accessories provided on a standard sample board shall be submitted
along with technical submittal or the Engineer’s approval upon Request.

2.7 DELIVERED MATERIAL AT SITE

A. Contractor must submit Material Inspection Request for the Engineer’s inspection and
approval upon received material on site.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 21

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

B. All materials shall be delivered as brand new without any marking of corrosion any not
affected by the transportation and / or by the maneuvering.

C. All delivered material shall have a Country of Origin Certificate.

D. If the delivered material contains Stainless Steel material such as tank internal ladders, lifting
chain, etc, the SS grade certificate shall be provided.

E. If the delivered material hot dipped galvanized coated such as buddle flanges, tank external
ladders, etc, the mill certificate shall be provided.

F. All delivered meters shall have a valid due calibration Certificate from the manufacturer.

G. All delivered materials and Equipment shall be stored as per the normal practice, standards
as well as Manufacturer’s recommendations.

H. All delivered materials and equipment shall have a delivery note or purchasing order from
the supplier. If the material supplier is not in Qatar, Domestic dealer warranty certificate
shall be provided.

I. Date of delivered Equipment and instruments on site shall be within One year after the
Equipment / instrument production year.

J. All delivered Equipment shall have its own manufactured name plate shows all pertinent and
necessary data. Tagging preferably needs to be provided also.

K. In addition to the above, refer to the blow section for “PROTECTION OF MATERIALS,
PERSONNEL AND PROPERTY”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION OF WORK

A. Contract documents establish scope, materials and quality but are not detailed installation
instruction.

B. Coordinate work with related trades and furnish, in writing, any information necessary to
permit the work of related trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible
conflict or delay.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 22

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

C. The drawings show the general arrangement of equipment and appurtenances. Follow these
drawings as closely as the actual construction and the work of other divisions will permit.
Provide off-sets, fittings, and accessories which may be required but not shown on the
drawings. Investigate the site, and review drawings of other divisions to determine
conditions affecting the work, and provide such work and accessories as may be required to
accommodate such conditions.

D. The locations of thermostats, switches, panels and other equipment indicated on the
drawings are approximately correct. Exercise particular caution with reference to the location
of panels, thermostats, switches, etc., and have the precise and definite locations accepted by
the Engineer before proceeding with the installation.

E. The drawings show only the general run of services and approximate location of equipment,
outlets, panels, etc. Any significant changes in location of equipment, outlets, panels, etc.
necessary in order to meet field conditions shall be brought to the determine attention of the
Engineer for review before such alterations are made. Modifications shall be made at no
additional cost to the Contract.

F. Carefully check space requirements with other division works to ensure that equipment can
be installed in the space allotted.

G. Wherever work interconnects with work amongst different installation, coordinate with MEP
Services to insure that they have the information necessary so that the Contractor may
properly install the necessary connections and equipment. Identify items requiring access in
order that the Ceiling Trade will know where to install access doors and panels.

H. Consult amongst installation so that, wherever possible, motor controls and distribution
equipment are of the same manufacturer and / or Other Manufactures Authorized by /
accepted to the Equipment’s Manufacturers.

I. Furnish and set sleeves for passage of risers through structural masonry and concrete walls
and floors and elsewhere as required for the proper protection of each riser passing through
building surfaces.

J. Provide fire stopping around all pipes, conduits, ducts, sleeves, etc, which pass through fire
compartments.

K. Provide required supports and hangers for equipment suitably so as not to exceed allowable
loading of structures.

L. Wherever the work is of sufficient complexity, prepare additional detail drawings to scale to
coordinate the work with the work of MEP Services. Detailed work shall be clearly
identified on the drawings as to the area to which it applies. Submit these drawings to the
Engineer for review. At completion include a set of these drawings with each set of record
drawings.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 23

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

M. Coordinate with the local utility companies/authorities for their requirements for service
connections and provide all necessary provisions, grounding, materials, equipment, labor,
testing, and appurtenances.

N. Before commencing works, examine adjoining works on which this work is in any way
affected and report conditions which prevent performance of the works. Become thoroughly
familiar with actual existing conditions to which connections must be made or which must
be changed or altered.

O. The Contractor is responsible to any modifications required due to service not properly
coordinated.

3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. Provide excavation for the work of the specified installation, if required or necessary.
Excavate all material encountered, to the depths indicated on the drawings or as required.
Remove from the site excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill. Provide
grading as may be necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other
excavations. Remove any water which accumulates. Provide sheeting and shoring as may be
necessary for the protection of the work and for the safety of personnel.

B. Provide trenches of widths necessary for the proper execution of the work. Grade bottom of
the trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support the work on undisturbed soil
at every point along its entire length. Except where rock is encountered, do not excavate
below the depths indicated. Where rock excavations are required, excavate rock to a
minimum over depth of 100 mm below the trench depths indicated on the drawings or
required. Backfill over depths in the rock excavation and unauthorized over depths with
loose, granular, moist earth, thoroughly machine tamped to a compaction level of at least
95% to standard proctor density or 75% relative density or as specified by the Engineer.
Wherever unstable soil that is incapable of properly supporting the work is encountered in
the bottom of the trench, remove soil to a depth required and backfill the trench to the proper
grade with coarse sand, fine gravel or other suitable material.

C. Excavate trenches for utilities that will provide the following minimum depths of cover from
existing grade or from indicated finished grade as required by local authorities.

D. Trenches should not be placed within 3 meters of foundation or soil surfaces which must be
resist horizontal forces.

E. Do not backfill until all required tests have been performed and installation observed by
Engineer. Comply with the requirements of other sections of the specifications. Backfill shall
consist of non-expansive soil with limited porosity. Deposit in 150 mm layers and
thoroughly and carefully tamp until the work has a cover of not less than 300 mm. Backfill
and tamp remainder of trench at 300 mm intervals until complete. Uniformly grade the
finished surface.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 24

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

F. Piping shall not be buried at less than 900mm below finished grade for protection against
mechanical damages; otherwise, piping shall be surrounded with grade OPC 20 Concrete.
Concrete encasement shall be applied as per QCS-2014, section 08, part 04 “ Concrete
protection to pipe”.

G. Except where the method of jointing and normal trench backfill are adequate to prevent
longitudinal movement , Grade C 20 Concrete thrust blocks cast in Concrete with
undisturbed ground shall be constructed at every changing of direction, Junctions and blank-
end. In Case of Hub – Spigot type connection, the Thrust blocks shall be provided at both
sides.

H. Any Additional excavation required to accommodate thrust blocks shall be carried-out after
the bend or branch is in position and the thrust face shall be trimmed back to remove all
loose or weathered material immediately prior to concreting.

3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION OF BURIED FERROUS PIPING & PIPE FITTINGS:

A. All Buried Metallic Piping shall have a corrosion resistance such as provided in ductile iron
piping. Anti-corrosive protection for other metallic buried piping shall be applied to the
piping and pipe fitting in according to QCS-2014, Section 08, part 04 “ Corrosion Protection
of Ferrous Pipelines”.

3.4 ACCESS TO DRAINAGE PIPING

A. General:
1. Access is required to drainage installations for testing, inspection, maintenance and
debris removal.
2. Every drain Length should be Accessible for maintenance and rodding / jet without
the need to enter the building. Access shall be provided at the head of each run if drain
and at every change in the flow direction, gradient and diameter.
3. All floor clean out shall be covered as specified.
4. Refer to the respective Specification Division 22, section 221319 “Cleanouts”.

B. Piping In Trenches:
1. Access is required to drainage installations at every 20 meter span of horizontal
running.
2. Access is required to the building drainage installations close to the Municipality
discharge.

C. Piping In the Building:

1. Clean out plug is not allowed to be installed in kitchen and Restaurant areas even if it
is shown on the drawings. Floor Clean Out must be installed.
2. Clean out plug is not allowed to be installed in the false ceiling / concealed spaces
even if it is shown on the drawings. Floor Clean Out must be installed.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 25

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

3. Access Panel with suitable size and proper height shall be provided in the bathtub wall
for accessing the Cleaning eye of bathtub ‘P’ trap.
4. Access is required to drainage installations at every 20 meter span of horizontal
running.

3.5 MEANS OF ACCESS, ACCESS WAY & WAY BRIDGES

A. The Contractor Must Provide a proper Access way for inspection, testing, Maintenance and
further Replacement of the Equipment, valves and instrumentations. All plantroom
Equipment, instrumentations, Valves including float ball valve and Its MEP services
Equipment must be Accessible / serviceable.

B. When the pipe Line obstructing the access way , Standard Fabricated Way Bridges and / or
platforms along with steps and Protection Guard Rails must be installed over on the piping /
valves in the following:

1. Piping line along with valves run on the floor obstructing the access way.

2. Piping line along with valves leveled within 1000 mm AFFL obstructing the access way.

C. Standard Fabricated steel Platform along with access ladders and Protection Guardrails Must
be provided to access the valves for its operation and further maintenance if the distance
from the valves to false Ceiling Exceeds 2500 mm.

D. Size of the access panel to access the valves on the false ceiling should be arranged and
coordinated with the Architect. All valves shall be accessible / serviceable for inspection,
testing and further Maintenance.

3.6 MAINTENANCE FACILITIES FOR TANK SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS

A. Catwalk to maintenance platform shall be provided with railings and guards designed for
safe movement of personnel in a restricted space including provision for gaining access and
to accommodate maintenance personnel.

B. Hand railing and guards shall be designed by the Contractor and provided by the Contractor
for all concrete tanks to allow safe movement of personnel.

C. Permanent I-beams, sliding eyes hocks / bolts, SS 316 lifting chains, etc. shall be provided
by the Contractor over major equipment which requires lifting for overhaul and maintenance.

D. Waterproof power sockets required for servicing shall be provided by the Contractor. The
number and locations shall be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
Power supply to these sockets shall be taken from control panel of the submersible pump.

E. The design of all permanent work platform, hand rails, etc. shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval. The loading and fixing method of lifting facilitate shall also be

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 26

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

submitted to the Engineer for approval and checking within 4 weeks on award of Contract or
receipt of letter of intent.

3.7 AUTOMATIC AIR RELEASE VALVE

A. The top of each riser shall be fitted with a 25 mm automatic air release valve, brass
construction, with internal solid rubber ball and / or as specified.

B. Automatic Air Release Valve shall be provided with Isolating Valve for further
Replacement.

C. Automatic Air Release valve along with its isolating valve shall be provided at accessible
location. Means of access shall be provided.

3.8 PUDDLE FLANGES

A. Unless specified otherwise, puddle flanges in water tanks for casting into the concrete tank
structure shall be PN-16 pipe same material of network piping, with PN-16 flanges to B.S.
4504 : Part 1 : latest edition both coated by a good quality Hot dipped Galvanized to ASTM
A153:latest edition to be provided.

B. All Puddle flanges, piping, washers, nuts and bolts provided inside the tank for tank filling
line , etc shall be coated by hot dipped galvanized conform to ASTM A153.

C. At least One Spare Puddle flange of each size shall be provided for each tank / compartment.

D. All Puddle flanges shall be protruded from the tank in the plantroom side with minimum of
150mm.

E. All Puddle flanges for tank suction piping and incoming tank filling line /(s) shall be
protruded from the tank inside the tank side with minimum 150mm.

3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Where cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings or other
surfaces is necessary for the proper installation, support or anchorage of conduit or other
equipment, layout the work carefully in advance. Repair any damage to the building, piping,
equipment or defaced finish plaster, woodwork, metalwork, etc., using skilled trade people
of the trades required at no additional cost to the Contract.

B. Provide slots, chases, openings and recesses through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs as
required. Where these openings are not provided, provide cutting and patching to
accommodate penetrations at no additional cost to the Contract.

3.10 SEALING OF PENETRATIONS

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 27

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. Air Tight Seals

1. All penetrations through the building fabric subject to suction or pressurization shall
be sealed airtight.

B. Holes in Roof

1. Roof penetrations for passage of conduits or circular PVC and PVC Cables shall be
sealed watertight using a flexible polypropylene conical sleeve manufacturer or XLPE
Cables to seal the cable to the roof structure, regardless of the roof profile.
2. All sharp metal edges, which may come in contact with the cable, shall be suitably
bushed.

C. Fire Rated Penetrations

1. Where services penetrate any fire rated barrier, the Contractor shall seal the
penetration with the use of an appropriate material to ensure the integrity of the fire
barrier.
2. The Contractor shall seal the cable enclosures through fire rated barriers to ensure the
integrity and rating of the fire barrier.
3. All Fire Rated Penetrations Must be sealed with proper Material accepting to the
Authorities Having Jurisdictions. Stickers with Authorized person’s (accepted by the
Authorities Having Jurisdictions) signature Must be provided at every Fire Rated
Penetrations.

D. Acoustic Penetrations

1. Where services penetrate acoustic barriers, sealant shall be supplied and installed to
maintain the acoustic separation at least equal to the barrier penetration.

3.11 PIPE SLEEVE

A. Where Pipe penetrates any wall, the Contractor shall install Metallic Pipe sleeve with
100mm protrusion from both sides. One pipe size higher than pipe shall be provided for pipe
sleeve. Refer to the related specification Division 22, section 220500 “Sleeves” and “piping
System – common Requirements.

B. Pipe Sleeve not required to be installed for the new coring in slabs and beams.

3.12 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. Verify exact locations and mounting heights with the Engineer before installation.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 28

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

3.13 SUPPORTS

A. The pipework shall be supported, anchored and guided in order to preclude failure or
deformation. The Contractor shall construct and install hangers, supports, anchors, guides
and accessories as necessary to the approval of the Engineer. Supports shall be designed to
support the weight of the pipe, the weight of fluid with suitable Factor of safety.

B. Comply with the Requirement prescribed on the Division 22, section 220529 “HANGERS
AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT”.

C. Support work in accordance with the best industry practice. Provide supports, hangers,
auxiliary structural members and supplemental hardware required for support of the work.

D. Provide supporting frames or racks extending from floor slab to ceiling slab for work
indicated as being supported from walls where the walls are incapable of supporting the
weight. In particular, provide such frames or racks in electric closets and equipment room.

E. Provide supporting frames or racks for equipment, which is installed in a free standing
position.

F. Supporting frames or racks shall be of standard angle, standard channel or specialty support
system steel members, rigidly bolted or welded together and adequately braced to form a
substantial structure. Racks shall be of ample size to assure a workmanlike arrangement of
all equipment mounted on them.

G. Adequate support of equipment (including outlet, pull and junction boxes and fittings) shall
not depend on ducts, pipe, electric conduits, raceways, or cables for support.

H. Equipment shall not rest on or depend for support on suspended ceiling media (tiles, lath,
plaster, as well as splines, runners, bars and the like in the plane of the ceiling). Provide
independent support of equipment. Do not attach to supports provided for ductwork, piping
or work of MEP Services.

I. Provide required supports and hangers for equipment so that loading will not exceed
allowable loading of structure. Equipment and supports shall not come in contact with work
of MEP Services.

J. Standard Fabricated Rigid / Anchored Angle or Channel Support Should be Provided at the
pipe line when the distance from slab soffit to piping exceeds 1.5m as under:
a. For Piping up to 3 inches: Standard Fabricated Angle Anchored support with
cross stiffness.
b. For Piping from 4 inches and above: Standard Fabricated Channel Anchored
Support.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 29

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

K. In addition to the hanger support, Standard Fabricated Rigid / Anchored Angle or Channel
Support Should be Provided for the extreme lengthy Horizontal pipe Line running at every
20 meter span as under:
a. For Piping up to 3 inches: Standard Fabricated Angle Anchored support with
cross stiffness.
b. For Piping from 4 inches and above: Standard Fabricated Channel Anchored
Support.

3.14 FASTENINGS AND ANCHORING

A. Fasten equipment to building in accordance with the best industry practice.

B. Where weight applied to the attachment points is 45 kg or less, conform to the following as a
minimum:

1. Wood : Wood screws

2. Concrete and solid masonry : Bolts and expansion shields
3. Solid metal : Machine screws in tapped holes or with weldedstuds

C. Where weight applied to the building attachment points exceeds 45 kg, and less than or
Equal to 135 kg,, conform to the following as a minimum:

1. At concrete slabs provide suitable steel fishplates on top with through bolts. Fishplate
assemblies shall be chased in and grouted flush with the top slabs screed line, where
no fill is to be applied.
2. At steel decking or sub-floor for all fastenings, provide through bolts and threaded
rods. The tops of bolts and rods shall be set at least 25 mm below the top fill screed
line and grouted in. Suitable washers shall be used under bolt heads or nuts. In cases
where the decking or sub-floor manufacturer produces specialty hangers to work with
his decking or sub-floor such hangers shall be provided.

D. Where weight applied to building attachment points exceeds 135 kg, coordinate with and
obtain the approval of Engineer and conform to the following as a minimum:

1. Provide suitable auxiliary channel or angle iron bridging between building structural
steel elements to establish fastening points. Bridging members shall be suitably
welded or clamped to building steel. Provide threaded rods or bolts to attach to
bridging members.

E. For items which are shown as being ceiling mounted at locations where fastening to the
building construction element above is not possible, provide suitable auxiliary channel or
angle iron bridging tying to the building structural elements.

F. Wall mounted equipment may be directly secured to wall by means of steel bolts. Groups or
arrays of equipment may be mounted on adequately sized steel angles, channels, or bars.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 30

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

3.15 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING

A. Identify equipment, piping and Valves with permanently attached black phenolic nameplates
with 13 mm high white engraved lettering. Identification shall include equipment name or
load served as appropriate. Nameplates shall be attached with cadmium plated screws; peel
and stick tape or glue on type nameplates are unacceptable.

B. Marker tapes, tape wording , background colour and Posts:

1. Marker tapes and posts for piping and valve chamber shall be as per QCS-2014,
section 08, part 04 “ Marker tape, pressure pipeline and valve chamber marker posts’
as well as Lusial Requirements.

C. Services runs shall be properly identified as per the requirements in the Contract.

D. See individual section 220553 for additional identification requirements.

3.16 PROHIBITED LABELS AND IDENTIFICATIONS

A. In all public areas, tenant areas, and similar locations within the project, the inclusion or
installation of any equipment or assembly which bears on any surface any name, trademark,
or other insignia which is intended to identify the manufacturer, the vendor, or other
source(s) from which such object has been obtained, is prohibited.

B. Required test lab certification labels shall not be removed nor shall identification specifically
required under the various technical sections of the Specifications be removed.

3.17 EQUIPMENT PADS AND ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Provide concrete pads under all floor mounted Mechanical equipment. Equipment pads shall
conform to the shape of the piece of equipment it serves with a minimum 25 mm margin
around the equipment 28 day, 175 kg/cm2 concrete reinforced with 150 mm x 150 mm
welded wire mesh. Trowel tops and sides of pad to smooth finishes, equal to those of the
floors, with all external corners bull nosed to a 20 mm radius. Shop drawings stamped
UNALTERED shall be used for dimensional guidance in sizing pads.

B. Provide galvanized anchor bolts for all equipment placed on concrete equipment pads, inertia
blocks, or on concrete slabs. Provide bolts of the size and number recommended by the
manufacturer of the equipment and locate by means of suitable templates. Equipment
installed on vibration isolators shall be secured to the isolator. Secure the isolator to the
floor, pad, or support as recommended by the vibration isolation manufacturer.

C. Where the equipment is mounted on gypsum board partitions, the mounting screws shall
pass through the gypsum board and securely attach to the partition studs. They shall be

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 31

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

attached to 15 cm square, galvanized metal back-plates which are attached to the gypsum
board with an approved non-flammable adhesive. Toggle bolts installed in gypsum board
partitions are not acceptable.

3.18 STRUCTURAL EXPANSION JOINT

A. The Contractor shall make necessary provision of providing flexible connector / joints where
services / piping passes through the structural expansion joints as shown on architectural /
structural drawings whatever applicable.

3.19 SPOOL PIECE AND TAPPING POINT

A. Any successive Valves, successive valve and strainer shall be not connected together, a spool
piece of piping shall be provided in between as per practical standards.

B. Any tapping point from the main pipe shall not be tapping directly from the changing of flow
direction. Minimum Clear distance of (3 D) from the changing in the flow direction fitting to
the tapping point shall be maintained. Where D: is the Pipe Diameter.

3.20 MOCK-UP / BENCHMARK INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall arrange and submit inspection for Mock-up / benchmark installation for all
services / trades prior to proceed with the same further installation.

B. If the Benchmark is a common for different trades such as installation of sanitary-wares,

Contractor shall arrange inspection with all Particular Concerned Disciplines.

C. The Contractor may proceed with further installations only when the benchmark has been
approved by the Engineer.

3.21 RAW AND DOMESTIC WATER FLUSHING AND CHEMICAL DISINFECTION

A. Disinfecting procedures shall be as prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods

are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or
follow procedures described below:
1. Raw and Domestic water tanks including Domestic hot and cold water network pipe
lines including valves from the tanks to the fixture discharge units shall be cleaned
and chemically disinfected prior placed the system in service as prescribed in relevant
section 221116 , “DOMESTIC WATER PIPING - CLEANING, FLUSHING AND
DISINFECTION”
2. Domestic hot water primary circuit (from LTHW boilers and Hot water storage tanks)
pipe lines including valve shall be chemically disinfected (static and dynamic
flushing) prior placed the system in service as:
a. Static and dynamic flushing shall perform to the hot water primary circuit as
similar as perform in the chilled water closed circuit.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 32

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

3.22 BACK FLUSHING OF THE PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. Back flushing shall be conducted to all heat exchangers as described in Division 223500
“DOMESTIC WATER HEAT EXCAHNGER”.

3.23 BALNACING OF HOT WATER

A. Prior to handing over and / or prior take over certificate, All Commissioning Set / Double
Regulating Valves in the Primary Circuit (Pipe line from Boilers to calorifiers) shall be
adjusted by the flow as indicated. Commissioning shall be carried-out by Commissioning
agency accepted by the Engineer.

B. Prior to handing over / or prior take over certificate, All Commissioning Set / Double
Regulating Valves in the secondary hot water return Lines shall be adjusted by the flow as
indicated. Commissioning shall be carried-out by Commissioning agency accepted by the
Engineer

3.24 DI-ELECTRIC UNION

A. Di-electric Union shall be installed in between dissimilar Materials even if not shown on the
drawings.

B. Refer to other related section 220500 “COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING –
DIELECTRIC FITTING & PIPING CONNECTIONS”

3.25 UNION

A. Union shall be installed in the threaded joints pipe line for all threaded joint Plantroom
Equipment, valves, strainers, etc for ease further replacement even if not shown on the
drawings. Union shall be same piping material. Refer to other related section 220500
“COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING – PIPING CONNECTIONS”

3.26 AIR ADMITTANCE VALVE:

A. Air admittance valve to be provided for the counter bars’ hand wash sink , drainage piping
when the vent pipe installation is not doable. Air admittance valve shall be as:

1. Fixture Air Admittance valve:

a. Standard: ASSE 1051, type A for single fixture or type B for branch piping.
b. Housing: Plastic.
c. Operation: Mechanical sealing Diaphragm.
d. Size: Same as connected fixture or branch vent piping.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 33

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

3.27 DELIVERY, DRYAGE AND HAULING

A. Provide drayage, hauling, hoisting, shoring and placement in the building of equipment
specified and be responsible for the timely delivery and installation of equipment as required
by the construction schedule. If any item of equipment is received prior to the time it is
required, the Contractor shall be responsible for its proper storage and protection until the
time it is required. Pay for all costs of demurrage or storage.

B. If equipment is not delivered or installed at the project site in a timely manner as required by
the project construction schedule, the Contractor shall be responsible for resulting
disassembly, re-assembly, manufacturer’s supervision, shoring, general construction
modification, delays, overtime cost, etc., at no additional cost to the Contract.

3.28 TESTING OF SYSTEMS

A. Comply with the project construction schedule for the date of final performance and
acceptance testing, and complete work sufficiently in advance of the Contract completion
date to permit the execution of the testing prior to occupancy and Contract closeout.
Complete any adjustments and/or alterations which the final acceptance tests indicate as
necessary for the proper functioning of all equipment prior to the completion date. Refer
Section 15950 and also see individual sections for extend of testing required.

B. Provide a detailed schedule of completion indicating when each system is to be completed

and outlining when field testing will be performed. Submit completion schedule for review
within six months after the notice to proceed by the Engineer has been given. Update this
schedule periodically as the project progresses.

C. Contractor Must arrange the necessary and required testing Devices / instruments / tools with
a valid due calibration along with its Calibration Certificate and all of necessary pertinent
documentations during the testing inspection of the system with the Engineer.

3.29 ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY INTERFACES

A. The Contractor shall provide power supply points/isolators at certain designated locations
within the development for all mechanical and electrical installations as indicated on the
drawings. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate and make connections to
these power supply points/isolators and to provide all the necessary ‘down-stream’ power
supply distribution board/network to the mechanical system’s control panels, equipment,
sensors, field devices, etc.

3.30 INTEGRATED CONTROL CONSOLE

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 34

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. The Contractor shall include the supply and installation of a custom-built control console of
proprietary make in the Command Centre, Security Room to integrate all control panels,
mimic panels, and central equipment of the following systems:

1. Ventilation Control Panel for all emergency operation fans/systems

2. Fire Protection Pumps Control Panel
3. Fireman’s Override Control Panel
4. All other systems to be housed inside the FCC Room

B. The proposed manufacturer detail of the Integrated Control Console shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval before manufacturing commences. All necessary interfacing works
with other mechanical and electrical systems shall be included.

3.31 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS, PERSONNEL AND PROPERTY

A. All material and goods shall be delivered to the site in new condition, properly packed and
protected against damage due to handling, adverse weather or other circumstances, and be
kept in packing case or under protective covering until required for use.

B. Any items suffering damage in transit or on site shall be rejected and replaced without extra
cost and time to the Contract.

C. In the case of equipment and materials which originate from other countries and/or different
climatic conditions, all such equipment and material shall be adequately and securely packed
for safe transportation with due regard to the climatic conditions encountered in transit and
arrival.

D. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for all apparatus, equipment and materials
furnished by him in connection with his works, and special care shall be taken to protect all
parts thereof in such a manner as may be necessary or as directed.

E. Protection shall include covers, crating, sheds, stores or other means to protect the apparatus,
equipment and materials from the weather, water damage and corrosion, and to prevent dirt,
grit, plaster or other foreign substances from entering the working parts of machinery or
equipment. Special care shall be taken to keep all opening of pipes, ducts, etc. closed while
in storage or during the course of delivery and erection/installation.

F. The Contractor shall take precautions to avoid unnecessary damage among the M&E
installation.

G. All precautions shall be taken for the safety of personnel on site. The Contractor shall also
conform to the general regulations governing personnel on the site and must keep to the
working space allocated for their use.

H. Fire Extinguishers, Emergency evacuation plans, Voice Evacuation System and other
necessary site safeties shall be provided temporary by the Contractor under his expenses
during all of the Construction phases until the date of take-over Certificate.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 35

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

3.32 INTERFACING WITH ALL SERVICES AND SYSTEMS

A. General

1. The Contractor shall provide all necessary provisions for interfacing amongst
installation, services, and equipment. All necessary sensors, current/voltage
transformers, voltage-free contacts, relays, auxiliary contacts, terminals, transducers,
etc. for interfacing works shall be provided by the Contractor.
2. All control/monitoring wiring from sensors, equipment, and components for the
interfacing shall be terminated at a separate interfacing compartment located at the
respective equipment/system’s switchboard or control panel. The interfacing
compartment shall be completed with all necessary connectors, terminals, and with
proper identifications to allow interfacing works to be easily carried out. The
compartment shall clearly indicate “Extra Low Voltage Cable Only. No Power Cable
Connection”. Where there is no equipment/system switchboard or control panel
involved, the Contractor shall provide separate interfacing panels with provisions
same as the interfacing compartment as described above. The locations of the
switchboard/control panels and the interfacing panels shall be properly coordinated.
3. For every control panel and each module of the switchboard, at least five (5) spare
terminals shall be provided for future interfacing works.
4. Wiring and cables for interfacing with the fire alarm system and other fire protection
and life safety systems shall be fire rated to comply with Civil Defence’s
requirements.
5. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, interfacing wiring from Fire
Alarm system shall be provided and terminated at the terminals of the interfacing
compartments or panels by the Fire Alarm System and Building Management System
installation respectively. The Contractor shall co-ordinate the current and voltage
requirements for the interfacing works/provisions. The type of provisions for
interfacing signals shall be as follows, unless otherwise specified:

a. Digital inputs and outputs : voltage-free dry contact

b. Analog inputs and outputs : 4 – 20 mA or 0 – 10 Mv

6. All the interface provisions shall be DC operated and rated not more than 50 mA.
7. The Contractor shall provide and make all power cable connections from mechanical
equipment, local control panels, and distribution boards to the electrical isolators or
power points (including cable termination) provided under Division 16 works.
Location of power supply isolators and power points shall be properly coordinated.
8. In addition to the interfacing requirements shown on the Drawings, interfacing
provisions as described below shall also be provided and included in the Contract.

B. Electrical Installation

1. The Electrical Installation shall provide the following:

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 36

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

a. Isolators and power points (fused spur units) for all mechanical equipment and
systems. Where shown on the Drawings, the Electrical installation shall include
direct power cable connections to the mechanical system’s main motor control
centers
b. Electrical bonding of all roof equipment and external metal cladding including
provisions and connection of bonding cables
c. Power supply to ACMV system’s control components/sensors shall however be
provided under the ACMV installation from the corresponding equipment
motor control panel.

C. Plumbing and Sanitary Installation

1. The Plumbing and Sanitary Installation shall provide the following:

a. Water supply connections to water tanks under other mechanical and electrical
installation including isolation valve.
b. Water Reserve tank’s visual level indicator and Ultrasonic Water level
indicator.
c. Drainage with air gap for Backflow Preventer valves and condensate drain from
air handling units and fan coil units including insulation of drain stacks
receiving condensate

3.33 PAINTING

A. All equipment, enclosures, housings, air ducts, Metallic piping, trunking, cable trays,
conduits, etc. which are exposed to view (including those in outdoor plant rooms) shall be
provided with color paint finishes.

B. All metal surfaces requiring painting shall be provided with two (2) coats of asphalt
aluminum paint, primer coated, and two (2) coats of finished paint.

C. No painting shall be done on damp surfaces. Surface should be tidy and clean prior applying
the paint

D. The Contractor shall submit color scheme for the entire Works for co-ordination and
submission for approval by the Engineer.

E. Painting requirements as stated in codes and regulations or required by local authorities shall
also be provided.

3.34 SAFETY EQUIPMENT AND NOTICES

A. The Contractor shall supply and install the following safety equipment and notices for each
switchboard/control panel in the respective switch rooms and plant rooms:

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 37

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

1. Solid rubber insulated mats complying with BS 921 in front of and extending the full
length of the control panel/switchboards.
2. Copies of all statutory safety notices, regulations and instructions for resuscitation and
treatment after electrical shock.
3. Danger signs on the switchboards/control panels, the doors of sub-station, switch-
rooms and electrical riser duct rooms and elsewhere to the requirements.
4. A copy of the main single line diagram, varnished and mounted on suitable hard
backing and framed (in glass panel), showing clearly the full details of the electrical
and mechanical systems as supplied and installed.

3.35 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary licenses as required by all
relevant authorities before operation of any equipment/system.

B. All testing and commissioning to enable proper operation of the Works shall be completed to
the satisfaction of the Engineer in accordance with the construction programme or before the
issuance of Taking Over Certificate, whichever is earlier.

C. All final adjustments and final balancing of the equipment/system operation shall be
completed before the Date of Taking Over Certificate.

D. The complete testing and commissioning are deemed to be concluded successfully only
when the installation operated properly within the specified limits of its rating continuously
without failure of any kind.

E. The Contractor shall establish the dates by which permanent utilities shall be available for
testing and commissioning of equipment and take this into account in his programme, or
make suitable arrangements to test and commission with temporary power based on
programme. All Testing and Commissioning for Non- Fire and Life Safety Systems shall
have the Engineer’s approval prior to inspections / testing.

F. The Contractor shall arrange for all submissions to Authorities and pay the cost of statutory
inspections and certificates.

3.36 HANDOVER TO

A. The Contractor is full responsible to arrange and perform any necessary testing requested
without any additional cost to the Client.

B. Contractor Must arrange the necessary and required testing Devices / instruments / tools with
a valid due calibration during the testing inspection of the system.

C. Contractor shall action all of the comments prior the issuance of take-over certificate by the
Engineer.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 38

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

D. At the time of handover of the Works after the Taking Over Certificate, the whole
installation shall be in ‘as-new’ conditions. The Contractor shall, during the course of the
Contract, protect all plant and equipment and shall restore/repaint as necessary before
handover of the installation.

3.37 THE ENGINEER’s SNAGING

A. The Contractor is directed to attend / action for the Engineer snagging prior take over
certificate.

B. Minor snagging may action after the soft opening, but shall be finished prior the official /
grand opening.

3.38 SITE FACILITIES DEMOLISHING

A. The Contractor is directed to demolish all of site facilities and their services prior official /
grand opening.

3.39 ATTENDANCE TO TAKING OVER CERTIFICATE APPLICATION

A. The Contractor shall provide all necessary attendance and pertinent documentations to
inspections by the Engineer and authorities for the purpose of Taking Over Certificate
application.

3.40 TAKING OVER PROCEDURE

A. The Contractor shall adhere to the sequence of handover described below:

1. The Contractor shall submit the arrangement of the commissioning to the satisfaction
of the Engineer. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any person.
2. The installation shall be ‘practically complete’ following satisfactory commissioning
and the submission of final commissioning data prior to the issuance of Taking Over
Certificate by the Engineer. It is solely the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that
all plant/equipment shall have their respective warranty by the respective
equipment/plant supplier directly.
3. A joint inspection shall be held among the Employer , the Engineer and Contractor to
establish an outstanding works and defects list. All outstanding works/defects shall be
completed within one month from the date when the Taking Over Certificate was
issued.
4. If, at the end of the one month’s period from the date of issuing the Taking Over
Certificate, any defects/outstanding works mentioned in the list still exist, the
Engineer is empowered to appoint a body to rectify all defects/outstanding works and
deduct the cost involved from the Contract sum.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 39

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

5. The Contractor shall close / action all of the Non Conformance and Field Observation
Reports that are critical for operation prior issuance of the take-over Certificate by the
Engineer.
6. Room and Field Demonstration Training to the Employer as detailed below in this
Section “Tuition / Training” shall be Conducted prior the issuance of Take-over
Certificate.
7. The Engineer’s instructions (if any) shall be actioned by the Contractor prior the
issuance of takeover Certificate. The Contractor shall submit installation Inspection
against each An Engineer’s Instruction for the Engineer’s approval.

B. The Contractor shall also refer to other requirements in the relevant clauses of the Contract.

1. Before the Taking Over Certificate is issued, the following must be completed:

a. Operation and Maintenance Instructions Manual, test data and “as-built”

drawings must be submitted and approved by the Engineer. Computer “soft”
copies of these manuals and drawings shall also be submitted.
b. The Employer or his representative must be fully instructed in the operation of
the system. A written acknowledgment from the Employer shall be required.
c. All tools, Repairing kits and spares shall be handed over. A written
acknowledgment from the Employer shall be required.
d. Written confirmation from the Contractor to indicate the installation is
completed according to Performance Requirement.
e. Submit and obtain the approval by the Engineer. Maintenance schedule for the
installation during the Maintenance and Defect Notification Period.

3.41 AS-NEW CONDITIONS

A. At the time of handover of the Works after the Taking Over Certificate, the whole
installation shall be in ‘as-new’ conditions. The Contractor shall, during the course of the
Contract, protect all plant and equipment and shall restore/repaint as necessary before
handover of the installation.

3.42 TUITION/TRAINING

A. The Tenderer shall submit a schedule in the Tender submission list all works and systems for
which the Contractor has to provide training. The Schedule should have information include
list of recommended training courses within each works/systems, location of the training
courses (local/overseas). Trainers details (from the manufacturers premises where
applicable), courses duration, unit rate of the training in per head basis.

B. The Contractor shall provide sufficient and proper instructions to the trainees nominated by
the Employer in the commissioning, operation, maintenance, servicing and trouble-shooting
of the various plant and systems.

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 40

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220000 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

C. The Contractor shall Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide training

facilities and training courses and ensure that the trainees nominated by the Employer will
acquire full knowledge and appreciation of all aspects of the day to day operation,
breakdown and routine maintenance, and fault diagnosis of all plant, equipment and system
installed under this Contract. Detailed syllabus and the timing of the training courses shall be
submitted.

D. The Trainees nominated by the Employer will attend the training courses, and the Contractor
shall allow them reasonable access to technical information and documentation required for
proper operation and maintenance. The Contractor shall also explain this information and
documentation to allow the trainees to become fully conversant with all aspects of the
systems.

E. When training is required to be held in overseas facilities, all necessary costs for airfare,
hotel accommodation, local transportation, food, etc. shall be included.

END OF SECTION 220000

Newton Lusail School 220000 - 41

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

SECTION 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00 220500 - 1
 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to this Section.

B The Qatar construction specification (QCS 2014) shall form the basis of the project specifi-
cation. The technical specification is supplemental to QCS (latest revision) and should be
read in conjunction with QCS and all other contract documents. In case of contradiction or
discrepancy between QCS and technical specifications, CONTRACTOR shall incorporate
whichever is more stringent.

1.2 SUMMARY

A This Section includes the following:

1. Adjust list below to suit Project.

2. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
3. Transition fittings.
4. Dielectric fittings.
5. Mechanical sleeve seals.
6. Sleeves.
7. Escutcheons.
8. Grout.
9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
10. Painting and finishing.
11. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spac-
es, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated
spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels

1. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished

occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

2. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambi-

ent temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

3. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical
contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

4. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

B The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. Retain abbreviations that remain after this Section has been edited.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00 220500 - 2
 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

3. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A Product Data:

1. For the following:

a. Transition fittings.
b. Dielectric fittings.
c. Mechanical sleeve seals.
d. Escutcheons.
e. Welding certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A Steel Pipe Welding:

1. Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

a. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
b. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding pro-
cesses involved and that certification is current.

B Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment:

1. Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such pro-

posed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit
breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or
efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
2. Plumbing System materials , installation and testing shall be in accordance with na-
tional standard plumbing code

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.

B Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 COORDINATION

A Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for plumbing installations.

B Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place

concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00 220500 - 3
 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

C Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access
that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Divi-
sion 08, Section 08 31 13 - Access Doors and Frames.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and join-
ing methods.

1. Pipe Threads:

a. ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

A Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

a. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 3.2-mm maximum thickness un-

less thickness or specific material is indicated.

1) Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flang-
es.
2) Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flang-
es.

b. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 3.2 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated; and
full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C Flange Bolts and Nuts:

1. ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts:

1. Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise in-
dicated.

E Solder Filler Metals:

1. ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

F Brazing Filler Metals:

1. AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless
otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00 220500 - 4
 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

otherwise indicated.

G Welding Filler Metals:

1. Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and
chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.3 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A AWWA Transition Couplings:

1. Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with,
piping to be joined.

a. Underground Piping DN 40 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.

b. Underground Piping DN 50 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type cou-
pling.
c. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.

2. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping:

ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve ends same size as piping to be joined, and cor-
rosion-resistant metal band on each end.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A Description:

1. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint,
plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B Insulating Material:

1. Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

2. Revise pressure ratings and temperatures in five paragraphs and associated subpara-
graphs below to suit Project or add other options for specific applications.

C Dielectric Unions:

1. Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 1725-kPa minimum working pressure at

82 deg C.

D Dielectric Flanges:

1. Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 1035- or 2070-kPa minimum

working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E Dielectric-Flange Kits:

1. Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-

type neoprene or Phenolic gasket, Phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, Phenolic
washers, and steel backing washers.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00 220500 - 5
 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

a. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 1035- or 2070-
kPa minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F Dielectric Couplings:

1. Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded

ends; and 2070-kPa minimum working pressure at 107 deg C.

G Dielectric Nipples:

1. Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain,
threaded, or grooved ends; and 2070-kPa minimum working pressure at 107 deg C.

2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A Description:

1. Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space be-
tween pipe and sleeve.

a. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. In-
clude type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
b. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
c. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless of length required to secure pressure
plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.6 SLEEVES

A Galvanized-Steel Sheet:

1. 0.6-mm minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

2.7 ESCUTCHEONS

A Description:
1. Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit
around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
2. Do not delete or combine types of escutcheons in seven paragraphs below until selec-
tions in Part 3 "Piping Systems - Common Requirements" Article are made.

B One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type:

1. Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type:

1. With set screw.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00 220500 - 6
 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

a. Finish: Polished chrome-plated brass.

D Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type:

1. With concealed hinge and set screw.

a. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

E One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type:

1. With spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

F Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type:

1. With concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.

G One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type:

1. Cast-iron floor plate.

H Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type:

1. Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.8 GROUT

A Description:

1. ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

a. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, non-staining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
b. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.
c. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying
piping systems.

B Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of pip-
ing systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate fric-
tion loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicat-
ed unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment
rooms and service areas.

D Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00 220500 - 7
 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically in-
dicated otherwise.

E Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G Install piping at indicated slopes.

H Install piping free of sags and bends.

I Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.

L Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
2. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
3. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
4. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass
type with polished chrome-plated finish.

a. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

stamped-steel type.
b. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass
type with polished chrome-plated finish.
c. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
rough-brass finish.
d. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring
clips.
e. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate
type.
M Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and
roof slabs.

O Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board parti-
tions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 50 mm above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fit-
tings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 6.4-mm annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00 220500 - 8
 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than DN 150.

b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes DN 150 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board
partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproof-
ing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil
pipe to extend sleeve to 50 mm above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07
Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Refer to Division 07, Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants, for materials and installation.

P Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations:

1. Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to al-
low for 25-mm annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical
sleeve seals.

a. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 150 mm in diameter.

b. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 150 mm and larger in diameter.
c. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve.
Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
make watertight seal.

Q Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations:

1. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 25-mm annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
a. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve.
Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
make watertight seal.

R Fire-Barrier Penetrations:

1. Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetra-
tions. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
2. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
3. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for rough-
ing-in requirements.

3.2 PIPE SUPPORT

A Refer to Division Division 22 Section " PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS –

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00 220500 - 9
 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

SUPPORTS” and other related sections.

3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections spec-
ifying piping systems.

B Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before as-
sembly.

D Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full
and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full
ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

a. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry
seal threading is specified.
b. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corrod-
ed or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
E Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding op-
erators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

F Flanged Joints:

1. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. In-
stall gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping DN 50 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final con-
nection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping DN 65 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final con-
nection to each piece of equipment.
3. Edit dielectric connection types in two subparagraphs below for each fluid.
4. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials
of dissimilar metals.
5. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.

3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00 220500 - 10
 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

B Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to
other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.6 PAINTING

A Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sec-

tions "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."

B Damage and Touch-up:

1. Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to
match original factory finish.

3.7 CONCRETE BASES

A Concrete Bases:

1. Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written in-

structions and according to seismic codes at Project.

a. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 100 mm
larger in both directions than supported unit.
b. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 450-mm centers around the full perimeter of the
base.
c. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through
concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
d. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's
setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished
with items to be embedded.
e. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
f. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
g. Use 20.7-MPa, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as
specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
h. Install the concrete plinth of pump so the Center Line of the suction pipe Provi-
sion in the tank in higher than or equal to the suction flange of the pump

3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A Refer to Division 05, Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications, for structural steel.

1. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00 220500 - 11
 220500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

2. Field Welding:

a. Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.9 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor
plumbing materials and equipment.

B Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view
or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners
without splitting wood members.

C Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.10 GROUTING

A Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equip-
ment base plates, and anchors.
B Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G Place grout around anchors.

H Cure placed grout.

END OF SECTION 220500

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00 220500 - 12
 220513 – COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

SECTION 220513 – COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

Newton Lusail School 220513 - 1

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220513 – COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to this Section.

B The Qatar construction specification (QCS 2014) shall form the basis of the project specifi-
cation. The technical specification is supplemental to QCS (latest revision) and should be
read in conjunction with QCS and all other contract documents. In case of contradiction or
discrepancy between QCS and technical specifications, CONTRACTOR shall incorporate
whichever is more stringent.

1.2 SUMMARY

A Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, hor-
izontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to
600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment
manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with
the following:

1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in
plumbing equipment schedules or Sections.

B Compatible with Pump.

C Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

D Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

Newton Lusail School 220513 - 2

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220513 – COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A Duty:

1. Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 50 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet

(1000 m) above sea level.

B Capacity and Torque Characteristics:

1. Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at in-
stalled altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without ex-
ceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A Description:

1. NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B Efficiency:

1. Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C Service Factor:

1. 1.15.

D Multispeed Motors:

1. Variable torque.

a. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
b. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E Multispeed Motors:

1. Separate winding for each speed.

F Rotor:

1. Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G Bearings:

1. Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

H Temperature Rise:

1. Match insulation rating.

Newton Lusail School 220513 - 3

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220513 – COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

I Insulation:

1. Class F.

J Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 10 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

2. Motors Smaller than 10 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

K Enclosure Material:

1. Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes
smaller than.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers:

1. Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Pro-
vide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers:

1. Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller

manufacturer.

a. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, de-

signed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise
pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.
b. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insu-
lation.
c. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
d. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally pro-
tected motors.

C Severe-Duty Motors:

1. Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and require-
ments of specific motor application:

a. Permanent-split capacitor.
b. Split phase.
c. Capacitor start, inductor run.
d. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

Newton Lusail School 220513 - 4

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220513 – COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

B Multispeed Motors:

1. Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C Bearings: -

1. Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.

D Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller:

1. Shaded-pole type.

E Thermal Protection:

1. Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding
temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation.
Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to
normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)

END OF SECTION 220513

Newton Lusail School 220513 - 5

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220516 – EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING

SECTION 220516 – EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

Newton Lusail School 220516 - 1

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220516 – EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to this Section.

B The Qatar construction specification (QCS 2014) shall form the basis of the project specifi-
cation. The technical specification is supplemental to QCS (latest revision) and should be
read in conjunction with QCS and all other contract documents. In case of contradiction or
discrepancy between QCS and technical specifications, CONTRACTOR shall incorporate
whichever is more stringent.

1.2 SUMMARY

A Section Includes:

1. Metal-bellows expansion joints.

2. Rubber expansion joints.
3. Flexible-hose expansion joints.
4. Pipe bends and loops.
5. Alignment guides and anchors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A BR:

1. Butyl rubber.

B Buna-N:

1. Nitrile rubber.

C CR:

1. Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

D CSM:

1. Chlorosulfonyl-polyethylene rubber.

E EPDM:

1. Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

F NR:

1. Natural rubber.

Newton Lusail School 220516 - 2

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220516 – EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A Compatibility:

1. Products shall be suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and
temperatures.

B Capability:

1. Products shall absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data:

1. For each type of product indicated.

B Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. For each anchor and alignment guide indicated to comply with performance require-
ments and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping

systems and for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and bends.
b. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions
and methods of assembly and attachment to building structure.
c. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building
structure.
d. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating,
end connections, and location for each expansion joint.

C Welding certificates.

1. Product Certificates: For each type of pipe expansion joint, signed by product manu-
facturer.
2. Maintenance Data: For pipe expansion joints to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A Welding Qualifications:

1. Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

a. Steel Shapes and Plates: AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
b. Welding to Piping: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

Newton Lusail School 220516 - 3

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220516 – EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A Refer to approved manufacturers list

2.2 EXPANSION JOINTS

A Rubber Expansion Joints:

1. ASTM F 1123, fabric-reinforced rubber with external control rods and complying with
FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-Metallic Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Con-
nectors".

a. Arch Type: Single or multiple arches.

b. Spherical Type: Single or multiple spheres.

1) Minimum Pressure and Temperature Ratings for DN 40 to DN 100: 1035

kPa at 104 deg C.
2) Minimum Pressure and Temperature Ratings for DN 125 and DN 150:
966 kPa at 93 deg C.
3) Minimum Pressure and Temperature Ratings for DN 200 to DN 300: 966
kPa at 82 deg C.

c. Material: EPDM.
d. End Connections: Full-faced, integral, steel flanges with steel retaining rings.

B Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints:

1. Manufactured assembly with two flexible-metal-hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-

degree return bend or center section of flexible hose; with inlet and outlet elbow fit-
tings, corrugated-metal inner hoses, and braided outer sheaths.

a. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints for Copper Piping: Copper-alloy fittings with

solder joint end connections.

1) DN 50 and Smaller: Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with

3100 kPa at 21 deg C and 2340 kPa at 232 deg C ratings.
2) DN 65 to DN 100: Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel
sheaths with 2070 kPa at 21 deg C and 1550 kPa at 232 deg C ratings.

b. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Carbon-steel fittings with

threaded end connections for DN 50 and smaller and flanged end connections
for DN 65 and larger.

1) DN 50 and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel

sheaths with 3100 kPa at 21 deg C and 2250 kPa at 315 deg C ratings.

Newton Lusail School 220516 - 4

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220516 – EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING

2) DN 65 to DN 150: Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel

sheaths with 1380 kPa at 21 deg C and 1000 kPa at 315 deg C ratings.
3) DN 200 to DN 300: Stainless steel hoses and single-braid, stainless steel
sheaths with 860 kPa at 21 deg C and 625 kPa at 315 deg C ratings.

2.3 ALIGNMENT GUIDES

A Description:

1. Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for alignment
of piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.

2.4 MATERIALS FOR ANCHORS

A Steel Shapes and Plates:

1. ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B Bolts and Nuts:

1. ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.

C Washers:

1. ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.

D Mechanical Fasteners:

1. Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened portland ce-
ment concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.

b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

E Chemical Fasteners:

1. Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with hardened portland cement con-
crete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

a. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, 2-component epoxy resin
suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be in-
stalled.
b. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud,
unless otherwise indicated.
c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

F Concrete:

Newton Lusail School 220516 - 5

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220516 – EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING

1. Portland cement mix, 20.7 MPa minimum. Comply with requirements in Division 03
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.

G Grout:

1. ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink,

nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

a. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

b. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION

A Install manufactured, nonmetallic expansion joints according to FSA's "Technical Handbook:

Non-Metallic Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors."

B Install expansion joints of sizes matching size of piping in which they are installed.

C Install alignment guides to allow expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

3.2 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION

A Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly ab-
sorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.

B Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.

C Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and Pres-
sure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

D Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 SWING CONNECTIONS

A Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings, including tee
in main.

B Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least pipe fittings, including
tee in riser.

C Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings, in-
cluding tee in main.

3.4 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE INSTALLATION

Newton Lusail School 220516 - 6

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220516 – EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING

A Install guides on piping adjoining pipe expansion fittings and loops.

Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.

3.5 ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by

ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

B Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to
structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.

C Construct concrete anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated and include

embedded fasteners.

D Install pipe anchors according to expansion-joint manufacturer's written instructions if ex-

pansion joints are indicated.

E Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors installed
on or in concrete.

END OF SECTION 220516

Newton Lusail School 220516 - 7

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

Newton Lusail School 220519 - 1

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B The Qatar construction specification (QCS 2014) shall form the basis of the project specifi-
cation. The technical specification is supplemental to QCS (latest revision) and should be
read in conjunction with QCS and all other contract documents. In case of contradiction or
discrepancy between QCS and technical specifications, CONTRACTOR shall incorporate
whichever is more stringent.

1.2 SUMMARY

A Section Includes:

1. Thermometers.
2. Gauges.
3. Test plugs.

B Related Sections:

1. Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for domestic and fire-
protection water service meters outside the building.
2. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for domestic and fire-protection water
service meters inside the building.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

B EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves.

B Shop Drawings: Schedule for thermometers and gages indicating manufacturer's number,
scale range, and location for each.

C Product Certificates: For each type of thermometer and gage, signed by product
manufacturer.

Newton Lusail School 220519 - 2

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

a. Refer to approved manufacturers list.

2.2 METAL-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A Case: Die-cast aluminum or brass 178 mm long.

B Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic-liquid filled, with magnifying lens.

C Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale

markings.

D Window: Glass.

E Connector: Rigid, straight type.

F Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to
suit installation.

G Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of
1.5 percent of range.

2.3 DIRECT-MOUNTING, VAPOR-ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS

A Case: type, drawn steel or cast aluminum 152-mm diameter.

B Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element.

C Movement: Mechanical, connecting element and pointer.

D Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.

E Pointer: Red metal.

F Window: Glass.

G Ring: Stainless steel.

H Connector: Rigid, bottom type.

I Thermal System: Liquid- or mercury-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass

stem for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.

J Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of
1.5 percent of range.

Newton Lusail School 220519 - 3

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

2.4 REMOTE-MOUNTING, VAPOR-ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS

A Case: Dry type, drawn steel or cast aluminum 152-mm diameter with holes for panel mount-
ing.

B Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element.

C Movement: Mechanical, connecting element and pointer.

D Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.

E Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.

F Window: Glass.

G Ring: Stainless steel.

H Connector: Bottom union type.

I Thermal System: Liquid- or mercury-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass

stem for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.

J Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of
1.5 percent of range.

2.5 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS

A Description: Direct-mounting, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers complying with

ASME B40.3.

B Case: Dry type, stainless steel with 127-mm diameter.

C Element: Bimetal coil.

D Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.

E Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.

F Window: Glass.

G Ring: Stainless steel.

H Connector: Rigid, bottom type.

I Stem: Metal, for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.

J Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of
1.5 percent of range.

Newton Lusail School 220519 - 4

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

2.6 PRESSURE GAUGES

A Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: Indicating-dial type complying with

ASME B40.100.

1. Case: Dry type, drawn steel or cast aluminum152-mm diameter.

2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Pressure Connection: Brass, DN 8, bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indi-
cated.
4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
6. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.
7. Window: Glass.
8. Ring: Stainless steel.
9. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale.
10. Vacuum-Pressure Range: 100 kPa of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure.
11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.

B Remote-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: ASME B40.100, indicating-dial type.

1. Case: Dry type, drawn steel or cast aluminum 152-mm diameter with holes for panel
mounting.
2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Pressure Connection: Brass, DN 8, bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indi-
cated.
4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
6. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.
7. Window: Glass.
8. Ring: Stainless steel.
9. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale.
10. Vacuum-Pressure Range: 100 kPa of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure.
11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.

C Pressure-Gauge Fittings:

1. Valves: DN 8 brass or stainless-steel needle type.

2. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, DN 8 brass bushing with corrosion-resistant, porous-metal
disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.

2.7 TEST PLUGS

A Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and gasketed
and threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping.

B Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 3450 kPa at 93 deg C.

C Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves.

1. Insert material for water service at minus 7 to plus 93 deg C shall be CR.
2. Insert material for water service at minus 35 to plus 136 deg C shall be EPDM.

Newton Lusail School 220519 - 5

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

D Test Kit: Furnish two test kits containing one pressure gage and adaptor, one thermometer,
and carrying case. Pressure gage, adapter probes, and thermometer sensing elements shall be
of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.

1. Pressure Gage: Small bourdon-tube insertion type with 51- to 76-mm diameter dial
and probe. Dial range shall be 0 to 1380 kPa.
2. Low-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 25- to 51-mm-
diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be minus 4 to plus
52 deg C.
3. High-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 25- to 51-mm diame-
ter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be minus 18 to plus 104
deg C.
4. Carrying case shall have formed instrument padding.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS

A Pressure Rating of Thermo-well shall be rated as pump rated.

B Install remote-mounting, vapor-actuated dial thermometers in the Secondary outlet of each

domestic, hot-water storage tank.

C Install dry-case-type, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers at suction and discharge of each

Hot water pump.

D Install dry-case-type, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers at Primary inlet and outlet of

each hot-water storage tank.

E Install dry-case-type, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers at Primary inlet and outlet of

each hot-water storage tank.

F Install dry-case-type, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers at Primary and secondary inlet

and outlet of each Domestic Water and swimming pool Heat Exchanger.

G Install dry-case-type, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers at inlet and outlet of each Elec-
tric Heater.

H Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:

1. Domestic Hot Water Secondary Lines: Minus 1 to plus 82 deg C, with 1-degree scale
divisions.

2. Domestic Hot Water Primary Lines: 0 to plus 120 deg C, with 1-degree scale divi-
sions.
3. Domestic Cold Water: Minus 18 to plus 38 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions.

3.2 GAUGE APPLICATIONS

A Scale range of Pressure gauge shall be suitable for the pressure measured, at any case, the
range shall not exceed Double of the measured value.

Newton Lusail School 220519 - 6

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

B Pressure Rating of Pressure gauges and its syphon shall be rated as pump rated.

C Install dry-case-type pressure gages, 100mm dial diameter with suitable scale range as men-
tioned above for the following:
1. Upstream and downstream of each Pressure Reducing Valve.
2. Primary and secondary piping inlet and outlet of each Domestic water and Swimming
pool Heat Exchangers.
3. Primary and secondary piping inlet and outlet of each Domestic hot water storage
tanks.
4. Suction and Discharge of each pump.
5. Inlet and outlet of each water heater serving swimming pool.
6. Inlet and outlet of each controller of the Automatic Multimedia Filter, Automatic
Activated Carbon Filter and Polishing Softener.

D Install dry-case-type pressure gauges at discharge of Air Blower. Pressure Rating of Pressure
gauge and its syphon shall be rated as Air Blower rated. (0 to Plus 1000) mbar Scale range
with vacuum.

3.3 INSTALLATIONS

A Install direct-mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

B Install remote-mounting dial thermometers on panel, with tubing connecting panel and ther-
mometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

C Install direct-mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at
most readable position.

D Install remote-mounting pressure gages on panel.

E Install needle-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage.

F Install test plugs in tees in piping.

G Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.

H Install connection fittings for attachment to portable indicators in accessible locations.

I Install thermometers and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance for thermometers, gages, machines, and equipment.

J Adjust faces of thermometers and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

END OF SECTION 220519

Newton Lusail School 220519 - 7

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

Newton Lusail School 220523 - 1

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to this Section.

B. The Qatar construction specification (QCS 2014) shall form the basis of the project specifi-
cation. The technical specification is supplemental to QCS (latest revision) and should be
read in conjunction with QCS and all other contract documents. In case of contradiction or
discrepancy between QCS and technical specifications, CONTRACTOR shall incorporate
whichever is more stringent.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Bronze angle valves.

2. Bronze ball valves.
3. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves.
4. Bronze lift checks valves.
5. Bronze swing checks valves.
6. Iron swing checks valves.
7. Iron swing check valves with closure control.
8. Iron, plate-type checks valves.
9. Bronze gate valves.
10. Iron gate valves.
11. Bronze globe valves.
12. Iron globe valves.
13. Chain wheels.

B. Related Sections:

1. Retain Sections in subparagraphs below that contain requirements Contractor might

expect to find in this Section but are specified in other Sections.
2. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections
only.
3. Division 22, Section 220553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment, for
valve tags and schedules.

Newton Lusail School 220523 - 2

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP:

1. Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM:

1. Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

2. Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

C. NRS:

1. Nonrising stem.

D. OS&Y:

1. Outside screw and yoke.

E. RS:

1. Rising stem.

F. SWP:

1. Steam working pressure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. For each type of valve indicated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations for Valves:

1. Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.
3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

Newton Lusail School 220523 - 3

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

C. NSF Compliance:

1. NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Refer to approved manufacturers list.

Newton Lusail School 220523 - 4

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

B. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

C. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings:

1. Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

D. Valve Sizes:

1. Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

E. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.

2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves DN 150 and smaller.
3. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of
size and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation"
Article.

F. Valves in Insulated Piping:

1. With 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions and the following features:

a. Gate Valves: With rising stem.

b. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive materi-
al, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the
vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

G. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.

2. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
3. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

H. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections:

1. MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.
b. CWP Rating: 1380 kPa.
c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.
d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem and Disc: Bronze.

Newton Lusail School 220523 - 5

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

f. Packing: Asbestos free.

g. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

1. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-110.
b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa).
d. Body Design: Two piece.
e. Body Material: Bronze.
f. Ends: Threaded.
g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.
h. Stem: Bronze.
i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
j. Port: Full.

2.4 IRON SINGLE FLANGE BUTRTFLY VALVES

A. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Ductile-Iron Disc:-

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I.

b. CWP Rating: 1380 kPa.
c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pres-
sure without use of downstream flange.
d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron.
e. Seat: EPDM.
f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel.
g. Disc: Nickel-plated ductile iron.

2.5 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.

b. CWP Rating: 1380 kPa.
c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.
d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.
e. Ends: Threaded.
f. Disc: Bronze.

Newton Lusail School 220523 - 6

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

2.6 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 250, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-125.

b. CWP Rating: 400 psig (2760 kPa).
c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron.
d. Style: Globe, spring loaded.
e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Seat: Bronze.

2.7 IRON, CENTER GUIDED CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat:

1. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-125.
b. CWP Rating: 1380 kPa.
c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron.
d. Style: Globe, spring loaded.
e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Seat: EPDM.

B. Class 125, NRS Bronze Gate Valves:

1. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.
b. CWP Rating: 1380 kPa.
c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.
d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem: Bronze.
f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.
g. Packing: Asbestos free.
h. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

C. Class 125, RS Bronze Gate Valves:

1. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2.
b. CWP Rating: 1380 kPa.
c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.
d. Ends: Threaded.

Newton Lusail School 220523 - 7

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

e. Stem: Bronze.
f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.
g. Packing: Asbestos free.
h. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

2.8 IRON GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, NRS, Iron Gate Valves:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I.

b. CWP Rating: 1380 kPa.
c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Trim: Bronze.
f. Disc: Solid wedge.
g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

B. Class 250, NRS, Iron Gate Valves:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I.

b. CWP Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa).
c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Trim: Bronze.
f. Disc: Solid wedge.
g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

C. Class 250, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I.

b. CWP Rating: 3450 kPa.
c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Trim: Bronze.
f. Disc: Solid wedge.
g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

Newton Lusail School 220523 - 8

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

2.9 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.

b. CWP Rating: 1380 kPa.
c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.
d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem and Disc: Bronze.
f. Packing: Asbestos free.
g. Handwheel: Malleable iron

2.10 IRON GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Globe Valves:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-85, Type I.

b. CWP Rating: 1380 kPa.
c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Trim: Bronze.
f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping
and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material
composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

Newton Lusail School 220523 - 9

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Center-Guided and Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service
but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Gate valves.

2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type.
3. Throttling Service: Globe valves.
4. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. DN 50 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.

b. DN 65 and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron swing check valves with lever and
weight or with spring or iron, center-guided, metal seat check valves.
c. DN 65 and Larger for Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage: Iron swing check
valves with lever and weight or spring.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of
valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, DN 50 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint
valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
2. For Copper Tubing, DN 65 to DN 100: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-
end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

Newton Lusail School 220523 - 10

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

3. For Copper Tubing, DN 125 and Larger: Flanged ends.

4. For Steel Piping, DN 50 and Smaller: Threaded ends.
5. For Steel Piping, DN 65 to DN 100: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end
option is indicated in valve schedules below.
6. For Steel Piping, DN 125 and Larger: Flanged ends.
7. For Grooved-End Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.

3.5 LOW-PRESSURE, COMPRESSED-AIR VALVE SCHEDULE 1035 kPa OR LESS)

(NOT APPLICABLE).

A. Pipe DN 50 and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.
2. Ball Valves: Two-piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim.
3. Bronze Lift Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125bronze disc.
5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.

B. Pipe NPS DN 65 and Larger:

1. Iron Valves, DN 65 to DN 100: May be provided with threaded ends instead of

flanged ends.
2. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, NBR seat, and stainless - steel disc.
3. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves: Class175 CWP.
4. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125 metal seats.
5. Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves: 300 CWP.
6. Iron, Center-Guided Check Valves: Class 125 globe seat.
7. Single plate; metal seat.
8. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.

3.6 HIGH-PRESSURE, COMPRESSED-AIR VALVE SCHEDULE 1035 TO 1380 KPA

(NOT APPLICABLE).

A. Pipe DN 50 and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.
2. Ball Valves: Two pieces, full port, bronze with bronze trim.
3. Bronze Lift Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125 bronze disc.
5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.

B. DN 65 and Larger:

1. Iron Valves, DN 65 to DN 100: May be provided with threaded ends instead of

flanged ends.
2. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, NBR seat, ductile-iron disc.
3. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves: 300 CWP.

Newton Lusail School 220523 - 11

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

4. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 250, metal seats.

5. Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves: 300 CWP.
6. Iron, Center-Guided Check Valves: Class 125 metal seat.
7. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.

3.7 DOMESTIC, HOT AND COLD WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe DN 50 and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.
2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125 bronze disc.
3. Ball Valves: Two pieces, full port, or bronze with bronze trim.
4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.
6. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125 bronze disc.

B. Pipe DN 65 and Larger:

1. Iron Valves, DN 65 to DN 100: May be provided with threaded ends instead of

flanged ends.
2. Iron Ball Valves: Class 150.
3. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, ductile - iron disc.
4. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves: Class 175 CWP.
5. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125 metal seats.
6. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control: Class 125, lever and weight.
7. Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves: 300 CWP.
8. Iron, Center-Guided Check Valves: Class 125, metal seat.
9. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.
10. Iron Globe Valves: Class 125.

3.8 SANITARY WASTE AND STORM DRAINAGE VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe DN 50 and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.
2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125 bronze disc.
3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
4. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.
5. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.

B. Pipe DN 65 and Larger:

1. Iron Valves, DN 65 to DN 100: May be provided with threaded ends instead of

flanged ends.
2. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.
3. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control: Class 125, lever and weight.
4. Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves: 300 CWP.

Newton Lusail School 220523 - 12

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

5. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.

6. Iron Globe Valves: Class 125.

3.9 OTHER SPECIAL VALVES:

A. Refer to the Related Division 22, section 221119 “DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
SPECIALTIES”

END OF SECTION 220523

Newton Lusail School 220523 - 13

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

Newton Lusail School 220529 - 1

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to this Section.

B. The Qatar construction specification (QCS 2014) shall form the basis of the project specifi-
cation. The technical specification is supplemental to QCS (latest revision) and should be
read in conjunction with QCS and all other contract documents. In case of contradiction or
discrepancy between QCS and technical specifications, CONTRACTOR shall incorporate
whichever is more stringent.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and
equipment:-

1. Adjust list below to suit Project.

2. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
3. Trapeze pipe hangers.
4. Metal framing systems.
5. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
6. Fastener systems.
7. Pipe stands.
8. Pipe positioning systems.
9. Equipment supports.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 22 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe
guides and anchors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS:

1. Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology:

1. As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Sup-
ports."

Newton Lusail School 220529 - 2

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.

C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval
from authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. For the following:

a. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
b. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
c. Powder-actuated fastener systems.
d. Pipe positioning systems.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installa-
tion details and include calculations for the following:
a. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.
b. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
c. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.
d. Equipment supports.
e. Welding certificates.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding:

1. Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-
-Steel." and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

B. Welding:

1. Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

a. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

b. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
c. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
d. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

Newton Lusail School 220529 - 3

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings:

1. Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

B. Nonmetallic Coatings:

1. Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

C. Padded Hangers:

1. Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing
surface of piping.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Trapeze pipe hangers in this Article require calculation and detail of each unit.

B. Description:

1. MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners:

1. Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, ten-
sion, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials
where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors:

1. Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete

with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and build-
ing materials where used.

2.4 PIPE STAND FABRICATION

A. Pipe Stands, General:

1. Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant compo-

nents to support roof-mounted piping.

B. Compact Pipe Stand:

1. One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to

support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

Newton Lusail School 220529 - 4

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:

1. One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation without
membrane penetration.

D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:

1. Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installa-
tion without membrane penetration.

a. Base: Stainless steel.

b. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless steel, contin-
uous-thread rods.
c. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless steel rod with plastic or
stainless steel, roller-type pipe support.

E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:

1. Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof in-
stallation without membrane penetration.

F. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands:

1. Shop- or field-fabricated pipe support made from structural-steel shape, continuous-

thread rods, and rollers for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.

2.5 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description:

1. IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in
pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications.

2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description:

1. Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel

shapes.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel:

1. ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout:

1. ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and

nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

Newton Lusail School 220529 - 5

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

a. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

b. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that
will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

F. Use rubber lined clamp and support for silent piping.

G. Vertical-Piping Clamps:

1. Comply with the Requirement prescribed on the Division 22, “PLUMBING

GENERAL PROVISIONS – SUPPORTS”.

2. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install
the following types:

a. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers,
DN 20 to DN 500.
b. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe ris-
ers, DN 20 to DN 500, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

H. Building Attachments:

1. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install
the following types:

a. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to
suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
b. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-
joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
c. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange
of beams, channels, or angles.
d. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange
of beams.
e. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams
if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

Newton Lusail School 220529 - 6

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

f. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

g. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required
tangent to flange edge.
h. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
i. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads.
j. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching
to structural steel.

k. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending

from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

1) Light (MSS Type 31): 340 kg.

2) Medium (MSS Type 32): 680 kg.
3) Heavy (MSS Type 33): 1360 kg.

l. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
m. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is
required.
n. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to
linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

I. Saddles and Shields:

1. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install
the following types:

a. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids
with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
b. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by man-
ufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
c. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

J. Spring Hangers and Supports:

1. Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install
the following types:

a. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping

movement.
b. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not
exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
c. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll
hanger with springs.
d. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or ther-
mal expansion in piping systems.
e. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping
system from hanger.
f. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and
limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of pip-
ing system from base support.
g. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and
limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of pip-

Newton Lusail School 220529 - 7

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

ing system from trapeze support.

h. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer
of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected
equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-
adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

1) Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

2) Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.

3) Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze
member.

K. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.

L. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.

M. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in

concrete construction.

N. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and
waste piping for plumbing fixtures.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the Requirement prescribed on the Division 22, “PLUMBING GENERAL
PROVISIONS – SUPPORTS”.

B. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation:

1. Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and at-
tachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

C. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation:

1. Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of
horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

a. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe
size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified
above for individual pipe hangers.
b. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

D. Metal Framing System Installation:

1. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-
assembled metal framing systems.

E. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation:

1. Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

Newton Lusail School 220529 - 8

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

F. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install
fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and com-
pletely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on
smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
2. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and
mount on permanent, stationary roof curb.

H. Pipe Positioning System Installation:

1. Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each
plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for plumbing fix-
tures.
2. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, wash-
ers, and other accessories.

I. Equipment Support Installation:

1. Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

2. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of pip-
ing systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate
action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
3. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
4. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install
additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,
DN 65 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before
concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through open-
ings at top of inserts.

J. Load Distribution:

1. Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement
will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

K. Pipe Slopes:

1. Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe
deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

L. Insulated Piping:

1. Comply with the following:

a. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

1) Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project

Newton Lusail School 220529 - 9

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

through insulation.
2) Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger
shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
3) Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building
services piping.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.

B. Grouting:

1. Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
2. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Comply with the Requirement prescribed on the Division 22, “PLUMBING GENERAL
PROVISIONS – SUPPORTS”.

Newton Lusail School 220529 - 10

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

B. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.

C. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot
be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

D. Field Welding:

1. Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the follow-
ing:

a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
b. Obtain fusions without undercut or overlap.
c. Remove welding flux immediately.
d. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments:

1. Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated

slope of pipe.
2. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 40 mm.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touch Up:

1. Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting.
Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

a. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 0.05
mm.

B. Touch Up:

1. Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces:

1. Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint
to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 220529

Newton Lusail School 220529 - 11

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220548- VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 220548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT

Newton Lusail School 220548 - 1

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220548- VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. The Qatar construction specification (QCS 2014) shall form the basis of the project
specification. The technical specification is supplemental to QCS (latest revision) and
should be read in conjunction with QCS and all other contract documents. In case of
contradiction or discrepancy between QCS and technical specifications, CONTRACTOR
shall incorporate whichever is more stringent.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Inertia bases.

B. Vibration isolation.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASHRAE HAND BOOK 1999, HVAC Applications.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Confirm to ASHRAE average noise criteria curves.

B. Ensure structural integrity by avoiding resonance and by restricting vibration.

C. Do not exceed the allowable noise level, 70 dBA measured at a distance of 1200 mm from
source, by proper engineering of equipment assemblies.

1.5 SPEED AND BALANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR ROTATING EQUIPMENT

A. Fans and other rotating mechanical equipment shall not operate at speeds in excess of
80 % of their true critical speed

B. Vertical vibration of rotating equipment shall not be greater than the levels indicated.
The vibration shall be measured on the equipment or steel frame equipment base when the
equipment is mounted on its vibration isolation mounts. If the equipment has an inertia
base, the allowable vibration level is reduced by the ratio of the equipment weight alone to
the equipment weight plus the inertia base weight.

Vibration Displacement
Equipment Speed
(MILS peak-to-peak)
under 600 rpm 4
600 to 1000 rpm 3
1000 to 2000 rpm 2
over 2000 rpm 1

Newton Lusail School 220548 - 2

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220548- VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings, product data, samples and manufacturer's installation

instructions under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Include data for each equipment and size of unit showing isolation type, efficiency,
stiffness, natural frequency, and transmissibility at lowest operating speed of equipment,
actual load, static deflection under actual load etc.

C. Submit manufacturer's certificates in respect of static and dynamic loading, fundamental

frequency, average noise level at full load conditions etc. of all equipment.

D. Indicate vibration isolator locations, on general layout and plant room detail drawings.

E. Flexible pipe connector shop drawings data to include maximum allowable temperature
and pressure rating, overall face to face length, live length, hose wall thickness, and
fundamental frequency of assembly.

F. Submit manufacturer's certificates under provisions of Section 01440 that the vibration
isolators are properly selected and installed in equipment assemblies, to meet with, or to
exceed the Contract requirements.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site, store and protect under provisions of Section 01 6000.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATOR

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
1. Vimco.
2. Rubatex.
3. Kinetics.
4. Mason Industries.
5. Vibration Mountings & Controls,
6. Approved alternatives/substitutions under provisions of General Conditions of
Contract.

B. TYPE "1" - ISOLATING PADS: This type of vibration isolators shall be generally used
where the vibrating force is transmitted directly to ground or the vibrating force is very small
compared to the absorption capacity of the structural slab at higher levels.

Newton Lusail School 220548 - 3

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220548- VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

C. TYPE "1A" - NEOPRENE RUBBER PADS: These shall be cross-ribbed, in multiple

layers or of sandwich type to achieve the required deflection. The adhesive used in
fabricating the pads shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.

D. TYPE "1B" - GLASS FIBER PADS: These shall be of pre-compressed fiberglass

construction and suitable to take upto 3448 kPa load. The pads shall be coated with
elastometric neoprene rubber spray to protect the glass fiber and increase the damping effect.

E. TYPE "1C" - CORK PADS: The cork pads shall be constructed from natural cork granules
compressed and steam baked to form slabs and shall have a density of 96 to
106 kg/cu.M . The cork pads shall be treated with hot Bitumen Asphalt coating for
protection of cork.

F. TYPE "2" - MOLDED NEOPRENE RUBBER MOUNTS: These shall be used where a
greater deflection is required than that for pads. The maximum deflection allowable is 12 mm
on these rubber mounts. The normal shape of mount is conical with a captive insert for
attaching to equipment base.

G. TYPE "3" - FREE STANDING SPRING ISOLATORS: These shall be constructed with
open type stable spring and load plates at top and bottom with an adjustable bolt for levelling.
Neoprene rubber acoustical treatment shall be provided to prevent transmission of very high
frequency vibration and noise. The spring shall be so designed that the horizontal stiffness is
more than 75 % of vertical stiffness. The rated loads and deflections for these springs shall
allow additional 50 % travel to that of the rated deflection before the springs are compressed
solid, to accommodate any errors in actual load distribution.

H. TYPE "4" - RESTRAINED SPRING ISOLATORS: These are similar to type "3", but with
additional restraints in the vertical direction. These isolators shall have hold down bolts to
limit vertical movement. The restraints should have adequate clearance so that they are
activated only when a temporary restraint is needed.

I. TYPE "5" - HOUSED SPRING ISOLATORS: These isolators are similar to type "4"
except that they consist of two telescoping houses. The contact surfaces of houses are
separated by resilient inserts such as Neoprene Sponge or equivalent material.

J. TYPE "6" - RUBBER HANGERS: These are similar to type "2" except that the conical
rubber mold is housed in a steel casing and have a through hole for the hanger rod. The
assembly should allow for 20 to 35 degrees angular movement for the hanging rod
without metal to metal contact.

K. TYPE "7" - SPRING HANGERS: These are similar to type "3" except that the spring is
mounted in a steel casing and used for suspension only. The assembly shall allow for
20 to 25 degrees angular movement for the hanging rod without metal to metal contact.

Newton Lusail School 220548 - 4

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220548- VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

L. TYPE "8" - COMBINATION RUBBER & SPRING HANGER: This is a combination of

type "6" and "7" having all the specified characteristics therein.

M. TYPE "9" - THRUST RESTRAINTS: These are similar to type "7", but installed in pairs to
counteract the thrust caused by air pressure.

N. TYPE "10" - AIR SPRINGS: These shall consist of constant dry air supplying equipment and
air bellows. These shall be used where 150 mm (6 inch) or greater deflection is required
and natural frequencies do not exceed 80 Hz.

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Isolation Technology, Inc.

2. Mason Industries.
3. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
4. Approved alternatives/substitutions under provisions of General Conditions of
Contract.

B. Type "A" - INTEGRAL BASES: This type is generally applicable for packaged chillers,
pumps, Air Handling Units, Air conditioning Units etc. which are supplied with factory
fabricated rigid base which can be mounted directly on vibration isolators. Equipment
manufacturer's recommendations should be sought for the number, locations and weight
distribution to select and install vibration isolators.

C. Type "B" - STEEL STRUCTURAL BASES: This type is generally subdivided into closed
frame type (Type B1) and rails type (Type B2). These are steel bases fabricated either as per
the approved shop drawing or as per the equipment manufacturer's recommendation. These
are used for equipment not having a rigid base. The type B1 shall be used where the
vibration isolators are located within the equipment base and type B2 shall be used when the
vibration isolators are outside the equipment and the type B2 base acts as a cradle. The
minimum depth shall be 4 inches.

D. TYPE "C" CONCRETE INTERTIAL BASES: This type generally consists of structural
steel, fabricated pouring form with reinforcing bars. The concrete shall be poured on site.
The minimum depth shall be 6 inches.

E. TYPE "D" - ROOF CURBS: This type is generally used for Roof top Air Handling Units
with direct cutting through roof slab under the units. These roof curbs shall be supplied by
the unit manufacturer. The manufacturer's recommendations should be sought for the
number, locations and weight distribution to select and install vibration isolators.

F. TYPE "E" - HOUSE KEEPING PADS: These are concrete bases used for all equipment
with or without moving parts and shall be suitable for taking up the static and dynamic

Newton Lusail School 220548 - 5

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220548- VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

loads (if any). Size base to extend 100 mm beyond equipment base in all directions and
minimum 100 mm above finished floor level. Roughen floor slab beneath base for bond
and or provide rebar dowels in floor slab. Locate anchor bolts (welded on to a rebar
framework to maintain spacing) with templates supplied by the equipment manufacturer.
Provide steel angle frame with anchorage lugs at the corners. Also see table 3.03 for
exact heights.

G. TYPE "F" - FLOATING CONCRETE BASE: This is similar to Type "E" (House
keeping pads) but isolated at the bottom and all the side by either pre-compressed glass
fiber pads or Heavy density seasoned cork. The thickness of isolating pads vary from 25
to 100 mm depending on the application.

H. TYPE "G" - STRUCTURAL STEEL STANDS: These shall be provided to support

equipment, which are not floor mounted or hung from structure. Construct with structural
steel members and attach to wall or floor as appropriate. Provide factory fabricated
saddles or mounts for equipment as required.

2.3 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment

before shipping.
1. Powder coating on springs and housings.
2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for
exterior use.
3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to
indicate capacity range.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. General
1. Refer to PART 2 - PRODUCTS of this specification for vibration isolation devices
identified on the schedule or specified herein.

B. Major Equipment
1. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all floor mounted major equipment shall be set
on concrete housekeeping pads as per recommendations of the manufacturer. See
schedule of mounting pads in this section.
2. Types and minimum static deflections of vibration isolation devices for major
equipment items shall be as scheduled on the drawings or specified here under.

Newton Lusail School 220548 - 6

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220548- VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

3. Flexible pipe connections shall be installed at all pipe connections to vibration

isolated equipment in the positions shown on the drawings.
4. Electrical connections to vibration isolated equipment shall be flexible, as called for
in the electrical portion of the specification.
5. Snubbers or thrust restraints shall be installed on equipment as called for in the
schedule on the drawings or specified here under.

C. Miscellaneous Mechanical Equipment

1. Miscellaneous pieces of mechanical equipment such as domestic hot water
circulation pumps, hot water heat exchangers, storage tanks, and expansion tanks
shall be vibration isolated from the building structure by Type 2 or type 6 isolators
unless their position in the piping system requires higher degrees of isolation as
called for under Pipe Isolation.

D. Piping
1. Provide flexible pipe connections in piping connected to vibration isolated
equipment, as called for and shown on drawings.
2. Anchor piping at the system side of the flexible connector.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT

A. General
1. Locations of all vibration isolation equipment shall be selected for ease of
inspection and adjustment as well as for proper operation.
2. Installation of vibration isolation equipment shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.

B. Isolation Mounts
1. All vibration isolators shall be aligned squarely above or below mounting points of the
supported equipment.
2. Isolators for equipment with bases shall be located on the sides of the bases, which
are parallel to the equipment shaft unless this is not possible because of physical
constraints.
3. If a housekeeping pad is provided, the isolators shall bear on the housekeeping pad
and the isolator base plate shall rest entirely on the pad.
4. Hanger rods for vibration isolated support shall be connected to structural beams or
joists, not from the floor slab between beams and joists. Provide intermediate support
members as necessary.
5. Vibration isolation hanger elements shall be positioned as high as possible in the
hanger rod assembly, but not in contact with the building structure, and so that the
hanger housing may rotate a full 360 degrees about the rod axis without
contacting any object.
6. Parallel running pipes may be hung together on a trapeze, which is isolated from the
building. Isolator deflections must be the largest determined by the provisions for pipe
isolation. Do not mix isolated and non-isolated pipes on the same trapeze.
7. No pipes or equipment shall be supported from other pipes or equipment.

Newton Lusail School 220548 - 7

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220548- VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

8. Resiliently isolated pipes shall not contact the building construction or other
equipment.
9. The installed and operating heights of vibration isolators supporting any
equipment shall be identical. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal
operation.
10. Adjust all leveling bolts and hanger rod bolts so that the isolated equipment is
level and in proper alignment with connecting ducts or pipes.

C. Bases
1. No equipment unit shall bear directly on vibration isolators unless its own frame is
suitably rigid to span between isolators and such direct support is approved by the
equipment manufacturer. This provision shall apply whether or not a base frame is
called for on the schedule. In the case that a base frame is required for the unit
because of the equipment manufacturer's requirements and is not specifically called
for on the equipment schedule, a base frame recommended by the equipment
manufacturer shall be provided.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, there is to be a minimum operating clearance of 38- mm
between inertia bases or steel frame bases and the floor beneath the equipment.
Position isolator mounting brackets and adjust isolators so that the required clearance
is maintained. The clearance space shall be checked by the Contractor to ensure that
no construction debris has been left to short circuit or restrict the proper operation of
the vibration isolation system.

D. Flexible Pipe Connections

1. Select flexible connections with axial and transverse movements, more than that of the
connected equipment. Use control cables where there is a chance of exceeding
the allowable axial movement.
2. Provide bronze union ends for flexible connections of 50-mm nom. dia. and less,
when used with copper piping.

E. Thrust Restraints
1. Snubbers shall be adjusted to clear the equipment base and to provide lateral
restraint during on / off cycling, but be out of contact during normal operation of the
equipment.

2. Thrust restraints shall be attached at the center line of thrust and symmetrically
on each of the units. Adjust the restraints to limit equipment movement to the
specified limit.

F. Resilient Penetration Sleeves / Seals

1. Penetration seals shall maintain an air tight seal around the penetrating element and
shall prevent rigid contact between the penetrating element and the building structure.
Fit the sleeve tightly to the building construction and seal airtight on both sides of
the construction penetrated with acoustical sealant.

Newton Lusail School 220548 - 8

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220548- VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

3.3 SCHEDULE OF MOUNTING FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

ISOLATOR DEFLECTION,
NO. EQUIPMENT BASE
TYPE mm
Unitary Pumps (Swim-
1 Type F 1C 6
ming Pools, etc.)
2 Central sand filters Type E None
Packace Pump Sets On
3 Type F 1C 38
elevated slabs
Packaged Pump Set (on
4 Type F 1C 6
raft)
5 Control Panels Type E None
Central Electric Water
6 Type E None
Heater
Hot Water circulating
7 Type F IC 6
Pumps
8 Boilers Type E None
9 Calorifiers Type E None
10 Air Compressor Type E None

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating
height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of
contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of sprint isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of

operation.

END OF SECTION 220548

Newton Lusail School 220548 - 9

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220553– IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT

SECTION 220553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

Newton Lusail School 220553 - 1

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220553– IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. The Qatar construction specification (QCS 2014) shall form the basis of the project specifi-
cation. The technical specification is supplemental to QCS (latest revision) and should be
read in conjunction with QCS and all other contract documents. In case of contradiction or
discrepancy between QCS and technical specifications, CONTRACTOR shall incorporate
whichever is more stringent.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Stencils.
5. Valve tags.
6. Warning tags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples:

1. For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification mate-
rial and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule:

1. Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each la-
bel.
2. Valve numbering scheme.

D. Valve Schedules:

1. For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

Newton Lusail School 220553 - 2

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220553– IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Anodized aluminum, 0.8-mm minimum thickness, and hav-
ing predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less
than 64 by 19 mm.
3. Minimum Letter Size: 6.4 mm for name of units if viewing distance is less than 600
mm, 13 mm for viewing distances up to 1830 mm, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths
the size of principal lettering.
4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engrav-
ing, 3.2 mm thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color:
3. Background Color:
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 71 deg C.
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less
than 64 by 19 mm.
6. Minimum Letter Size: 6.4 mm for name of units if viewing distance is less than 600
mm, 13 mm for viewing distances up to 1830 mm, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths
the size of principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

Newton Lusail School 220553 - 3

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220553– IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT

C. Label Content:

1. Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing

numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Speci-
fication Section number and title where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment Label Schedule:-

1. For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tab-
ulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equip-
ment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section num-
ber and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in
operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness:

1. Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 3.2 mm thick, and
having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color:

1. Background Color

C. Maximum Temperature:

1. Able to withstand temperatures up to 71 deg C.

D. Minimum Label Size:

1. Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 64 by 19 mm.

E. Minimum Letter Size:

1. 6.4 mm for name of units if viewing distance is less than 600 mm, 13 mm for viewing
distances up to 1830 mm, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing dis-
tances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal let-
tering.

F. Fasteners:

1. Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

G. Adhesive:

1. Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

Newton Lusail School 220553 - 4

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220553– IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT

H. Label Content:

1. Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels:

1. Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pre-tensioned Pipe Labels:

1. Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to
pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels:

1. Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents:

1. Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as

used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

a. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accom-

modate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow
direction.
b. Lettering Size: At least 38 mm high.

2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils:

1. Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum letter
height of 19 mm for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar opera-
tional instructions.

a. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal.

b. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated.
Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
c. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to
ASME A13.1 unless otherwise indicated.

Newton Lusail School 220553 - 5

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220553– IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT

2.5 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags:

1. Stamped or engraved with 6.4-mm letters for piping system abbreviation and 13-mm
numbers.

a. Tag Material: anodized aluminum, 0.8-mm minimum thickness, and having

predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
b. Fasteners: Brass beaded chain.

B. Valve Schedules:

1. For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate valve num-
ber, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve
(room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and varia-
tions for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
2. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.6 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags:

1. Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock

with matte finish suitable for writing.

a. Size: 75 by 133 mm minimum.

b. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string.
c. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION,"
or "DO NOT OPERATE."
d. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.

Newton Lusail School 220553 - 6

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220553– IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding:

1. Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting.

B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option:

1. Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's op-
tion. Install stenciled pipe labels complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping sys-
tem.

a. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

b. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

2. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished
spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and
plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

a. Near each valve and control device.

b. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal
units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
c. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
d. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of con-
cealed piping.
e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
f. Spaced at maximum intervals of 15 m along each run. Reduce intervals 7.6 min
areas of congested piping and equipment.

g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced la-

bels.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Low-Pressure, Compressed-Air Piping:

a. Background Color:
b. Letter Color:

Newton Lusail School 220553 - 7

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220553– IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT

2. Medium-Pressure, Compressed-Air Piping:

a. Background Color:
b. Letter Color:

3. Domestic Water Piping:

a. Background Color:
b. Letter Color: Black

4. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:

a. Background Color: Black

b. Letter Color: White

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves
within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-
watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and
units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule:

1. Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to
those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
2. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Cold Water: square.

b. Hot Water: round.
c. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: square
d. High-Pressure Compressed Air: round

3. Valve-Tag Color:

a. Cold Water: Natural.

b. Hot Water: Natural.
c. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: Natural.
d. High-Pressure Compressed Air: Natural.

4. Letter Color:

a. Cold Water: Black.

b. Hot Water: Black.
c. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: Black.
d. High-Pressure Compressed Air: Black.

Newton Lusail School 220553 - 8

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220553– IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT

3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.

END OF SECTION 220553

Newton Lusail School 220553 - 9

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

Newton Lusail School 220719 - 1

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM B 209 (2006) Standard Specification for Aluminum and

Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
ASTM B 209M (2006) Standard Specification for Aluminum and
Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric)
ASTM C 195 (2000) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal
Insulating Cement
ASTM C 449/ C 449 M (2000) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-
Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement
ASTM C 533 (2007) Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block
and Pipe Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 534 (2007) Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible
Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and
Tubular Form
ASTM C 547 (2006) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe
Insulation
ASTM C 552 (2003) Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal
Insulation
ASTM C 921 (2003a) Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of
Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation
ASTM D 579 (2004) Standard Specification for Greige Woven Glass
Fabrics
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 220 (2006) Standard on Types of Building Construction
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)
S2E AMS 3779 (1990; Rev A; R 1994) Tape Adhesive, Pressure Sensitive
Thermal Radiation Resistant, Aluminum Foil/Glass Cloth

Newton Lusail School 220719 - 2

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Division 23 Section "Heating, Ventilating, And Air-Conditioning" applies to work specified

in this section.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Thermal-insulation system materials shall be noncombustible, as defined by NFPA 220.

Adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermal-insulation materials, except
cellular elastomers, shall have a flame-spread classification (FSC) of 25, and a smoke-
developed classification (SDC) of 50. These maximum values shall be determined in
accordance with ÁST E '4 . Coatings and sealants shall be nonflammable in their wet state.

B. Adhesives, coatings, and sealants shall have published or certified temperature ratings
suitable for the entire range of working temperatures normal for the surfaces to which they
are to be applied.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. SD-02 Shop Drawings:

1. Installation Drawings for pipe insulation shall be submitted in accordance with para-
graph entitled, "Installation," of this section.

B. SD-03 Product Data:

1. Manufacturer's catalog data shall be submitted for the following items:

a. Adhesives
b. Coatings
c. Insulating Cement
d. Insulation Materials
e. Jacketing
f. Tape

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers:

A. Refer to approved manufacturers list

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise
attack surfaces to which applied in either the wet or dry state. Materials to be used on
stainless steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C MÍ95 requirements. Materials shall be asbestos
free and conform to the following.

Newton Lusail School 220719 - 3

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

B. Adhesives:

1. Cloth Adhesives

a. Adhesives for adhering, sizing, and finishing lagging cloth, canvas, and open-
weave glass cloth shall be a pigmented polyvinyl acetate emulsion and shall
conform to the requirements of ATM C 916, Type I.

2. Vapor-Barrier Material Adhesives

a. Adhesives for attaching laps of vapor-barrier materials and presized glass cloth
and for attaching insulation to itself, to metal, and to various other substrates,
shall be solvent-base, synthetic-rubber type and shall conform to the require-
ments of ASTM C 916, Type I, for attaching fibrous-glass insulation to metal
surfaces. Solvent shall be nonflammable.

3. Cellular Elastomer Insulation Adhesive.

4. Aluminum Cladding Adhesive.

5. Cellular Elastomer Insulation Adhesive

a. Adhesive for cellular elastomer insulation shall be a solvent cutback chloro-

prene elastomer conforming to ASTM C 916, Type I, and shall be of a type ap-
proved by the manufacturer of the cellular elastomer for the intended use.

C. Coatings:

1. Indoor Vapor-Barrier Finishing

a. Coatings for indoor vapor-barrier finishing of insulation surfaces shall be a

pigmented resin and solvent compound and shall conform to ASTM C 1136,
Type II.

2. Cellular-Elastomer Insulation Coating

a. Finish coating for cellular-elastomer insulation shall be a polyvinylchloride lac-

quer approved by the manufacturer of the cellular elastomer.

3. Coating Color

a. Coating color shall conform to the color code specified.

D. Insulation Materials:

1. Insulation conductances shall be maximum values, as tested at any point, not an aver-
age. Insulation conductance found by test to exceed the specified maximum shall ei-
ther be replaced or augmented by an additional thickness to bring it to the required
maximum conductance and a complete finishing system.

2. Mineral Fiber

a. Mineral fiber shall conform to ASTM C 553 & ASTM C 547 shall be suitable
for surface temperatures up to 188 degrees C 370 degrees F, and shall be of not

Newton Lusail School 220719 - 4

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

less than 64.1 kilograms per cubic meter,4 poundS per cubic foot density.
Thermal conductivity shall be not greater than 0.037 watt per meter per degree
Kelvin 0.26 Btu per hour per Square foot Square per degree F at 66 degrees C
150 degrees F mean.

3. Pipe Barrel

a. Pipe barrel insulation shall be Type II, Molded, Grade A or Type III, Precision
V-Groove, Grade A for use at temperatures up to and including 650 degrees C.

4. Pipe Fittings

a. Pipe fitting insulation shall be molded pipefitting covering for use at Tempera-
tures up to and including 650 degrees C.

5. Cellular Glass

a. Cellular glass shall conform to AS.LM C 552, Type II, Grade 2, pipe covering.
Substitutions for this material shall not be permitted. Minimum thickness shall
be 38 mm.

6. Calcium Silicate.

7.

E. Jacketing:

1. Aluminum Jackets

a. Aluminum sheet shall be in accordance with ASTM B 209M ASTM B 209 and
shall be 0.7 millimeter thick with factory-applied vapor barrier on the insulation
side. Aluminum shall be made from smooth, polished, Temper H16, Alloy
5005. Straps shall be AISZ 300 series corrosion-resistant steel, 0.381 millimeter
15 mils thick, 13 millimeter 1/2 inch wide, for pipe under DN300 12 inch diam-
eter and 20 millimeter wide for pipe over DN300 diameter.
b. Elbow jackets shall be 0.7 millimeter thick, deep-drawn, die-shaped, two-piece
components for long-radius, butt-weld elbows manufactured from the same ma-
terials as specified for jackets, with factory-attached vapor-seals on underside of
the aluminum. Pre-insulated, void-less, jacketed components conforming to
these specifications shall be used. Pre-insulated fittings shall have a 50 millime-
ter overlay beyond route for weld bead.
c. Vapor barrier shall be 3 kilogram per square meter kraft paper.
d. Pipe jackets shall have not less than 50 millimeter longitudinal and circumferen-
tial lap.
e. Sealant for longitudinal and butt joints of aluminum jacketing shall be an alumi-
num-pigmented, butyl, polymer sealant with high-butyl solids.

F. Tape:

1. Glass lagging shall be a knitted elastic cloth specifically suitable for continuous spiral
wrapping of insulated pipe bends and fittings and shall produce a smooth, tight, wrin-
kle-free surface. Tape shall conform to requirements of SAE A4S 3779, SAE AMS

Newton Lusail School 220719 - 5

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

3779, ?'ıSTM D 579, and ASTM C 92., and shall weigh not less than 0.339 kilogram
per square meter.

2.3 PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Insulation thickness and pipe sizes are in millimeter inches. Pipe size is inclusive
dimensionally, and includes pipe nominal pipe size (NPS) and tubing outside diameter.

B. Dual-Temperature (Hot- and Chilled-) Water Piping

1. Insulation shall be mineral fiber with vapor barrier jacket, Type T-1 cellular class with
vapor barrier jacket, Type T-4. Thickness shall be not less than that given in the fol-
lowing list. Aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, and flanges shall be in-
sulated.

PIPE SIZE INSULATION THICKNESS

(MILLIMETER) (MILLIMETER)

32 38

32 to 80 38

80 and larger 50

C. Hot-Water, Steam, and Condensate-Return Piping

1. Insulation shall be mineral fiber with glass cloth jacket, Type T-2. Thickness shall be
not less than that given in the following list. Aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fit-
tings, unions, flanges, and miscellaneous surfaces shall be insulated.

PIPE SIZE INSULATION THICKNESS

(MILLIMETER) (MILLIMETER)

Up to 100 25

100 to 250 38

250 to 300 50

D. Cold-Water and Condensate-Drain Piping

1. Aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, flanges, and miscellaneous surfaces
shall be insulated
2. Insulation shall be 10 millimeter mineral fiber with glass cloth jacket, Type T-2.
+

E. LTHW & Steam Boilers’ Flue Gas/ Chimney Piping

1. Low Temperature Hot Water and Steam Boilers’ Flue Gas Chimney /Piping, over
draft fan, elbows and miscellaneous surfaces from Boiler’s smoke Box up to atmos-
phere discharge vent cowl including stacks shall be thermally insulated.

Newton Lusail School 220719 - 6

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

2. Insulation shall be 75 mm thick , 100 kg/m3 density, maximum use temperature of

750o Celsius, 0.069 w/m.k at 250o Celsius mean temperature, conform to ASTM C
177 rock wool with galvanized steel wire netting hexagonal netting mish on one side.
3. Aluminum cladding / jacket as specified above with adhesive shall be applied to the
Rockwool thermal insulation where the pipe line running Horizontally as under:
A. For Pipe and pipe fittings: Riveted joints shall be applied.
B. For over draft fan Box and other miscellaneous surfaces: Clips type shall be
provided.

F. Diesel Generator Flue Gas/ Chimney Piping

1. Diesel Generator’s Flue Gas Chimney /Piping, over draft fan (wherever applicable),
silencer, elbows and miscellaneous surfaces from Flue output flange up to atmosphere
discharge vent cowl including stacks shall be thermally insulated.
2. Insulation shall be 150 mm thick , 100 kg/m3 density, maximum use temperature of
750o Celsius, 0.095 w/m.k at 350o Celsius mean temperature, conform to ASTM C
177 rock wool with galvanized steel wire netting hexagonal netting mish on one side.
3. Aluminum cladding / jacket as specified above with adhesive shall be applied to the
Rockwool thermal insulation where the pipe line running Horizontally as under:
A. For Pipe and pipe fittings: Riveted joints shall be applied.
B. For over deft fan Box Silencer and other miscellaneous surfaces: Clips type shall be
provided.

Newton Lusail School 220719 - 7

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION SYSTEMS

A. Contours on exposed work shall be smooth and continuous. Cemented laps, flaps, bands, and
tapes shall be smoothly and securely pasted down. Adhesives shall be applied on a full-
coverage basis.

B. Insulation shall be applied only to system or component surfaces that have been tested and
approved.

C. Joints shall be tight with insulation lengths tightly butted against each other. Where lengths
are cut, cuts shall be smooth and square and without breakage of end surfaces. Where
insulation terminates, ends shall be neatly tapered and effectively sealed, or finished as
specified. Longitudinal seams of exposed insulation shall be directed away from normal
view.

D. Materials shall be applied by insulation specialist in conformance with the recommendations

of the manufacturer.

E. Surfaces shall be clean and free of oil and grease before insulation adhesives or mastics are
applied. Solvent cleaning required to bring metal surfaces to such condition shall be
provided.

F. Installation Drawings for pipe insulation shall be in accordance with the adhesive
manufacturer’s written instructions for installation.

3.2 SYSTEM TYPES

A. Type T-1, Mineral Fiber with Vapor-Barrier Jacket

1. Piping shall be covered with mineral-fiber pipe insulation with factory-and field-
attached vapor-barrier jacket. Vapor seal shall be maintained. Jackets, jacket laps,
flaps, and bands shall be securely cemented in place with vapor-barrier adhesive.
Jacket overlap shall be not less than 40 millimeter. Jacketing bands for butt joints shall
be 75 millimeter wide.
2. Exposed-to-view fittings and valve bodies shall be covered with preformed mineral-
fiber pipe-fitting insulation of the same thickness as the pipe-barrel insulation. Fitting
insulation shall be temporarily secured in place with light cord ties. A 1.52 millimeter
60-mil coating of white indoor vapor-barrier coating shall be applied and, while still
wet, wrapped with glass lagging tape with 50 percent overlap, and shall be smoothly
blended into the adjacent jacketing. Additional coating shall be applied as needed and
rubber-gloved to smooth fillet or contour coating, then allowed to fully cure before the
finish coating is applied. On-the-job fabricated insulation for concealed fittings and
special configurations shall be built up from mineral fiber and a special mastic consist-
ing of a mixture of insulating cement and lagging adhesive diluted with 3 parts water.
Where standard vapor-barrier jacketing cannot be used, the surfaces shall be made va-
por tight by using coating and glass lagging cloth or tape as previously specified.
3. In lieu of materials and methods previously specified, fittings may be wrapped with a
twine-secured, mineral-wool blanket to the required thickness and covered with
premolded polyvinylchloride jackets. Seams shall be made vapor tight with a double
bead of manufacturer's standard vapor-barrier adhesive applied in accordance with the

Newton Lusail School 220719 - 8

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

manufacturer's instructions. All jacket ends shall be held in place with AISZ 300 se-
ries corrosion-resistant steel straps, 0.381millimeter thick by 15 millimeter inch wide.
4. Pipe insulation shall be set into an outdoor vapor-barrier coating for a minimum of
150 millimeter at maximum 3500 millimeter spacing and the ends of the insulation
sealed to the jacketing with the same material to provide an effective vapor-barrier
stop.
5. Staples shall not be used in applying insulation. Vapor-barrier materials shall be con-
tinuous over all surfaces, including areas inside pipe sleeves, hangers, and other con-
cealments.
6. Piping insulation at hangers shall consist of 208 kilogram per cubic meter 13-pounds
per cubic foot density, fibrous-glass inserts or expanded, rigid, closed-cell, polyvinyl-
chloride. Junctions shall be sealed with vapor-barrier jacket where required, glass-
cloth mesh tape, and vapor-barrier coating.
7. White-bleached kraft paper side of the jacketing shall be on the side exposed to view.
8. Exposed-to-view insulation shall be finished with not less than a 0.152-millimeter 6-
mil dry-film thickness of non-vapor-barrier coating suitable for painting.

B. Type T-2, Mineral Fiber with Glass Cloth Jacket

1. Piping shall be covered with a mineral-fiber, pipe insulation with factory-attached,

presized, white, glass cloth. Jackets, jacket laps, flaps, and bands shall be securely ce-
mented in place with vapor-barrier adhesive. Jacket overlap shall be not less than 40
millimeter. Jacketing bands for butt joints shall be 75 millimeter wide.
2. Exposed-to-view fittings shall be covered with preformed mineral-fiber
3. Fitting insulation of the same thickness as the pipe insulation and temporarily secured
in place with light cord ties. Impregnated glass lagging tape shall be installed with in-
door vapor-barrier on 50 percent overlap basis and the tape shall be blended smoothly
into the adjacent jacketing. Additional coating shall be applied as needed, and rubber
gloved to a smooth contour. Ends of insulation shall be taped to the pipe at valves
DN50 and smaller. On-the-job fabricated insulation for concealed fittings and special
configurations shall be built up from mineral fiber and a mixture of insulating cement
and lagging adhesive, diluted with 3 parts water. Surfaces shall be finished with glass
cloth or tape lagging.
4. Valves 65 millimeter and larger and all flanges shall be covered with preformed insu-
lation of the same thickness as the adjacent insulation.
5. Exposed-to-view insulation shall be finished with a minimum 0.152-millimeterdry-
film thickness of non-vapor-barrier coating suitable for painting.
6. In lieu of materials and methods specified above, fittings may be wrapped with a
twine-secured, mineral-wool blanket to the required thickness and covered with
premolded polyvinylchloride jackets. All jacket ends shall be held in place with AISZ
300 series corrosion-resistant steel straps, 0.381 millimeter thick by 15 millimeter
wide. Fitting insulation shall be thermally equivalent to pipe-barrel insulation to pre-
clude surface temperatures detrimental to polyvinylchloride.

C. Type T-3, Cellular Elastomer

1. Piping-system surfaces shall be covered with flexible cellular-elastomer sheet or pre-

formed insulation. Vapor seal shall be maintained. Insulation shall be cemented into
continuous material with a solvent cutback chloroprene adhesive recommended by the
manufacturer for the specific purpose. Adhesive shall be applied to both of the surfac-
es on a 100-percent cover-age basis to a minimum thickness of 0.254 millimeter 10
mils wet or approximately 4 square meter per liter 150 square feet per gallon of undi-
luted adhesive.
2. Insulation on cold-water piping shall be sealed to the pipe for a minimum of 150 mil-

Newton Lusail School 220719 - 9

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

limeter at maximum intervals of 3500 millimeter to form an effective vapor barrier. At

piping supports, insulation shall be continuous through using outside-carrying type
clevis hangers with insulation shield. Wood dowel load-bearing inserts shall be in-
stalled between the pipe and insulation shields to prevent insulation compression.
3. Hot-water, cold-water, and condensate drain pipes shall be insulated to the extent
shown with nominal 15 millimeter thick, fire retardant (FR), cellular elastomer, pre-
formed pipe insulation. Joints shall be sealed with adhesive.
4. At pipe hangers or supports where the insulation rests on the pipe hanger strap, the in-
sulation shall be cut with a brass cork borer and a No. 3 superior grade cork inserted.
Seams shall be sealed with approved adhesive. Sweat fitting shall be insulated with
miter-cut pieces of cellular elastomer insulation of the same nominal pipe size and
thickness as the insulation on the adjacent piping or tubing. Miter-cut pieces shall be
joined with approved adhesive. Covers shall be slit and snapped over the fitting, and
joints shall be sealed with approved adhesive.
5. Screwed fittings shall be insulated with sleeve-type covers formed from miter-cut
pieces of cellular elastomer thermal insulation having an inside diameter large enough
to overlap adjacent pipe insulation. Pipe insulation shall be butted against fittings.
Overlap shall be not less than 25 millimeter. Adhesive shall be used to join cover
pieces and cement the cover to the pipe insulation.
6. Surfaces exposed to view or ultraviolet light shall be finished with a 0.051 millimeter
minimum dry-film thickness application of a polyvinylchloride lacquer recommended
by the manufacturer, and applied in not less than coats.

D. Type T-4, Cellular Glass with Vapor-Barrier Jacket

1. Piping shall be covered with cellular glass insulation and factory- and field-attached
vapor-barrier jacket. Vapor seal shall be maintained. Jackets, jacket laps, flaps, and
bands shall be securely cemented in place with vapor-barrier adhesive. Jacket overlap
shall be not less than 40 millimeter. Jacket bands for butt joints shall be not less than
75 millimeter wide. Insulation shall be continuous through hangers. Insulation shall be
bedded in an outdoor vapor-barrier coating applied to all piping surfaces.
2. Flanges, unions, valves, anchors, and fittings shall be insulated with factory premold-
ed or prefabricated or field fabricated segments of insulation of the same material and
thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation. When segments of insulation are used, el-
bows shall be provided with not less than three segments. For other fittings and
valves, segments shall be cut to the required curvature or nesting size.
3. Segments of the insulation shall be secured in place with twine or copper wire. After
the insulation segments are firmly in place, a vapor-barrier coating shall be applied
over the insulation in two coats with glass tape imbedded between coats. First coat
shall be tinted, the second shall be white to ensure application two coats. Coating shall
be applied to a total dry-film thickness of 1.6 millimeter minimum. Glass tape seams
shall overlap not less than 25 millimeter and the tape end not less than 100 millimeter.
4. In lieu of materials and methods specified above, fittings may be wrapped with 10
millimeter thick, vapor-barrier, adhesive-coated strips of cellular elastomer insulation.
Insulation shall be under tension, compressed to 25 percent of original thickness, and
wrapped until overall thickness is equal to adjacent insulation. Cellular elastomer shall
be secured in place with twine and sealed with vapor-barrier coating applied to pro-
duce not less than 1.6 millimeter dry-film thickness. Fittings shall then be covered
with premolded polyvinylchloride jackets. Seams shall be made vapor-tight with a
double bead of manufacturer's standard vapor-barrier adhesive applied in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions. Jacket ends shall be held in place with AISZ 300
series corrosion-resistant steel straps, 0.381 millimeter thick by 15 millimeter wide.
5. BB. Anchors secured directly to piping shall be insulated, to prevent condensation, for
not less than 150 millimeter from the surface of the pipe insulation.

Newton Lusail School 220719 - 10

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

6. White-bleached kraft paper side of jacketing shall be on the side exposed to view. Ex-
posed-to-view insulation shall be finished with not less than a 0.152 millimeter dry-
film thickness of nonvapor-barrier coating suitable for painting.

E. Type T-5, Mineral Fiber with Aluminum Jacket

1. EE. Piping shall be covered with mineral-fiber pipe insulation with factory-attached or
field-applied aluminum jacketing.
2. Fittings and valve bodies shall be covered with preformed mineral-fiber pipe-fitting
insulation of the same thickness as the pipe-barrel insulation. Fitting insulation shall
be secured temporarily in place with light cord ties. A 1.52 millimeter coating of va-
por-barrier mastic shall be applied, and while still tacky, wrapped with glass lagging
tape.
3. Additional mastic shall be applied as needed and rubber-gloved to smooth fillets or
contours. On-the-job fabricated insulation for special configurations shall be built up
from mineral fiber and a mixture of insulating cement and lagging adhesive diluted
with 3 parts water. Only where standard aluminum jacketing cannot be used, the sur-
faces shall be made vapor-tight by using mastic and glass lagging cloth or tape as
specified above with an added finish coat of mastic.
4. Pipe insulation shall be set into outdoor vapor-barrier coating for a minimum of 150
millimeter at maximum 3500 millimeter spacing. Ends of the insulation shall be
sealed to the jacketing with the same material to provide effective vapor barrier stops.
5. Vapor barrier shall be continuous over all surfaces, including areas inside pipe
sleeves, hangers, and other concealment.
6. Piping insulation shall be applied to both sides of pipe hangers. Junctions shall be in-
sulated with a special mastic mixture, glass cloth mesh tape, and mastic as previously
specified.
7. Jacket laps, flaps, and bands shall be securely cemented in place with aluminum jacket
sealant. Jacketing bands for butt joints shall be 150 millimeter 6 inches wide.
8. Joints, wherever possible, shall be lapped against the weather so that the water will
run off the lower edge. Laps shall be in accordance with the pipe drainage pitch. Lon-
gitudinal laps on horizontal lines shall be located 45 degrees below the horizontal cen-
terline and alternately staggered 25 millimeter 1 inch. Jacketing material shall be
lapped a minimum of 50 millimeter, circumferentially sealed with mastic, and
strapped to provide a waterproof covering throughout. Straps shall be located 200 mil-
limeter 8 inches on center and shall be pulled up tight to hold jacketing securely in
place. Screws shall be used in addition to straps when necessary to obtain a waterproof
covering. Extra straps shall be placed on each side of supporting devices and at open-
ings. Where flanging access occurs, a chamfer sheet shall be strapped to the pipe at
jacketing.
9. Exposed longitudinal edges of aluminum jacketing shall be stiffened by bending a 25
millimeter hem on one edge.
10. Expansion joints shall provide for maximum and minimum dimensional fluctuations.
11. To prevent corrosion, the aluminum jacketing shall not come in direct contact with
other types of metal.
12. At openings in jacket, an outdoor vapor-barrier coating shall be applied for 50 milli-
meter in all directions. Jacketing shall be applied while waterproofing is tacky.
13. Screws shall be used at each corner of each sheet, at fitting jackets, and as necessary
for the service. Number 7, 10 millimeter 3/8 inch long, binding-head aluminum sheet
metal screws shall be placed through the mastic seal.

F. Type T-6, Calcium Silicate with Glass Cloth Jacket (Surfaces)

1. Surfaces shall be covered with insulation block bedded in an insulating cement and

Newton Lusail School 220719 - 11

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

covered with glass cloth jacketing.

2. Surfaces shall be cleaned with a chlorinated solvent. General purpose insulating ce-
ment shall be mixed with 3 parts water to 1 part nonvapor-barrier adhesive to bring to
application consistency. Block shall be set into bedding and joints and spaces shall be
filled with a bedding mix and wrapped with galvanized chicken wire mesh well laced
into an envelope. A 10 millimeter 3/8 inch thick coating of bedding mix jacket shall
be troweled on with nonvapor-barrier adhesive and glass cloth. Surfaces shall be fin-
ished with not less than a 0.152 millimeter dry-film thickness of nonvapor-barrier
coating.
3. At the Contractor's option, aluminum sheet jacketing may be used in lieu of glass
cloth.

G. Type T-7-10, Mineral-Fiber Fill

1. WW. Voids surrounding pipe shall be packed with mineral-fiber fill.

3.3 ACCEPTANCE

A. Final acceptance will depend upon providing construction (Record Drawings) details to the
Contracting Officer. Construction details shall include, by building area, the insulation
material type, amount, and installation method. An illustration or map of the duct routing
locations may serve this purpose.

B. This purpose. Data shall have a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with the system name, date,
and the words "Record Drawings insulation/material." Forward to the Systems
Engineer/Condition Monitoring Office/Predictive Testing Group for inclusion in the
Maintenance Database."

END OF SECTION 220719

Newton Lusail School 220719 - 12

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

SECTION 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

Newton Lusail School 221116 - 1

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. External underground domestic water pipe.

2. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and spe-
cialties inside the building.
3. Encasement for piping.
4. Specialty valves.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Escutcheons.
7. Sleeves and sleeve seals.
8. Wall penetration systems.

B. Related Section:

1. Division 22, 221119 - “DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES”.

2. Division 22, 20719 - “PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION”.

3. Division 22, 220523 - “GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING”.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance:

1. Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of earth-
quake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. For the following products:

a. Specialty valves.
b. Flexible connectors.
c. Escutcheons.
d. Sleeves and sleeve seals.
e. Water penetration systems.

B. Water Samples:

Newton Lusail School 221116 - 2

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

1. Specified in "Cleaning" Article.

C. Coordination Drawings:

1. For piping in equipment rooms and other congested areas, drawn to scale, on which
the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from In-
stallers of the items involved:

a. Fire-suppression-water piping.
b. Domestic water piping.
c. HVAC hydronic piping.
d. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components. Include
marking "NSF-pw" on piping.

C. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Water Service:

1. Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permit-
ted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary
water service according to requirements indicated:

a. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed

interruption of water service.
b. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Construction Man-
ager's written permission.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Refer to approved manufacturers list

Newton Lusail School 221116 - 3

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe size.

2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS (NOT APPLICABLE)

A. Hard Copper Tube:

1. ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

a. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

b. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure
fittings.
c. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
d. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with
ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded
ends.
e. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:

1) DN 50 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring

seal in each end.
2) DN 65 to DN 100: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-
rubber O-ring seal in each end.

f. Copper Push-on-Joint Fittings:

1) Description: Cast-copper fitting complying with ASME B16.18 or

wrought-copper fitting complying with ASME B 16.22; with stainless-
steel teeth and EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end instead of solder-
joint ends.

g. Copper-Tube Extruded-Tee Connections:

1) Description: Tee formed in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014.

h. Grooved-Joint Copper-Tube Appurtenances:

1) Copper Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M) copper tube
or ASTM B 584 bronze castings.
2) dGrooved-End-Tube Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design
similar to AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-
rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water, and bolts and nuts.

B. Soft Copper Tube:

1. ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper.

a. Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

b. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:

1) DN 50 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring

seal in each end.

Newton Lusail School 221116 - 4

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

2) DN 80 and DN 100: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-

rubber O-ring seal in each end.

2.4 POLYPROPYLENE PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. General: Pipe, fittings and accessories shall be produced from a material substantially
consisting of polypropylene. Only those additives that are needed may be used for the
manufacture of the polymer and for its conversion into sound, durable extrusions or
mouldings of good surface finish, mechanical strength and opacity.

B. Pipes and fittings shall be of soldered or screwed type joints and flanged with flange
adaptors.

C. Cutting to Length and Chamfering: Pipes shall be of such kind that can be cut to length
using fine tooth wood saw or hacksaw and of an end which can be chamfered with one of the
special hand tools developed for shaping plastics.

D. Material: Polypropylene random-copolymerisate of high molecular weight and stabilized to

high temperature.

E. Dimensions:

1. Pipes: According to DIN 8077.

2. Fittings: According to DIN 16962, Part 6 to 9 (pipe connections and fittings for
polypropylene) injection molded fittings, dimensions tolerance + 1 mm.

F. Quality:

1. Pipes: According to DIN 8078.

2. Fittings: According to DIN 16962 Part 5A (E Type 3).

G. Operating Pressure: For cold water at 20°C: up to 20 bar. For hot water at 70°C: up to 10
bar. The regulations and guide-lines-dealing with the different fields of application are to be
observed.

H. Chemical Resistance: Detailed information the chemical resistance of polypropylene pipes

and pipelines is available in Annex 1 to DIN 8078.

I. General Properties and Appearances: Pipes shall be reasonably round, homogenous

throughout, free from voids, cracks and other defects that would impair the performance in
service; and as uniform as commercially practical in color, density and other physical
properties.

J. Opacity: Pipes shall be fully opaque and when tested the wall of pipe shall not transmit
more than 0.2% of the visible light falling onto it.

2.5 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Ductile-Iron Pipes shall be K9 and fittings shall be K12 or K14 as specified in ISO 2531 or
equivalent.

Newton Lusail School 221116 - 5

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

B. Ductile iron flanges shall be PN16.

2.6 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 3.2 mm thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and
asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise
indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts:

1. ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals:

1. ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

D. Brazing Filler Metals:

1. AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing

unless otherwise indicated.
2. Plastic Fusion jointing
3. Fusion jointing by heat welding and/or electric welding sockets as per installation
requirements and manufacturer’s recommendations

2.7 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING

A. Standard:

1. ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

B. Form:

1. Tube.

C. Material:

1. High-density, cross-laminated PE film of 0.10-mm minimum thickness.

D. Color:

1. Black.

2.8 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined.

2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.

Newton Lusail School 221116 - 6

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings:

1. Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling:

1. AWWA C219.
2. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:

2.9 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with
separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and
temperature.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Description:

a. Pressure Rating: 1035 kPa at 82 deg C.

b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:

1. Description:

a. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

b. Pressure Rating: 1035 kPa, 1200 kPa minimum.
c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded
solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Kits:

1. Description:

a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

b. Pressure Rating: 1035 kPa.
c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Couplings:

1. Description:

a. Galvanized-steel coupling.
b. Pressure Rating: 2070 kPa at 107 deg C.
c. End Connections: Female threaded.

Newton Lusail School 221116 - 7

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic.

F. Dielectric Nipples:

1. Description:

a. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.

b. Pressure Rating: 2070 kPa at 107 deg C.
c. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors:

1. Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner
tubing.

a. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 1380 kPa.

b. End Connections DN 50 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end
copper tube.
c. End Connections DN 65 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.

B. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors:

1. Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends

welded to inner tubing.

a. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 1380 kPa.

b. End Connections DN 50 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.
c. End Connections DN 65 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.

2.11 ESCUTCHEONS

A. General:

1. Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.

B. One Piece, Cast Brass:

1. Polished, chrome-plated finish with setscrews.

C. One Piece, Deep Pattern:

1. Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish.

D. Split Casting, Cast Brass:

1. Polished, chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge and setscrew.

E. Split-Casting Floor Plates:

Newton Lusail School 221116 - 8

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

1. Cast brass with concealed hinge.

2.12 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes:

1. Fabricated of cast iron, and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends
and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves:

1. 0.6-mm minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

C. Molded-PE Sleeves:

1. Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for
attaching to wooden forms.

D. Molded-PVC Sleeves:

1. Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

E. PVC-Pipe Sleeves:

1. ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

F. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves:

1. ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc-coated, with plain ends.

G. Stack Sleeve Fittings:

1. Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring
and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

a. Under deck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

2.13 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description:

1. Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, used to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.

a. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of

pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
b. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
c. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure
plates to sealing elements.

Newton Lusail School 221116 - 9

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

2.14 WALL PENETRATION SYSTEMS

A. Description:

1. Wall-sleeve assembly, consisting of housing and gland, gaskets, and pipe sleeve.

a. Carrier-Pipe Deflection: Up to 5 percent without leakage.

b. Housing: Ductile-iron casting with hub, waterstop, anchor ring, and locking
devices. Include gland, bolts, and nuts.
c. Housing-to-Sleeve Gasket: EPDM rubber.
d. Housing-to-Carrier-Pipe Gasket: AWWA C111, EPDM rubber.
e. Pipe Sleeve: AWWA C151, ductile-iron pipe[ or ASTM A 53/A 53M,
Schedule 40, zinc-coated steel pipe].

2.15 GROUT

A. Standard:

1. STM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement

grout.

B. Characteristics:

1. Non shrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix:

1. 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging:

1. Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Division 31, Section 31 20 00 - Earth Moving, for excavating,
trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

1. Install Polypropylene pipes and dimensions and joints and fittings according to DIN
8077 and DIN8078 AND DIN16962.

Newton Lusail School 221116 - 10

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

2. Cut the pipe at right angles to the pipe axis.

3. Take care that the pipe axis is free from burrs or cutting chips and remove if necessary.
4. Mark the welding depth at the end of the pipe.
5. Mark the desired position of the fitting on the pipe and/or fitting.
6. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with
valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with re-
quirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pres-
sure gages and Division 22, Section 22 11 19 - Domestic Water Piping Specialties, for
drain valves and strainers.
7. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
8. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with
requirements in Division 22, Section 22 11 19 - Domestic Water Piping Specialties,
for pressure-reducing valves.
9. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.
10. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility com-
pany's requirements.
11. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building
occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service are-
as.
12. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel re-
moval, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.
13. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
14. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
15. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or
higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indi-
cated.
16. Install piping free of sags and bends.
17. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings
before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full
and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full
ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

a. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

b. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corrod-
ed or damaged.

D. Fusion weld Jointing of polypropylene pipes.

1. Push the end of the pipe, without turning, up to the marked welding depth into the
welding tool.
2. At the same time push the fitting, without turning, right down to the welding tool.
3. It is essential to observe the recommended heating times.

Newton Lusail School 221116 - 11

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

4. The heating time starts, when pipe and fitting have been pushed to the correct welding
depth on the welding tool.
5. In order to avoid that the pipe has not been put deep enough into the welding socket, it
is recommended to mark the welding depth.
6. Put both pipe ends completely into the electric welding socket. Ensure that the pipes
are squarly put into the electric welding socket and that the pipe ends cannot slip out.
7. Connect the plugs of the device with the electric welding socket.

3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. General-Duty Valves:

1. Comply with requirements in Division 22, Section 220523 - General-Duty Valves for
Plumbing Piping, for valve installations.
2. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing
fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to
plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping
DN 50 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping DN 65 and larger.
3. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizon-
tal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Di-
vision 22, Section 22 11 19 - Domestic Water Piping Specialties.
4. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
5. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 22, Section 220529 “Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment” and Division 22 “ Plumbing General provision – support”,
for pipe hanger and support products and installation.

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 30 m and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer Than 30 m: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 30 m If Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 30 m or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 10 mm.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

Newton Lusail School 221116 - 12

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and
connect to the following:
1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22,
Sections 224000 - plumbing fixture, for connection sizes.

3.7 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

B. Escutcheons for New Piping:

1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.
2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast brass
with polished chrome-plated finish.
3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece or split casting,
cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish.
4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast brass with rough-brass fin-
ish.
5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, stamped steel with spring clips.
6. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor plate.

3.8 WALL PENETRATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install wall penetration systems in new, exterior concrete walls.

B. Assemble wall penetration system components with sleeve pipe. Install so that end of sleeve
pipe and face of housing are flush with wall. Adjust locking devices to secure sleeve pipe in
housing.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22, Section 22 05 53 -

Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment, for identification materials and
installation.

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

Newton Lusail School 221116 - 13

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

B. Piping Inspections:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and ap-
proved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before in-
spection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction:

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or
inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having juris-
diction.

C. Piping Tests:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound
and that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been al-
tered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate re-
port for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and un-
concealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or con-
cealed before it was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 345 kPa and / or 1.5 time above the
operating pressure wherever greater, without exceeding pressure rating of piping sys-
tem materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for 24 hours. Leaks and loss in
test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.11 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate
flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return pip-

ing to provide flow of hot water in each branch.

Newton Lusail School 221116 - 14

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during
installation.
6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.12 CLEANING, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION

A. Clean and disinfect potable water piping and tanks as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or re-
paired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction;
if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a. Clean the raw and domestic water tanks and offered for the Engineer’s witness-
ing.
b. Mix Calcium Hypochlorite granules or equal approved in the drum.
c. Pour the chemical solution in the raw and domestic water tanks.
d. Allow the chemical to mix properly. Check the concentration of the chlorine on
site it shall be min. of 50 ppm. Value shall be measured via calibrated photome-
ter tester.
e. Start Booster pumps to transfer the chlorinated water from the tanks to the net-
work. The water filtration system shall be isolated during boosting the chemical.
f. Measure the chlorine level on all tanks and network random outlets. Values at
any point shall be not less than 50.0 ppm.
g. Keep the chlorinated water in the tanks and network for 24 hrs.
h. After 24 hrs. mix Sodium Meta-bisulfite (Neutralizer) in drum and pour the
chemical solution into the raw and domestic storage tanks and allow to neutral-
ize the chlorine for 2-3 hrs. Check the concentration of chlorine onsite, it shall
be not more than 3.0 ppm.
i. After 3 hrs., start Booster pumps to transfer the neutralized water from the tanks
to the network and continue replenishing the tanks with fresh water and proceed
the flushing till the water visually clear and having the chlorine less than 1.0
ppm. The water filtration system shall be isolated during boosting the neutral-
izer.
j. Once the chlorine level is achieved (less than 1.00 ppm), Collect the water sam-
ple for chemistry and bacterial analysis against M/s Kahamma drinking water
quality requirement (WHO and EU guidelines) last edition and submit for spe-
cialist contractor / supplier analysis and Third Party Laboratory Analysis.
k. Analysis reports shall be submitted for the Engineer’s approval

B. Clean and disinfect hot water primary circuit ( piping from LTHW Boiler and Water Storage
Tanks) piping as follows:
1. Static and dynamic flushing shall perform to the hot water primary circuit as similar as
perform in the chilled water closed circuit.
2. Upon Completion of static and dynamic flushing and disinfection , water sample shall
be drawn and to send for third party laboratory for analysis. Analysis Reports shall be
submitted for the Engineer’s approval.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

Newton Lusail School 221116 - 15

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

3.13 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be
used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground
copper tubing.

D. Under-ground water pipes and main building connection shall be HDPE pipes and fittings.

E. Aboveground water pipes at roof shall be insulated PP-R pipes and fittings (UV resistant).

F. Above ground water pipes from main water tank to elevated water tank (filling line) shall be
PP-R pipes and fittings.

G. Above ground water pipes above ceiling shall be insulated PP-R pipes and fittings.

H. Pump room pipes shall be ductile iron pipes and fittings.

3.14 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping DN 50 and smaller. Use butterfly,
ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping DN 65 and larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping DN 50 and smaller. Use butterfly
or ball valves with flanged ends for piping DN 65 and larger.
3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.
4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from
equipment.

C. Iron grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.

3.15 PIPE MOVEMENTS (POLYPROPLYENE PIPES)

A. Provide expansion joint to prevent pipe movements due to thermal expansion or to relevant
movements at building expansion joints. When underground pipe extended outside the
building structure, provide pipes in shell for inside and outside the building structures.

B. Indicate clearly on shop drawings the locations and details of expansion joints.

C. Apply as a guide the following installation procedure:

1. The maximum distance between entry and the nearest fixed point must be 500 mm.
2. Where pipework penetrates a fire barrier, the pipe must be fire stopped. If this pre-
vents thermal movement expansion joints must be provided.

Newton Lusail School 221116 - 16

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

3. Use suitable pipe clamp taking into consideration the pipe route has to be planned and
installed in a way that the pipe is free-moving within the determined expansion as rec-
ommended by Manufacturer.
4. Maximum vertical support intervals must not exceed 1800 mm for all sizes.

D. Maximum Support Distances(polypropylene pipes)

1. Support independently every length of pipe. Intermediate supports should be provided

for long lengths of pipe where necessary in accordance with Table 1.
2. Hangers and straps shall not compress, distort, cut or abrade the piping. Maintain ver-
tical piping in straight alignment.

TABLE 1
Maximum Supporting Distances

Nominal Size Maximum Support Distances

Horizontal Vertical
MM M M
110 and s1 110and smaller 0.9 1.8

E. Ensure that the supporting system shall accommodate expansion and contraction. Use only
supports that fit accurately to the pipes and fittings.

F. Testing

1. Apply hydraulic leakage test. Do not apply smoke testing for polypropylene pipe
work unless, after obtaining Engineer’s approval, be certain that the products of com-
bustion of the smoke generating set will have no detrimental effect on polypropylene.

END OF SECTION 221116

Newton Lusail School 221116 - 17

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221119 –DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

SECTION 221119 –DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

Newton Lusail School 221119 - 1

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221119 –DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:

1. Vacuum breakers.
2. Backflow preventers.
3. Temperature-actuated water mixing valves.
4. Water pressure-reducing valves.
5. Strainers.
6. Hose bibs.
7. Drain valves.
8. Water hammer arresters.
9. Air vents.
10. Trap-seal primer valves.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 22, Section 22 11 16 - Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.

C. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 860 kPa, unless
otherwise indicated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and mainte-
nance manuals.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:

Newton Lusail School 221119 - 2

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221119 –DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
domestic water piping components.
2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sec-
tions 1 through 9."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Refer to approved manufacturers list

2.2 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers VB:

1. Standard: ASSE 1001.

2. Size: DN 8 to DN 80, as required to match connected piping.
3. Body: Bronze.
4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.
5. Finish: Rough bronze.

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:

1. Standard: ASSE 1011.

2. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.
3. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.
4. Finish: Rough bronze.

2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers:

1. Standard: ASSE 1012.

2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
3. Body: Bronze.
4. End Connections: Union, solder joint.
5. Finish: Rough bronze.

B. Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers

1. Standard: ASSE 1052.

2. Operation: Up to 10-foot head of water (30-kPa) back pressure.
3. Inlet Size: DN 15 or DN 20.
4. Outlet Size: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
5. Capacity: At least 3-gpm 0.19-L/s flow.

Newton Lusail School 221119 - 3

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221119 –DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

C. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits:

1. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with
test-procedure instructions.

2.4 WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES

A. Water Regulators:

1. Standard: ASSE 1003.

2. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa).
3. Body: Bronze with chrome-plated finish for DN 50 and smaller; cast iron with interior
lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and
NPS 3 DN 65 and DN 80.
4. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass.
5. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 DN 50 and smaller; flanged for DN 65 and
DN 80.

2.5 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 860 kPa minimum, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Body: Bronze for DN 50 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with
AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for DN 65 and larger.
3. End Connections: Threaded for DN 50 and smaller;flanged for DN 65 and larger.
4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.
5. If retaining more than one screen size, indicate screen size on Drawings.
6. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers DN 50 and Smaller: 1.57 mm.

b. Strainers DN 65 to DN 100: 3.18 mm.
c. Strainers DN 125 and Larger: 6.35 mm.

7. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

2.6 HOSE BIBS

A. Hose Bibs HB:

1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.

2. Body Material: Bronze.
3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.
4. Supply Connections: DN 15 or DN 20 threaded or solder-joint inlet.
5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
6. Pressure Rating: 860 kPa.
7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral non-removable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum break-
er complying with ASSE 1011.
8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.
9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze.
10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.

Newton Lusail School 221119 - 4

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221119 –DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.

12. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key.
13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.
14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.
15. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.

2.7 ANGLE VALVE :

A. Angle valve shall be Chrome Plated finish with a quick-turn on/off feature.

B. Body shall be made of Quality hot forged brass, with a double “O” ring on the stem and a
Teflon Seat.

C. Chrome plated Escutcheon plate shall be installed.

D. Hot and Cold index identification (red / blue) shall be provided for hot and cold water
supply.

2.8 WATER SUB-METERS

A. KAHRAMAA approved water meters.

B. Install the water meter as indicated in the drawings as well as per the Local authorities’ regu-
lations.

2.9 KAHRAMAA BULK MAIN WATER METER

A. Comply with KAHRAMAA requirements.

B. Install the water meter as indicated in the drawings as well as per the Local authorities’ regu-
lations.

2.10 BALANCING VALVES (COMMISSIONING SET)

A. Copper Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valve.

1. Type: Y-pattern Globe valve with two readout ports and memory setting indicator.
2. Body: Bronze.
3. Sizes: Same as connected piping, but not larger than DN50.
4. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying
case.

B. Cast Iron Calibrated Balancing Valve

1. Type: Adjustable type with Y-pattern Globe valve with two readout ports and memory
setting indicator.
2. Sizes: Same as connected piping, but not smaller than DN65.
3. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying
case.

C. TEMPERATURE ACTUATED, 3 WAY WATER MIXING & DIVERTING VALVES

1. Motorized 3 way water mixing actuated valve assemblies:

Newton Lusail School 221119 - 5

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221119 –DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

a. Standard: ANSI Body Class 125, thermostatically controlled, water mixing /

diverting valve made for precise, process-water temperature control.
b. Pressure Rating: 860 kPa minimum unless otherwise indicated.
c. Body: Cast Iorn with corrosion-resistant interior components.
d. Connections: Flanged inlets and outlet.
e. Stem: Stainless Steel
d. Accessories: Electric Actuator assembly compatible with the valve suitable to use
for heating purpose.
e. Low seat leakage rate ≤ 0.1 % of Kvs for both ports A-AB & B-AB.
f. Tempered-Water Setting: 60o C.
h. Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate: as indicated for each calorifier.
i. Hot- and Cold-Water Inlet Size: as indicated.

2. Individual Fixture Water Tempering Valve:

a. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve.
b. Pressure Rating: 860 kPa minimum unless otherwise indicated.
c. Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
d. Temperature Control: Adjustable.
e. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded.
f. Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze.
g. Tempered-Water Setting: as per the operator Requirements.
h. Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate: as prescribed in Division 22, section 224000
“PLUMBING FIXTURES”

Newton Lusail School 221119 - 6

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221119 –DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

2.11 DRAIN COCK VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 2760-kPa minimum CWP.
3. Size: DN 20.

a. Body: Copper alloy.

4. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

5. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
6. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.
7. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
8. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.

B. Gate-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-80 for gate valves.

2. Pressure Rating: Class 125.
3. Size: DN 20.
4. Body: ASTM B 62 bronze.
5. Inlet: DN 20 threaded or solder joint.
6. Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.

C. Globe-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Bronze body.
2. Angle globe pattern.
3. Key Operated.
4. Inlet with nipple and cap for hose connection.

Newton Lusail School 221119 - 7

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221119 –DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

2.12 SLUICE VALVE (KEY OPERATED NON RISING STEM VALVE)

A. These specifications are applicable to all sizes of sluice valves larger than 80 mm diameter.
Sluice valves shall be of the following:

1. Gate Valve shall be fully comply with Kahramaa and / or M/s Marafeq requirements
as well as approved by them

2. Gate Valve shall be constructed in valve chamber ,pit and cover constrution as per
M/s Kahramaa and or M/s Marafeq Regulations.

3. Surface boxes and covers shall be adjustable cast iron of the slip type and fitted to the
sizes and depths of valves as shown on the Drawings and / or as per M/s Marafeq re-
quirements. Covers and frames shall be heavy duty and be suitable for wheel loads
up to 11.43 tonnes.

4. Surface boxes shall be coated by dipping or other equivalent means using a hot ap-
plied coal tar based material complying with BS 4164 or cold applied bitumen materi-
al complying with as 3416 and / or as per M/s Marafeq requirements. No coating shall
be applied to any casting until its surfaces are clean dry' and free from rust oil and del-
eterious materials.

5. 80 mm diameter up to and including 300 mm diameter to BS 5163 Resilient Seated for

potable water or Metal Seated for sewerage purpose.

B. 350 mm diameter up to and including 600 mm diameter to BS 5163 Metal Seated.

C. Gate Valves shall be of the double flanged ductile / cast iron wedge-gate type unless
otherwise stated.

D. Gate Valves pressure ratings shall equal the class of pipe unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.

E. Gate Valve non rising stems shall be of forged aluminium bronze or stainless steel, machined
all over, with a machine cut robust trapezoidal or square form thread, operating gunmetal.

F. Stem seals shall be of stuffing box and gland form arranged for easy replacement of packing.
However, valves may incorporate at least two elastomeric "0" ring stem seals. Both gland
packing and '0' ring seals shall be accessible for maintenance without removal of valve from
service. For each. valve supplied which incorporates '0' rings, two spare '0' rings shall be
supplied, suitably identified and delivered and place into storage at the Employer's
designated stores.

G. Extension spindles shall be of stainless steel and shall be compliant with the requirements for
valve stems. Extension spindle couplings shall be of the muff type and shall be drilled and
provided with a nut and bolt for securing the spindle to the valve stem, which will likewise
be drilled to accept the bolt.

H. Where valves are required to be operated by tee keys, spindle caps shall be fitted. The caps
shall be drilled and each provided with nut and bolt for securing to the spindle which shall
likewise be drilled to accept the bolt. Where caps are fitted they snail be supplied complete
with operating tee key. The extended spindle shall be such that the tee key will be operated
at 0.9 to 1.2 m above floor level.

Newton Lusail School 221119 - 8

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221119 –DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

2.13 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water Hammer Arresters WHA:

1. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.

2. Type: Metal bellows.
3. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.14 AIR VENTS

A. Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze.
2. Pressure Rating: 860-kPa minimum pressure rating at 60 deg C.
3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
5. Size: DN 15 minimum inlet.
6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.

2.15 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES

A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:

1. Standard: ASSE 1018.

2. Pressure Rating: 860 kPa minimum.
3. Body: Bronze.
4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: DN 15 threaded, union, or solder joint.
5. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: DN 15 threaded or solder joint.
6. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not
chrome finished.

B. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:

1. Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with DN 10 minimum, trap makeup connection.
2. Size: DN 32 minimum.
3. Material: Chrome-plated, cast brass.

2.16 SOLENOID ACTUATED VALVE

A. Cast Bronze body, Globe pattern , stainless steel stem and spring , Body seal non asbestos
gaskets and glass filled Teflon for orifice seal, 304 stainless steel pin , Encapsulated class H ,
Power supply shall be 220 VAC , 50HZ and PN10 operating pressure.

2.17 WATER TANK LEVEL INDICATORS

A. Audible and visual indicator/alarm panel including the following features and functions:

1. High water level audible alarm and visual indication - First low level audible alarm
and visual indication - Second low level pump cut-out and indication - Remote
indication contactors.

Newton Lusail School 221119 - 9

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221119 –DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

2.18 Mercury level regulators constructed from polypropylene with enclosed mercury switch ac-
tivated by tilting and electrically connected to the water level indicator

2.19 FLOAT VALVE

A. Float valve chambers to be provided with central hinged lockable ABS lid, 1.00m x1.00m in
plan, with options of 180mm, 300mm, 500mm depth with provision for type A air gap in
compliance with BS6281 : Part1 : 1992.

B. PART 3- EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22, Section 22 05 00 - Common Work Results for Plumbing, for piping
joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Where the Kitchen Equipment, kitchen sinks and fixture unit having flexible hose connection
, the angle valve shall be provided in piping rough-ins outlet .

C. All base of riser shall be provided with drain cock valve even if not shown on the drawings.

D. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and
to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.

2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-
gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two
pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached
to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this applica-
tion.
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

E. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet
and outlet.

F. Install water control valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves [and bypass with globe
valve]. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

G. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

H. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets
and with shutoff valve on outlet.

1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified.

2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.

I. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each water pressure-reducing valve,
solenoid valve, and pump.

1. Install shutoff valve on outlet if specified.

2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. Install
38-by-89-mm fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking wall reinforcement between studs.

Newton Lusail School 221119 - 10

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221119 –DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Car-

pentry."

J. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201 as well as the
Manufacturer’s recommendations.

K. Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto floor
drain.

L. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap
a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve
for proper flow.

M. Install drainage-type, trap-seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down
toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet
fitting.

2.21 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."

2.22 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or

sign on or near each of the following:

1. Pressure vacuum breakers.

2. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers.
3. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers.
4. Water pressure-reducing valves.
5. Primary water tempering valves.
6. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.
7. Trap-seal primer systems.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate

safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition
to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification
for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

2.23 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer according to authorities hav-

Newton Lusail School 221119 - 11

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221119 –DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

ing jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified
above.

2.24 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.

D. Submit for the Engineer’s witnessing, perusal and approval.

2.25 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS:

A. Contractor shall include in the contract to procure and handover under his expenses the
following minimum quantity of the spare parts as per the list and / or that recommended by
the manufacturer. These spare parts shall be brand new and similar to the equipment /
material being installed:

i- Drain Cock Valve : 1 No. for each size.

ii- Pressure Reducing valve : 2 No. for each size.

iii- Backflow prevention Valve : 1 No. for each size..

iv- 3 way mixing and diverting valves: 1 No. for each size.

v- Balancing valve (DRV): : 2 Nos. for each size.

vi- Gaskets : 10 for each installed type

END OF SECTION 221119

Newton Lusail School 221119 - 12

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221123.13 - DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

SECTION 221123.13 - DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

Newton Lusail School 221123.13 - 1

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221123.13 - DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes variable-speed, multiplex, packaged booster pumps for domestic water
piping systems.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Pumps" for domestic water circulation pumps.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. For each packaged booster pump specified. Include certified performance curves with
operating points plotted on curves; and rated capacities of selected models, furnished
specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. For packaged booster pumps and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, de-
tails, and attachments to other work. Shop Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a
qualified professional engineer.
2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analy-
sis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
3. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and
seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
4. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attach-
ments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and
rails and equipment mounting frames.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Detail power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. For each packaged booster pump to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance
manuals.

Newton Lusail School 221123.13 - 2

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221123.13 - DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Product Options:

1. Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of packaged booster

pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Product Requirements."

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. ASME Compliance:

1. Comply with ASME B31.9 for piping.

2. Packaged booster pumps shall be listed and labeled as pumping systems by testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Refer to approved manufacturers list

2.2 VARIABLE - SPEED, MULTIPLEX BOOSTER PUMPS

A. Description:

1. Factory-assembled and -tested, packaged booster pump with multiple pumps, piping,
valves, sensors, and controls on skids or base.

B. System Working-Pressure Rating:

1. 860 kPa minimum unless higher pressure indicated.

Newton Lusail School 221123.13 - 3

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221123.13 - DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

C. Pump Arrangement:

1. Triplex, with three equal-size pumps each pump capacity equal 50 % of full load, First
pump lead, second pump lag and third pump stand-by with alternator to Control op-
eration sequence.

D. Pumps:

1. Vertical, multistage can. Comply with UL 778 and HI 2.1-2.2.

a. Construction: Bronze fitted.

1) Casing: Stainless steel.

2) Impellers: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically bal-
anced, closed or semi open, and keyed to shaft.
3) Bowls: Coated cast iron.
4) Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Stainless steel shaft with copper-alloy shaft
sleeves.

b. Coupling: Spool type.

E. Motors:

1. Variable speed through variable speed drive which shall be integrated with the motor,
with oil-lubricated bearings, unless otherwise indicated. Select motor that will not
overload through full range of pump performance curve. Comply with Division 22
Section "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."

F. Control Valves:

1. Adjustable, automatic, pilot-operated pressure regulator on each pump Set discharge.

G. Relief Valves:

1. Adjustable, pressure relief type on pump discharge.

H. Piping:

1. ASME B31.9 for piping materials and installation.

a. DN 100 and Smaller: ASTM B 88, Type L, drawn copper water tube; with
copper solder-joint pressure fittings, and brazed joints
b. DN 125 and Larger: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, dip galvanized-steel
pipe with threaded, cast-iron fittings and threaded joints.
c. Header End Connections:
1) DN 50 and Smaller: Threaded.
2) DN 65 and Larger: Flanged.

d. Piping Option: Piping, including valves and other components, may have
grooved ends for grooved joints.

I. Valves:

Newton Lusail School 221123.13 - 4

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221123.13 - DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

1. Include shutoff valve at each pump suction, and shutoff valve and check valve at each
pump discharge.

a. Shutoff Valves, DN 50 and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze rising-stem
gate valve.
b. Shutoff Valves, DN 65 and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, bronze-trim,
OS&Y, cast-iron gate valve with flanged ends.
c. Check Valves, DN 50 and Smaller: Spring, MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze,
swing check valve.
d. Check Valves, DN 65 and Larger: Spring- or lever-loaded, MSS SP-71,
Class 125, bronze-trim, cast-iron, swing check valve.

J. Sensors:

1. Pressure and flow switches.

K. Dielectric Fittings:

1. With insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action
and to stop corrosion.

a. DN 50 and Smaller: Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 1725-kPa mini-

mum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C).
b. DN 65 and Larger: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly; for 1035-
or 2070-kPa minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

L. Controller: The control panel shall be of the programmable logic controller (PLC) type. The
complete control panel assembly and all internal devices shall be CE marked.

M. The panel shall be complete with door interlocked main disconnect, water tight LCD
interface, breaker VFD connections, adjustable time delays and Hand-Off-Auto selector for
each pump. The control circuit shall include fault relay circuit to turn on the next pump
should the lead pump fail. The controller must be capable of controlling up to 5 pumps, using
a 4-20 mA analogue signal using pressure as the control variable.

N. Controller design shall include provisions for system 'soft fill' mode, low flow energy
savings, best-operating-point (BOP) sequencing, automatic alternation of pumps, automatic
omission of failed pumps, built-in pump on-delay timers, pump elapsed run time meters,
smooth pump starting and sequencing. The controller screen shall indicate but not limited to
the following field modifiable control and alarm parameters, high system pressure shutdown
and no-flow shutdown with draw down tank/system optimization.

O. Alarm display with alarm identification shall be incorporated with the following alarms
included: low and high system pressure alarms, low water shutdown, pump failure, drive
fault and discharge pressure transmitter failures. fault descriptions. Non-volatile factory set
parameters must be capable of being restored at any time in the field without requiring any
programming device or connection to an external source.

P. The controller must hold software in FLASH memory storage which prevents accidental loss
of data due to voltage surge or spike.

Q. All controls to be factory pre-wired and tested in accordance with provisions of the national
electrical code. All control wires shall be individually numbered and each component shall

Newton Lusail School 221123.13 - 5

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221123.13 - DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

be labeled accordingly.

R. Integrated Variable Frequency Drive (VFD):

1. VFD shall be of the VVC-PWM type providing near unity displacement power factor
(cos Ǿ) without the need for external power factor correction capacitors at all loads
and speeds.

S. Instrumentation and Controls

1. Pump system shall be supplied with manifold mounted liquid filled pressure gauges
for indicating discharge pressure.

T. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping:

1. Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion com-
pound after assembling and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and pump nozzles.
2. Pump and Characteristics as indicated in the drawings:

2.3 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Description:

1. Corrugated, bronze inner tubing covered with bronze wire braid. Include copper-tube
ends or bronze flanged ends, braze-welded to tubing. Include 150-psig 1035-kPa min-
imum working-pressure rating and ends according to the following:
a. DN 50 and Smaller: Threaded. Provide flanged ends if pump has flanged con-
nections.
b. DN 65 and Larger: Flanged.

2.4 BUILDING-AUTOMATION-SYSTEM INTERFACE

A. Provide auxiliary contacts in pump controllers for interface to building automation system.
Include the following:

1. On-off status of each pump.

2. Normal-Fault status of each pump.
3. Other interfaces as per I/O points and / or related BMS drawings.

B. All activities as per I/O points shall be monitored on Dynamic colour graphics and graphic
control as prescribed in related Division. Submit Graphics for the Engineer’s approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for packaged booster pumps to verify actual locations of connections
before booster pump installation.

Newton Lusail School 221123.13 - 6

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221123.13 - DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

3.2 CONCRETE BASES

A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for packaged booster pumps. Refer to
Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indi-
cated, install dowel rods on 450-mm centers around full perimeter of base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through con-
crete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, in-
structions, and directions furnished with items to be imbedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevation required for proper attachment to supported equip-
ment.
5. Install the concrete plinth of pump so the Center Line of the suction pipe Provision in
the tank in higher than or equal to the suction flange of the Pump.

B. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 03.

3.3 BOOSTER PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Install packaged booster pumps level on concrete bases with access for periodic maintenance
including removal of pumps, motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

1. Do not dismantle packaged booster pumps or remove individual components.

B. Vibration Isolation:

1. Install on spring isolators with minimum deflection.

2. Support connected domestic water piping so weight of piping is not supported by
packaged booster pumps.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect domestic water piping to packaged booster pumps. Install suction and discharge
pipe equal to or greater than size of unit suction and discharge piping.

1. Install flexible connectors on piping connections to unit suction and discharge piping.
Install flexible connectors same size as piping.
2. Install shutoff valves on piping connections to each booster pump suction and dis-
charge piping Install gate valves same size as suction and discharge piping. General-
duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing
Piping."
3. Install union or flanged connections on pump suction and discharge piping at connec-
tion to domestic water piping.
4. Install piping adjacent to packaged booster pumps to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."

Newton Lusail School 221123.13 - 7

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221123.13 - DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."

3.5 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Install identifying equipment markers and equipment signs on booster pumps. Labeling and
identification materials are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment."

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE, PRE-COM., TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A. Prior startup the pump, Method of statement of testing and commissioning of the pump set
shall be submitted for the Engineer’s approval. All testing records shall be noted on the
Manufacturer’s standard forms.

B. All Testing shall offer for the Engineer’s witnessing and approval.

C. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following startup service:

1. Check the installation of pumps, pipe lines and valves are approved by the Engineer.

2. Check the pipe line are tested and approved by the Engineer.

3. Check the water storage tank and network cleaning and disinfection as prescribed in
division 22, section 221116 “DOMESTIC WATER PIPING - CLEANING,
FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION” are approved by the Engineer.

4. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instruc-

tions.
5. Check piping connections for tightness.
6. Clean strainers if any.
7. Set timers for automatic starting and stopping operation of pumps.
8. Verify the activation of Dry run protection devices, pumps’ cut-in and cut-off.
9. Verify the system scheme interlocks and safeties.
10. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.

11. Verify bearing lubrication.

12. Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing discharge valves, and prepare
pumps for operation.
13. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free
to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until
cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
14. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction prior starting.
15. Start Motor.

D. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following start-up and

functionality testing for each pump of packaged booster pump unit:
1. Start the Pump.
2. Open discharge valves slowly and gradually.
3. Adjust all necessary settings as recommended by the Manufacturer.
4. Perform the pre-commissioning, Testing and commissioning approved and / or rec-

Newton Lusail School 221123.13 - 8

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221123.13 - DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

ommended testing activities for the pump control panel as well as the MCC panel.
5. Set the pressure vessel as per the Manufacture’s recommendations.
6. Perform the activation of Dry run protection float switch, pumps’ cut-in and cut-off.
7. Perform pump performance test for individual pump at the following:
a. Discharge valve fully closed at shut-off head,
b. Adjusted discharge valve at nominated flow;
c. Discharge valve fully opened at minimal head.
8. Perform pump performance test for dual pump in operation at the following:
a. Adjusted discharge valve at nominated flow;
b. Discharge valve fully opened at minimal head.
9. Perform the measurement of pump pressure, Motor speed, current and voltage at each
phase and other related testing parameters recommended by the pump manufacturer
during the individual and dual operation performance testing.
10. Perform the pump trip auto changeover and pump working hrs. Auto changeover.
11. Perform demand based auto change over.
12. For every auto change over, the pump control system shall change the pump sequenc-
ing.
13. Maintain the Minimum and Maximum floor residual pressure as prescribed in Divi-
sion 22 “PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS” and set the pump pressure accord-
ingly.
14. Perform the necessary and required safeties, controls, BMS interfaces and associated
Graphics.
15. Perform the approved system sequence of operation and scheme interlocks.
16. Pump testing will considered as accepted only when the values being tested are equal
to the design parameters and or within the allowable limits / tolerances ±10% .

E. Occupancy Adjustments:

1. When requested within 400 days defect warranty / liability period stated from the
Takeover Certificate of the project, provide on-site assistance in adjusting packaged
booster pumps to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project
outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.7 HANDOVER TO THE HOTEL OPERATOR:

A. Refer to Division 22 “PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS “

3.8 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS

A. Refer to Division 22, section “PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS – SPARE PAERTS

AND TOOLS”.

B. The Contractor shall include in the contract to procure and handover the recommended spare
parts by the Equipment Manufacturer under his expenses as detailed in the Division 22
“Plumbing General Provision-Spare Parts and Tools”. These spare parts shall be brand new
and similar to the equipment / material being installed, at any case, Spare parts and tools
shall be not less than the following:
1. Bellows : 1 No. each Size.
2. Mechanical Seal : 1 No. each Size.
3. Pump Bearing : 2 set for each pump.
4. Sensors & Transmitters : 1 No. for each pump unit.

Newton Lusail School 221123.13 - 9

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221123.13 - DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

3.9 WARRANTY

A. All Domestic Water Packaged Booster Pumps installed in this project shall have a minimum
warranty of five years of normal performing operation commenced from the takeover
Certificate issued by the Engineer and / or as per the contract as well as per standard
warranty whichever greater.

B. During the warranty period, perform the periodic routine and preventive maintenance as per
the Equipment manufacturer’s requirement to verify its proper operation.

3.10 TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged booster pumps.

END OF SECTION 221123.13

Newton Lusail School 221123.13 - 10

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221123-14 –IRRIGATION WATER PUMPS

SECTION 221123-14 –IRRIGATION WATER PUMPS

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 221123.14 - 1
 221123-14 –IRRIGATION WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General conditions, Conditions of Par-
ticular Applications and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This Section includes the water and irrigation pumps.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:

B. Division 22 Section for piping not specified in this Section

1.4 PUMP PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Pump Pressure Ratings:

1. At least equal to system maximum operating pressure at point where installed, but not less than
850 kPa.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic water pump specified. Include certified perfor-
mance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated capacities of selected models, fur-
nished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water pumps to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of domestic water
pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Re-
quirements."

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Arti-
cle 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 221123.14 - 2
 221123-14 –IRRIGATION WATER PUMPS

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements
are specified in Division 03.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with the specification requirements of this section.

2.2 END-SUCTION PUMPS

A. General Description:

1. Centrifugal, close-coupled, end-suction, single-stage, bronze trimmed design, rated for 850 kPa
working pressure.

B. Casings:

1. cast iron with flanged piping connection, and threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet flange
connections.

C. Impeller:

1. ASTM B 584 cast bronze impeller statically and dynamically balanced, closed, overhung, sin-
gle suction, and keyed to shaft, and secured by a locking cap screw, replaceable bronze casing
wearing ring, stainless steel shaft with bronze sleeve. Include flinger on motor shaft between
motor and seals to prevent liquid that leaks past pump seals from entering the motor bearings.

D. Mechanical Seals:

1. Carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless steel spring, ceramic seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.

E. Motor:

1. Comply with NEMA C Face -TEFC, Class F insulation with temperature rise limited to class
B; the stator winding shall be made of copper and IP55enclosure.
2. Pulse width modulated, integrated motor/variable frequency drive design; the motor and drive
designed and built by a single manufacturer.
3. The variable frequency drive enclosure shall include, dry-contact fault output relay contacts,
analog, and digital inputs.
4. The motor shall detect/protect itself against under voltage, over voltage, excessive temperature,
overload, sensor signal fault, and set-point signal fault.

F. Pump Specialties:

1. Include the pump specialties with end connections matching pump and piping where indicated
and/or required for proper operation. Refer to Division 22 Section "Valves" for general-duty

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 221123.14 - 3
 221123-14 –IRRIGATION WATER PUMPS

gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves.

G. Electronic Controller

1. The controller shall operate the pumps to maintain the design pressure while using minimum
energy and alternating between pumps to maintain relatively equal pump operating hours.
2. All pumps will changeover automatically to maintain the system pressure depending on de-
mand, time, and fault.
3. The controller shall accept a low-suction pressure or other suction fault input to shut down the
system.
4. The controller shall have a keypad and LCD display screen.

H. Programmable Functions

1. System functions will be programmable through the keypad. These programmable functions
and information shall include, but not be limited to:

a. Pump status
b. Elapsed running hours
c. System pressure set-point
d. Actual system pressure
e. Pump speed (percent)
f. Pump min/max speed (percent)
g. System faults
h. Pressure transducer design settings
i. Standby pump designation
j. Current pump rotation order
k. Friction Loss Compensation (set point)
l. High and low discharge pressure shutdown limit
m. Low-suction pressure shut-down limit
n. Analog input for remote set-point control
o. Digital input for remote stop/start
p. Clock Program

I. Control Cabinet

1. The controller shall be mounted in a control cabinet with a NEMA 3R enclosure rating with the
keypad and display screen mounted through the outer door.
2. The control cabinet shall be UL 508 listed as an assembly.
3. The control cabinet shall include circuit breakers for each pump and the control circuit and
control relays for alarm functions.
4. Control cabinet shall include, the followings:

a. Pump Run Lights

b. Pump Fault Lights
c. Visual Alarm
d. Audible Alarm
e. Lightning Arrestor
f. Phase Monitor
g. Voltmeters
h. Ammeters
i. Lightning Protection
j. Pump Elapsed Time Meters
k. Alternator
l. Control Panel internal illumination

J. Integrated Variable Frequency Drive (VFD):

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 221123.14 - 4
 221123-14 –IRRIGATION WATER PUMPS

1. VFD shall be of the VVC-PWM type or approved equal , providing near unity displacement
power factor (cos Ǿ) without the need for external power factor correction capacitors at all
loads and speeds.

2.3 BUILDING-AUTOMATION-SYSTEM INTERFACE

A. Provide auxiliary contacts in pump controllers for interface to building automation system. Include
the following:

1. On-off status of each pump.

2. Normal-Fault status of each pump.
3. Other interfaces as per I/O points and / or related BMS drawings.

B. All activities as per I/O points shall be monitored on Dynamic colour graphics and graphic control as
prescribed in related Division. Submit Graphics for Engineer’s approval.

PART3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine irrigation -water-piping system to verify actual locations of connections before pump instal-
lation.

3.2 CONCRETE BASES

A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps and controllers. Refer to Division 22 Section
"Common Work Results for Plumbing."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, in-
stall dowel rods on 450-mm centers around full perimeter of base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base
and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions,
and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
5. Install the concrete plinth of pump so the Center Line of the suction pipe Provision in the tank
in higher than or equal to the suction flange of the Pump.

B. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 03.

3.3 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers, couplings,
and accessories.

C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of
pumps is not supported by piping.

D. Install end - suction pump.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 221123.14 - 5
 221123-14 –IRRIGATION WATER PUMPS

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate gen-
eral arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than
size of pump nozzles. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."

1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the following
pumps:

a. End-Suction pumps.

2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of pumps, and check valve and throttling valve
on discharge side of pumps. Install valves same size as connected piping. Refer to Divi-
sion 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty valves for do-
mestic water piping and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for strainers.
3. Install pressure gages at suction and discharge of pumps. Install at integral pressure-gage tap-
pings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and discharge piping
around pumps. Refer to Division 22 .

D. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Ca-
bles."

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE , PRE-COM., TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A. Prior startup the pump, Method of statement of testing and commissioning of the pump set shall be
submitted for the Engineer’s approval. All record forms shall be noted on the Manufacturer’s standard
forms.

B. All Testing shall offer for the Engineer’s witnessing and approval.

C. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Check the installation of pumps, pipe lines and valves are approved by the Engineer.

2. Check the pipe line are tested and approved by the Engineer.

3. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Check piping connections for tightness.
5. Clean strainers on suction piping.
6. Set thermostats and timers for automatic starting and stopping operation of pumps.
7. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free
to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause
of trouble is determined and corrected.
c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

8. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation.
9. Start motor.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 221123.14 - 6
 221123-14 –IRRIGATION WATER PUMPS

10. Verify the activation of Dry run protection devices, pumps’ cut-in and cut-off.
11. Verify the system scheme interlocks and safeties.
12. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate
with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is de-
termined and corrected.
13. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction prior starting.

D. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following start-up and functionality
testing for each pump:
1. Start the Pump.
2. Open discharge valves slowly and gradually.
3. Adjust all necessary settings as recommended by the Manufacturer.
4. Perform the pre-commissioning, Testing and commissioning approved and / or recommended
testing activities for the pump control panel, irrigation Controller as well as the MCC panel.
5. Perform the activation of Dry run protection float switch, pumps’ cut-in and cut-off.
6. Perform pump performance test for individual pump at the following:
a. Discharge valve fully closed at shut-off head,
b. Adjusted discharge valve at nominated flow;
c. Discharge valve fully opened at minimal head.
7. Perform pump performance test for dual pump in operation at the following:
a. Adjusted discharge valve at nominated flow;
b. Discharge valve fully opened at minimal head.
8. Perform the measurement of pump pressure, Motor speed, current and voltage at each phase
and other related testing parameters recommended by the pump manufacturer during the indi-
vidual and dual operation performance testing.
9. Perform the pump trip auto changeover and pump working hrs. Auto changeover.
10. Perform demand based auto change over (if recommended).
11. For every auto change over, the pump control system shall change the pump sequencing.
12. Maintain the Minimum and Maximum residual pressures as recommended by the irrigation
sprinkler and dripper, and set the pump pressure accordingly.
13. Perform the flow measurement randomly for irrigation sprinkler and drippers.
14. Perform the operation of solenoid valves and gate valves.
15. Perform the necessary and required safeties, BMS interfaces and related Graphics.
16. Perform the approved system sequence of operation and associated scheme interlocks.
17. Pump testing will considered as accepted only when the values being tested are equal to the de-
sign parameters and or within the allowable limits tolerances ±10% .

3.1 HANDOVER TO THE HOTEL OPERATOR

A. The Contractor is full responsible to arrange and perform any necessary testing requested by the Hotel
Operator without any additional cost to the Client.

B. Contractor Must arrange the necessary and required testing Devices / instruments / tools with a valid
due calibration during the testing inspection of the system with the Operator.

C. Contractor shall action all of the Hotel Operator’s comments that are critical for Hotel Operation prior
the issuance of take-over certificate by the Engineer.

D. At the time of handover to the operator of the Works after the Taking Over Certificate, the whole
installation shall be in ‘as-new’ conditions. The Contractor shall, during the course of the Contract,
protect all plant and equipment and shall restore/repaint as necessary before handover of the
installation.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 221123.14 - 7
 221123-14 –IRRIGATION WATER PUMPS

3.2 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS

A. Refer to Division 22, section “PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS – SPARE PAERTS AND
TOOLS”.

B. Contractor shall include in the contract to procure and handover the following minimum quantity of
the spare parts as per the list and / or that recommended by the manufacturer. These spare parts shall
be brand new and similar to the equipment / material being installed:
1. Bellows : 1 No. each size.
2. Mechanical Seal : 1 No. each size.
3. Pump Bearing : 2 set for each pump.
4. Sensors & Transmitters : 1 No. for each pump Unit.

3.3 WARRANTY

A. All Irrigation Water Pumps installed in this project shall have a minimum warranty of five years of
normal performing operation commenced from the takeover Certificate issued by the Engineer and /
or as per the contract as well as per standard warranty whichever greater.

B. During the warranty period, perform the periodic routine and preventive maintenance as per the
Equipment manufacturer’s requirement to verify its proper operation.

3.4 TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,

operate, and maintain pumps.

END OF SECTION 221123-14

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 221123.14 - 8
 221224 - WATER STORAGE TANKS

SECTION 221224 - WATER STORAGE TANKS

Newton Lusail School 221224 - 1

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221224 - WATER STORAGE TANKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including general and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Furnish and install Water Storage Tanks as indicated on drawings.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of specified

items with characteristics, sizes and capacities required, whose products have been
in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

B. Certification, test certificates under specified operating conditions shall be provided

by manufacturer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s assembly-type shop drawings indicating

dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and methods of assembly of
components.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of
equipment, control and accessory, including “trouble – shooting” maintenance
guide. Include this data, product data and shop drawings in maintenance manual.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Handle equipment and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting

and scoring. Do not install damaged equipment or components, replace with new.

B. Store equipment and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt,
fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage.

Newton Lusail School 221224 - 2

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221224 - WATER STORAGE TANKS

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GRP WATER STORAGE TANK AND ACCESSORIES

A. The filtered and cooled water storage tanks shall be insulated type and back wash
water holding tank shall be un-insulated type.

B. The manufacture and design of the hot press molded GRP sectional water storage
tanks shall be to the quality standard requirements of BS EN ISO 9001 and shall
comply with BS7491: Part 3: 1994 glassfibre reinforced plastic cisterns for cold
water storage.

C. Cisterns shall be manufactured by the hot press molded method, glass reinforced
plastic, molded at temperatures up to 150 deg.C using isophthalic unsaturated
polyester resins, UV stabilized and ‘E’ glassfibre reinforcement, color mid gray.

D. The cistern design shall incorporate 1.00 x 1.00m pillow panels to walls of non-
insulated cisterns with provision for flat panels for connections and fittings.
Purpose made cover panels 1.00m x 1.00m and 1.00m x 0.50m flat panels
positioned to give free draining channels.

E. Base panels available as internally flanged IFB with 1.00m x 1.00m flat panels,
fasteners internal, or externally flanged EFB with 1.00m x 1.00m flat panels and
one pillow sump panel, fasteners external.

F. All Surfaces of the panels shall be smooth and crevice free to provide hygienic finish
and be dimensionally accurate with sharply defined profiles.

G. Float valve chambers to be provided with central hinged lockable ABS lid, 1.00m
x1.00m in plan, with options of 180mm, 300mm, 500mm depth with provision for
type A air gap in compliance with BS6281 : Part1 : 1992.

H. Man access 600mm diameter hinged lockable ABS lid.

I. All tanks deeper than 1.50m shall be fitted with internal SS 316 L ladders, external
standard duty stainless steel access ladders.

J. Where partitions are required, they must be of full height using standard panels. Each
compartment to be capable of supporting water on either side with one side empty.

K. Panels to be rigidly supported by a combination of stainless steel tie rods internally

and galvanized box sections externally. Bolts and nuts used in assembly of tanks
shall be stainless steel 316/A4 grade.

L. Steelworks designed to BS5950, internally stainless steel 316/A4 grade and

externally mild steel galvanized to BS729. The cisterns to incorporate external wall
bracing on depths greater than 1.50m, and tie rods 2.00m.

Newton Lusail School 221224 - 3

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221224 - WATER STORAGE TANKS

M. Extruded synthetic rubber sealing strip to be used covering full width of panel flange
providing a watertight seal.

N. Certificate of WRC (Water Research Centre) approval shall be provided.

O. Composite Material Specifications:

Density 1800 Kg/m3 ISO 1183

Water Absorption 0.18 Mg ISO 62
Coefficient Thermal Expansion 2.1x10-5 Deg.C ASTM D696
Flexural Strength 185 Mpa ISO 178
Flexural Modules 13 Gpa ISO 178
Tensile Strength 90 Mpa Iso r 3268
Impact Strength 80 Kj/M2 ISO 179
Glass Content 30 %
Light Transmission 0.00

P. Panel strength shall be fully compliant with BS 7491 : Part 3 : 1994 , giving a factor
of safety of tanks in excess of 6 times working pressure against rupture.

Q. The Contractor shall include but not be limited to the following accessories and connections
for each compartment:

i- Inlet connection with float operated filling valve.

ii- Overflow pipe , one higher size than inlet pipe and / or as indicated.

iii- Suction connection and tank drain piping.

iv- Maintenance water proof Lamp.

v- Stainless Steel insect Screened Air Vent.

vi- SS-316 / A4 grade Internal and mild steel galvanized to BS729 External Ladders
and ladder’s support

vii- Float switches for pump dry run, pumps’ cut-in and cut-off and overflow.

viii- Ultrasonic level indicator inside the tank connecting to the BMS for the Content of
water volume in the tank.

ix- Visual level indicator as specified in relevant section 221119 “DOMESTIC

WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES - WATER TANK LEVEL INDICATORS”.

x- Equalizer Line and valve for Two Compartments tanks.

Newton Lusail School 221224 - 4

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221224 - WATER STORAGE TANKS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. All tanks shall be installed strictly in compliance with the manufacturer’s

instructions.

B. All cisterns to be installed on either flat continuous foundation or close center beams
conforming to manufacturer’s specification of flatness and deflection.

C. Installation shall be carried out by approved installers.

D. Testing shall be carried out on completion of installation and to be completed within

ten working days of assembly.

E. The testing of panels and sealant shall be as listed by Water Research Center, UK
conforming to water fittings Bylaws Scheme.

F. Level indication facility shall be provided for all underground and above ground
water tanks. Monitoring facility from building management system shall be
provided.

G. The tank shall be erected strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions upon
support structures that are flat and level to within ±3mm with no local protrusions
exceeding 1 m.

H. Each tank shall have a minimum maintenance access way of 600mm and / or as per
Manufacturer’s recommendations at all sides around the tank.

I. All tanks shall have a dedicated Permanent means of access such as steel platform and
catwalk. Not allowed to stand on the tank roof panel/(s) to access the tank for inspection
and further maintenance. Submit for the Engineer approval prior fabrication.

J. Permanent work platform and catwalk shall be designed by the Contractor and provided by
the Contractor for access to the GRP tanks. The catwalk and platform for access shall
allow a minimum width of 750mm.

K. Catwalk to maintenance platform shall be provided with railings and guards designed for
safe movement of personnel in a restricted space including provision for gaining access
and to accommodate maintenance personnel.

L. The design of all permanent work platform, hand rails, etc. shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval. The loading and fixing method of lifting facilitate shall also be
submitted to the Engineer for approval and checking within 4 weeks on award of Contract
or receipt of letter of intent.

M. Each compartment of each tank shall contain the necessary electrodes or float switches and
controls to accomplish: high water alarm (overflow level), low water alarm (Pump dry run
protection), pump’s cut-in/cut-off, contents gauges and temperature monitoring. Provide a

Newton Lusail School 221224 - 5

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221224 - WATER STORAGE TANKS

spare set of DPDT dry contacts for each alarm for remote annunciation by the BMCS Sub-
Contractor.

3.2 LEAK / INTEGRITY TEST

A. Upon Completion of works, All tanks shall be offered for flood / integrity leak testing, the
water level shall be at the bottom of overflow pipe for 24 hrs. test period.

3.3 WARRANTY

A. Tank shall Grantee for 10 years from the date of takeover certificate issued by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION 22 12 24

Newton Lusail School 221224 - 6

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 221316 - 1
 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Special pipe fittings.
3. Encasement for underground metal piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

C. GRP: glass reinforced plastic .

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pres-
sure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste and Vent Piping

2. Sanitary Sewer, Force-Main Piping

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plas-
tic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent
piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste pip-
ing; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materi-
als.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 221316 - 2
 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

2.2 GLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (GRP) PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe, fittings and accessories shall be conform to ASTM D2997 & ASTM D 3517-01 QCS last
edition requirements.

B. All GRP components shall be designed and fabricated by one manufacturer.

C. GRP pipes and fittings shall be manufactured by an approved process utilising a mandrel or rotating
mould incorporating equipment to accurately control the quantities and placement of all resins, glass
and aggregates.

2.3 uPVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe, fittings and accessories shall be produced from a material substantially consisting of unplas-
ticiezed polyvinyl chloride. Only those additives that are needed may be used for the manufacture of
the polymer and for its conversion into sound, durable extrusions or mouldings of good surface finish,
mechanical strength and opacity.

B. Pipe and fittings shall be of spigot and socket type.

1. Dimensions: Pipes 80 mm and larger shall conform to the outside diameters and wall thickness
as described in BS 3505.
2. Pipe 50 mm and smaller shall conform to the requirements of ASTM 2665.
3. Lengths: Pipes shall be supplied in straight lengths, normally of 1.8 m, 2.4 m and 3 m or other
lengths as may be agreed upon between the Contractor and manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer.
4. Cutting to Length and Chamfering: Pipes shall be of such kind that can be cut to length using
fine tooth wood saw or hacksaw and of an end which can be chamfered with one of the special
hand tools developed for shaping plastics.

C. Apply lubricant to the chamfered spigot end.

D. Physical Characteristics:

1. General Properties and Appearances: Pipes shall be reasonably round, homogenous

throughout, free from voids, cracks and other defects that would impair the performance in
service; and as uniform as commercially practical in colour, density and other physical
properties.
2. Pipe surface shall be free from nicks, scratches and other blemishes. The joining surfaces of
pipe shall be free from gauges and other imperfections that may cause leakage at joints.
3. The internal and external surfaces of pipe shall be smooth, clean and reasonably free from
grooving and other defects. Pipes shall be reasonably straight.
4. Heat Reversion: When tested, no point all around the pipe shall have a length change in excess
of 5% at 150 + 2°C. After testing, the pipe shall show no faults such as cracks, cavities or
blisters.
5. Opacity: Pipes shall be fully opaque and when tested the wall of pipe shall not transmit more
than 0.2% of the visible light falling onto it.

E. Chemical Characteristics: UPVC pipes and fittings shall be tested for water absorption, resistance to
acetone and resistance to sulpheric acid and shall comply with requirements of MUPVC pipes, fittings
shall comply to the requirements of ASTM 2665.

F. Mechanical Characteristics: uPVC pipes and fittings shall comply with requirements of MUPVC
pipes, fittings shall comply with the requirements of ASTM 2665.

G. Marking: Pipes shall be indelibly marked. In no case shall mark intervals exceed 3 m. Pipe markings

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 221316 - 3
 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

shall continuously include the following:

a. Manufacturer’s name
b. Nominal size
c. Identification code

H. All fittings shall be marked on the body on hub on both sides. The marking shall, at least consist of
the manufacturer’s name or trace mark or both.

2.4 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PE, Pipe and fitting shall be according to DIN 19535-10: High – density polyethelene (PE-HD) Pipes
and fittings for Hot Water Resistant waste and sewerage discharge system outside Buildings.

B. Insert Fittings for PE Pipe: ASTM D 2609, made of PA, PP, or PVC with serrated male insert ends
matching inside of pipe. Include bands or crimp rings.

2.5 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS

A. Flexible, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reduc-
ing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and corrosion-
resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

1. Sleeve Materials:

a. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
b. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe mate-
rials being joined.

B. Shielded Non pressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length,
corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism
on each end.

C. Rigid, Unshielded, Non-pressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type reducing- or transition-
type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion-resistant-metal
tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

D. Pressure Pipe Couplings: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type same size as, with pressure rating at least
equal to, and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined.

1. Center-Sleeve Material: Ductile iron.

2. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.
3. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

E. Flexible Ball Joints: Ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends com-
plying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include gasketed ball-joint section and ductile-iron
gland, rubber gasket, and steel bolts.

F. Expansion Joints: Two or three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve(s) with
gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying with AWWA C110
or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111,
ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

G. Wall-Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing sections
for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 221316 - 4
 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

2.6 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING

A. Description: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, high-density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.10-mm min-
imum thickness.

B. Form: tube.

C. Color: Black.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

B. External drainage pipe between man holes

1. DN 160mm and smaller uPVC Pipes and fittings.

2. DN 200mm and larger GRP Pipes and fittings.

C. Internal soil and waste piping shall be as the following:

1. Internal uPVC pipe, uPVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexible, non-pressure pipe couplings for joining dissimi-
lar pipe materials with small difference in OD.

D. Vent piping shall be as the following:

1. uPVC pipe, uPVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexible non-pressure pipe couplings for joining dissimi-
lar pipe materials with small difference in OD.

E. Kitchen and laboratory waste piping shall be as the following:

1. HDPE pipes, molded HDPE fittings, socket- or but fusion type

2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Rigid, non-pressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar
pipe materials with small difference in OD.

F. Sanitary-sewage force DN 100 and smaller shall be as the following:

1. uPVC pressurized pipes, fittings, join according to ASTM 1807 or
HDPE pipes, molded HDPE fittings, socket- or but fusion type

G. Condensate drain piping: Use one of the following:

1. Schedule 40 PVC pipe and fittings and solvent welded joints with thermal insulation.

H. Swimming pool drainage: Use the following:

1. HDPE high pressure pipe and fitting comply with British standard.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 221316 - 5
 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Sanitary sewer piping outside the building is specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Sanitary Sew-
ers."

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results
for Plumbing."

C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vi-
bration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

D. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary
sewers.

E. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping.

F. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches,
bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks
if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-
bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight
tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90
degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected.
Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

G. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and
alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install
required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and
other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

H. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise in-
dicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping DN 65 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping DN 80 and larger.
2. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

I. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:

1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Sovent Drainage System: Comply with ASSE 1043 and sovent fitting manufacturer's written
installation instructions.
3. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

J. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is
without membrane waterproofing.

K. Install uPVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.

L. Install underground uPVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

M. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities
having jurisdiction.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Re-
sults for Plumbing."

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 221316 - 6
 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

B. uPVC Non-pressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.

C. uPVC pressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2855.

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for
Plumbing Piping."

B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge.

1. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping DN 50 and smaller.

2. Install gate valve for piping DN 65 and larger.

C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sewage pump
discharge.

D. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to sewage backflow.

1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves, unless drain has integral backwater valve.
3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
4. Backwater valve are specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment." Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:
a. 30 m and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 30 m: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 30 m, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 30 m or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support
pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 10-mm minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod di-
ameters:

1. DN 32: 2100 mm with 10-mm rod.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 221316 - 7
 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

2. DN 40: 2700 mm with 10-mm rod.

3. DN 50: 3 m with 10-mm rod.
4. DN 65: 3.4 m with 13-mm rod.
5. DN 80: 3.7 m with 13-mm rod.
6. DN 100 and DN 125: 3.7 m with 16-mm rod.
7. DN 150: 3.7 m) with 19-mm rod.
8. DN 200 to DN 300: 3.7 m with 22-mm rod.

G. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 4.5 m.

H. Install hangers for uPVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod
diameters:

1. DN 40 and DN 50: 1200 mm with 10-mm rod.

2. DN 80: 1200 mm with 13-mm rod.
3. DN 100 and 125: 1200 mm with 16-mm rod.
4. DN 150: 1200 mm with 19-mm rod.
5. DN 200 to DN 300: 1200 mm with 22-mm rod.

I. Install supports for vertical piping every 1200 mm.

J. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written in-
structions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dis-
similar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required
by plumbing code.
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and un-
ion for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections DN 65 and larger.

D. Connect force-main piping to the following:

1. Sanitary Sewer: To exterior force main or sanitary manhole.

2. Sewage Pumps: To sewage pump discharge.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be
made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after
roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 221316 - 8
 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make
required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in
absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, ex-
tended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test,
complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it
was tested.
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders,
on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of
overflow, but not less than 30 kPa. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of
inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with
water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings
on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal
to pressure of 250 Pa. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure
this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout
period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfac-
tory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

E. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of
published procedures, as follows:

1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping until
it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was
tested.
2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 345 kPa above operating pressure, without
exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for
four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

3. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfac-
tory results are obtained.
4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to
prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 221316 - 9
 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex
paint.

END OF SECTION 221316

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 221316 - 10
 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

Newton Lusail School 221319 - 1

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. The Qatar construction specification (QCS 2014) shall form the basis of the project specifi-
cation. The technical specification is supplemental to QCS (latest revision) and should be
read in conjunction with QCS and all other contract documents. In case of contradiction or
discrepancy between QCS and technical specifications, CONTRACTOR shall incorporate
whichever is more stringent.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:

1. Cleanouts.
2. Garage drains.
3. Floor drains.
4. Shower drains.
5. Planter drain.
6. Trench drains.
7. Grease interceptors
8. Sand traps
9. Grease interceptors
10. Sand traps
11. Inspection chambers
12. Gully trap
13. Retarding chambers
14. Air-admittance valves.
15. Through-penetration fire-stop assemblies.
16. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
17. Flashing materials.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for trench drains for storm
water, channel drainage systems for storm water, roof drains, and catch basins.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

Newton Lusail School 221319 - 2

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

B. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent terminals.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and lo-
cate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.

B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
sanitary piping specialty components.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

Newton Lusail School 221319 - 3

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Metal Floor Cleanouts (FCO):

1. Floor Cleanout
2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for threaded, for heavy duty adjustable housing
cleanout.
3. Size: Same as connected branch.
4. Type: Threaded, adjustable housing.
5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.
6. Clamping Device: Required.
7. Outlet Connection: Spigot.
8. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.
9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.
10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy.
11. Frame and Cover Shape: Square.
12. Top Loading Classification: Heavy duty.

2.2 GARAGE DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Garage Drains (GD):

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.

2. Pattern: Garage drain with inside gasket.
3. Body Material: Gray iron with epoxy coated.
4. Seepage Flange: Not required.
5. Anchor Flange: Required.
6. Clamping Device: Not required.
7. Outlet: Bottom.
8. Backwater Valve: Not required.
9. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Epoxy coated.
10. Sediment Bucket: Suspended Bucket.
11. Top or Strainer Material: Gray iron.
12. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Paint coated.
13. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 300 mm round, heavy duty, tractor grate.
14. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.
15. Inlet Fitting: Gray iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal
primer valve connection.
16. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
17. Trap Features: Trap-seal primer valve drain connection.
18. Provide Funnel where required for any indirect waste.

Newton Lusail School 221319 - 4

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

2.3 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains (FD):

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.

2. Pattern: Floor drain with inside gasket.
3. Body Material: Gray iron.
4. Seepage Flange: Not required.
5. Anchor Flange: Required.
6. Clamping Device: Not required.
7. Outlet: Bottom.
8. Backwater Valve: Not required.
9. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Epoxy coated.
10. Sediment Bucket: Suspended Bucket.
11. Top or Strainer Material: Gray iron.
12. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Paint coated.
13. Dimensions of Top or Strainer:150 mm square, light duty inside toilets and heavy duty
at roof & mechanical room.
14. Top Loading Classification: Medium duty at roof & mechanical room.
15. Inlet Fitting: Gray iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal
primer valve connection.
16. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
17. Trap-seal primer valve connection: Required where indicated.
18. Provide Funnel where required for any indirect waste.

2.4 SHOWER CHANNEL DRAINS

1. Material: ABS.
2. Water proofing layer: Required.
3. Number of outlet: One
4. Type of cover: Stainless steel.
5. Outlet diameter: 50mm
6. Outlet: Bottom or side as applicable.
7. Top Shape: Square.
8. Odor trap: Required.
9. Hair filter: Required.

2.5 PLANTER DRAIN

A. Planter drain (PD):

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.

2. Pattern: Planter Drain.
3. Body Material: Cast iron.

Newton Lusail School 221319 - 5

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

4. Seepage Flange: Not required.

5. Clamping Device: Not required.
6. Outlet: Bottom.
7. Backwater Valve: Not required.
8. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Epoxy coated.

2.6 TRENCH DRAINS

A. Trench Drains (TD):

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for trench drains.

2. Material: Ductile or gray iron.
3. Flange: Seepage.
4. Clamping Device: Required.
5. Outlet: Bottom or Side.
6. Grate Material: Ductile iron or gray iron Gray iron.
7. Grate Finish: Painted.
8. Dimensions of Frame and Grate: 150 mm dom.

9. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.

10. Trap Material: Cast iron.
11. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.

B. Trench Grate (TG):

1. Grates: heavy duty," with slots and of width 300mm and thickness that fit recesses in
frames sections.

a. Material: Ductile iron.

b. Frame material: Galvanized steel.
c. Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to
frames sections.
d. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Epoxy coated.

2. Show locations and lengths of covers on Drawings. Supports, Anchors, and Setting
Devices: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 GREASE INTERCEPTORS.

A. Grease Interceptors (GI):

1. Standard: EN 1825-1.
2. Operation: Automatic disposal and cleaning system.
3. Body Material: Corrosion free polyethylene
4. Sludge trap: Required.
5. Flow Rate: As indicated in drawing and BOQ.

Newton Lusail School 221319 - 6

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

6. Cleanout: Integral.
7. Mounting: Above floor, flush with floor.
8. Flow-Control Fitting: Required.

2.8 OIL INTERCEPTORS.

1. Type: Factory-fabricated interceptor for separating and removing light oil from
wastewater.
2. Body Material: Cast iron or steel.
3. Interior Lining: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
4. Exterior Coating: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
5. Body Dimensions: As per drawings.
6. Inlet and Outlet Size: 75mm.
7. Cleanout: Integral.
8. Location: Under-ground, flush with floor.
9. Flow-Control Fitting: Required.
10. Oil Storage Tank: Fabricated steel tank according to UL 142, single wall, horizontal.

2.9 SAND TRAPS (ST)

A. Reinforced concrete sand trap, heavy duty cast iron covers and frames, cast iron steps,
inlet and outlet wall pipe, interior and exterior water proofing.

2.10 INSPECTION CHAMBERS (IC)

A. Shall be cast-in-situ concrete with dimensions as indicated in the drawings and depth as
required.

B. Internal and external protective coating.

C. Heavy duty double-seal cover.

2.11 GULLY TRAP (GT)

A. Shall be plastic type inside concrete chamber (where required) with dimensions as
indicated in the drawings and depth as required.

2.12 RETARDING CHAMBERS (RCH)

A. Cast-in-situ concrete rectangular chamber of size according to dimension as shown on

Drawings.

B. Bituminous coating shall be applied to buried surfaces.

Newton Lusail School 221319 - 7

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

C. Chamber covers and frames shall be heavy duty ductile iron.

D. Steps shall be of dimensions, shape, details and spacing as shown on Drawings.

E. Steps shall be painted with three approved coats of coal tar epoxy coating.

F. Concrete work shall be as per Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete”.

2.13 AIR-ADMITTANCE VALVES

A. Stack Air-Admittance Valves:

1. Standard: ASSE 1050 for vent stacks.

2. Housing: Plastic.
3. Operation: Mechanical sealing diaphragm.
4. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

2.14 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Through-Penetration Fire-stop Assemblies:

1. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.
2. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.
3. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nail-
ing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
4. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neo-
prene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC pro-
tective cap for plug.
5. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.

2.15 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Air-Gap Fittings:

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap be-
tween installed inlet and outlet piping.
2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.
3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.
4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.
5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indi-
rect waste piping.

B. Sleeve Flashing Device:

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve

Newton Lusail School 221319 - 8

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe exten-
sion in top of fitting that will extend 51 mm above finished floor and galvanized-steel
pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.
2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stacks piping.

C. Stack Flashing Fittings:

1. Description: Counter flashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminat-
ing roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

D. Vent Caps:

1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. In-
clude vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.
2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

E. Expansion Joints:

1. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M.

2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland.
3. End Connections: Matching connected piping.
4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.

2.16 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum
weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Use: 1.6-mm thickness.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 15-kg/sq. m, 1.2-mm thickness.
3. Burning: 30-kg/sq. m, 2.4-mm thickness.

B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses,
unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Applications: 3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm thickness.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 2.5 kg/sq. m or 0.27-mm thickness.

C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 1.01-
mm minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include Z275 hot-dip galvanized, mill-
phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 1.01-mm

minimum thickness.

E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

Newton Lusail School 221319 - 9

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

2.17 MOTORS

A. General requirements for motors are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are
specified in Division 26 Sections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout
deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to
remove valve cover for servicing.

C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to DN 100. Use DN 100 for larger drainage piping
unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 15 m for piping DN 100 and smaller and 30 m for
larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.

E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

F. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush
with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

Newton Lusail School 221319 - 10

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.
Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius, 750 mm or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 6.35-
mm total depression.
b. Radius, 750 to 1500 mm: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
c. Radius, 1500 mm or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than
25-mm total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and ad-
joining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.

G. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush
with finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Assemble and install ASME A112.3.1, stainless-steel channel drainage systems according to
ASME A112.3.1. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with surface.

I. Assemble non-ASME A112.3.1, stainless-steel channel drainage system components

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install on support devices so that top will
be flush with adjacent surface.

J. Install fixture air-admittance valves on fixture drain piping.

K. Install stack air-admittance valves at top of stack vent and vent stack piping.

L. Install air-admittance-valve wall boxes recessed in wall.

M. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through
roof.

N. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

O. Install through-penetration fire stop assemblies in plastic stacks at floor penetrations.

P. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 51 mm above floor.

Q. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

R. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal
primer connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

Newton Lusail School 221319 - 11

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

S. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping

discharge into sanitary drainage system.

T. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with
waterproof membrane.

U. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.

V. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy
access and maintenance.

W. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.

X. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.

Y. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal
protruding pipe fittings.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 30-kg/sq. m, 2.4-mm thickness or thicker.
Solder joints of lead sheets 20-kg/sq. m, 1.6-mm thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors
and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 250 mm, and
skirt or flange extending at least 200 mm around pipe.

Newton Lusail School 221319 - 12

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 200 mm around
sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 200
mm around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made
flashing fittings, according to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure
flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.

G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.

3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or

sign on or near each of the following:

1. Grease interceptors.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect field-assembled FOG disposal systems and grease removal devices and their
installation, including piping and electrical connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris
and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

Newton Lusail School 221319 - 13

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

3.7 TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Ministry's maintenance personnel

.

END OF SECTION 221319

Newton Lusail School 221319 - 14

Mechanical Specification – Rev. 00
 221329 - SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS

SECTION 221329 - SANITARY SEWAGE PUMPS

Newton Lusail School 221329 - 1

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221329 - SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following sewage pumps and accessories for sanitary drainage
piping systems in buildings:

1. Submersible sump Pumps.

2. Submersible ejector Pumps.
3. Sump pit.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. For each type and size of sewage pump specified. Include certified performance
curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated capacities of selected mod-
els, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. For each sewage pump to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

2. As built drawings.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Product Options:

1. Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of sewage pumps and
are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Re-
quirements."

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

Newton Lusail School 221329 - 2

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221329 - SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete pits. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 03.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Refer to approved manufacturers list

2.2 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS

A. Submersible, Quick-Disconnect Effluent Pumps:

1. Factory-assembled and -tested, duplex, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction, sub-

mersible, direct-connected effluent pumps complying with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-
1.2 and HI 1.3 for submersible sewage pumps and with SWPA's "Submersible Sewage
Pumping Systems (SWPA) Handbook" for guide-rail supports

a. Casing: Cast iron, with open inlet, legs (or guide-rail supports) that elevate
pump to permit flow into impeller, and vertical discharge with companion
flange for piping connection.
b. Impeller: ASTM A 532/A 532M, abrasion-resistant cast iron; statically and dy-
namically balanced, closed or semiopen design for clear wastewater; overhung,
single suction, and keyed and secured to shaft.
c. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel with factory-sealed, grease-lubricated
ball bearings and double mechanical seals.
d. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in overload protec-
tion; lifting eye or lug; and three-conductor, waterproof, power cable of length
required and with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at
pump. Comply with Division 22 Section "Common Motor Requirements for
Plumbing Equipment."

1) Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor and moisture alarm.

2) Motor Housing Fluid: Air or oil.

e. Guide-Rail Supports: Include the following for each sewage pump:

1) Guide Rails: Vertical pipes or structural members, made of galvanized

steel or other corrosion-resistant metal, attached to baseplate and basin
sidewall or cover.
2) Baseplate: Corrosion-resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor, sup-
porting guide-rail supports and stationary elbow.
3) Pump Yoke: Motor-mounted or casing-mounted yokes or other attach-
ments for aligning pump during connection of flanges.
4) Stationary Elbow: Fixed discharge-elbow fitting with flange that mates to

Newton Lusail School 221329 - 3

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221329 - SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS

movable-elbow flange and support attached to baseplate.

5) Lifting Cable: Stainless steel; attached to pump and cover at manhole.

B. Pump Discharge Piping:

1. See section 221316 “ SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING”

C. Pit Cover:

1. Cast iron or coated steel and suitable to support controls. See Part 2 "Sewage Pump
Pits" Article for other requirements.

D. Controls:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, enclosures, pedestal mounted unless wall mounting is indicated;
with mercury-float switches in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures; mounting rod; and
electric cables. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on
successive cycles and to operate multiple units if one pump cannot handle load.

a. Float Guide: Pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins of depth greater
than 60 inches (1500 mm).
b. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with mercu-
ry-float -switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 120-V ac, with trans-
former and contacts for remote alarm bell.

E. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. As indicated in the drawings.

2.3 SUBMERSIBLE EJECTOR PUMPS

A. Submersible, Quick-Disconnect Effluent Pumps:

1. Factory-assembled and -tested, duplex, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction, sub-

mersible, direct-connected effluent pumps complying with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-
1.2 and HI 1.3 for submersible sewage pumps and with SWPA's "Submersible Sewage
Pumping Systems (SWPA) Handbook" for guide-rail supports

a. Casing: Cast iron, with open inlet, legs (or guide-rail supports) that elevate
pump to permit flow into impeller, and vertical discharge with companion
flange for piping connection.
b. Impeller: ASTM A 532/A 532M, abrasion-resistant cast iron; statically and dy-
namically balanced, closed or semi open design for solids handling; overhung,
single suction, and keyed and secured to shaft.
c. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel with factory-sealed, grease-lubricated
ball bearings and double mechanical seals.
d. Motor: Hermetically sealed capacitor-start type; with built-in overload protec-
tion; lifting eye or lug; and three-conductor, waterproof, power cable of length
required and with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at
pump. Comply with Division 22 Section "Common Motor Requirements for
Plumbing Equipment."

1) Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor and moisture alarm.

2) Motor Housing Fluid: Air or oil.

Newton Lusail School 221329 - 4

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221329 - SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS

e. Guide-Rail Supports: Include the following for each sewage pump:

1) Guide Rails: Vertical pipes or structural members, made of galvanized

steel or other corrosion-resistant metal, attached to baseplate and basin
sidewall or cover.
2) Baseplate: Corrosion-resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor, sup-
porting guide-rail supports and stationary elbow.
3) Pump Yoke: Motor-mounted or casing-mounted yokes or other attach-
ments for aligning pump during connection of flanges.
4) Stationary Elbow: Fixed discharge-elbow fitting with flange that mates to
movable-elbow flange and support attached to baseplate.
5) Lifting Cable: Stainless steel; attached to pump and cover at manhole.

B. Pump Discharge Piping:

1. See section 221316 “ SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING”

C. Pit Cover:

1. Cast iron or coated steel and suitable to support controls. See Part 2 "Sewage Pump
Pits" Article for other requirements.

D. Controls:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, enclosures, pedestal mounted unless wall mounting is indicated;
with mercury-float switches in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures; mounting rod; and
electric cables. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on
successive cycles and to operate multiple units if one pump cannot handle load.

a. Float Guide: Pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins of depth greater
than 60 inches (1500 mm).
b. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with mercu-
ry-float -switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 120-V ac, with trans-
former and contacts for remote alarm bell.

E. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. As indicated in the drawing

2.4 SUMP PITS

A. Description:

1. Concrete pit with sump, pipe connections, curb frame, and separate cover.

B. Sump:

1. Construct of watertight, cast-in-place, reinforced concrete with sidewall openings for

pipe connections. Cast-in-place concrete, formwork, and reinforcement are specified
in Division 03 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

a. Pipe Connections: Sleeved openings large enough for mechanical sleeve seals
for drainage piping. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Divi-
sion 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" and drainage piping is

Newton Lusail School 221329 - 5

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221329 - SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS

specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

C. Curb Frame and Cover:

1. Curb Frame Material: Galvanized steel or steel with bituminous coating.

a. Pattern: Angle-cross-section shape with flat top surface.

2. Cover: Fabricate with openings having gaskets, seals, and bushings; for access to
pumps, pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power ca-
bles.

a. Material: Cast iron.

b. Reinforcement: Steel or cast iron, capable of supporting foot traffic for basins
installed in foot-traffic areas.

2.5 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTERFACE

A. Provide auxiliary contacts in pump controllers for interface to building automation system.
Include the following:

1. On-off status of each pump.

2. Normal – Fault status of each pump.
3. Low level alarm of each pump.
4. High level alarm of each pump.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing piping to verify actual locations of sanitary drainage and
vent piping connections before sewage pump installation.

3.2 CONCRETE

A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps and controllers. Refer to
Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indi-
cated, install dowel rods on 450-mm centers around full perimeter of base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through con-
crete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, in-
structions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equip-
ment.

B. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 03.

3.3 INSTALLATION

Newton Lusail School 221329 - 6

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221329 - SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

B. Install sewage pumps according to applicable requirements in HI 1.4.

C. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance including removal of motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.

D. Suspend wet-pit-mounted, vertical sewage pumps from pit covers. Make direct connections
to sanitary drainage piping.

E. Set submersible sewage pumps on pit floors. Make direct connections to sanitary drainage
piping.

1. Anchor guide-rail supports to pit bottoms and sidewalls or covers. Install pumps so
pump and discharge pipe disconnecting flanges make positive seals when pumps are
lowered into place.

F. Install sewage pump basins and connect to drainage and vent piping. Brace interior of basins
according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or collapse during
concrete placement. Set basin cover and fasten to basin top flange. Install cover so top
surface is flush with finished floor.

G. Construct sewage pump pits and connect to drainage and vent piping. Set pit curb frame
recessed in and anchored to concrete. Fasten pit cover to pit curb flange. Install cover so top
surface is flush with finished floor.

H. Install packaged, submersible sewage pump units and make direct connections to drainage
and vent piping.

I. Install packaged, wastewater pump unit basins on floor or concrete base unless recessed
installation is indicated. Make direct connections to drainage and vent piping.

J. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and
Vent Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to sewage pumps to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect sanitary drainage and vent piping to pumps. Install discharge piping equal to or
greater than size of pump discharge piping. Install vent piping equal to or greater than size
of pump basin vent connection. Refer to Division 22 Section "Sanitary Drainage and Vent
Piping."

1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in discharge piping.

2. Install check and shutoff valves on discharge piping from each pump. Install unions
on pumps having threaded pipe connections. Install valves same size as connected
piping. Refer to Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for
general-duty valves for sanitary waste piping.

D. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."

Newton Lusail School 221329 - 7

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221329 - SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS

E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instruc-

tions.
2. Verify bearing lubrication.
3. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation.
4. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. If pump is bound or drags, do not op-
erate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
5. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.

B. Start pumps without exceeding safe motor power:

1. Start motors.
2. Open discharge valves slowly.
3. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

D. Remove and replace damaged and malfunctioning components.

1. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation as
required for system application.
2. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated, or if not indi-
cated, for normal operation.

E. Occupancy Adjustments:

1. When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site

assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two
visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain controls and pumps.

END OF SECTION 221329

Newton Lusail School 221329 - 8

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

SECTION 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

Newton Lusail School 221413 - 1

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Special pipe fittings.
3. Encasement for underground metal piping.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 22 Section "Sump Pumps."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

C. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

E. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum

working-pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Storm Drainage Piping: 30 kPa.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional Ministry Repre-

sentative for selecting seismic restraints.
2. Controlled-Flow Storm Drainage System: Include calculations, plans, and details.

C. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.

Newton Lusail School 221413 - 2

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for
plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and
"NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Refer to approved manufacturers list

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.

2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

B. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, Storm pat-
terns.

C. PVC pipes: ASTM D1785, schedule 40.

D. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466, for Schedule 40Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:

1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated ac-
cording to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.4 GLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (GRP) PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe, fittings and accessories shall be conform to ASTM D2997 & ASTM D 3517-01 QCS
last edition requirements.

B. All GRP components shall be designed and fabricated by one manufacturer.

C. GRP pipes and fittings shall be manufactured by an approved process utilising a mandrel or
rotating mould incorporating equipment to accurately control the quantities and placement of
all resins, glass and aggregates.

Newton Lusail School 221413 - 3

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

2.5 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS

A. Flexible, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-
type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as piping to be
joined, and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

1. Sleeve Materials:

a. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.

B. Shielded Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with
full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and
tightening mechanism on each end.

C. Pressure Pipe Couplings: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type same size as, with pressure
rating at least equal to, and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined.

1. Center-Sleeve Material: Malleable iron.

2. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.
3. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

D. Expansion Joints: Two or three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping

sleeve(s) with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections
complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for
expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel
bolts.

E. Wall-Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing
sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with
AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.

2.6 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING

A. Description: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, high-density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.10-

mm minimum thickness.

B. Form: tube.

C. Color: Black.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

Newton Lusail School 221413 - 4

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

B. Aboveground storm drainage piping shall be any of the following:

1. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexible, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining
dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.

C. Underground storm drainage piping DN 160 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Solid-wall Cellular-core PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
2. Glass reinforced plastic (GRP) pipes and fittings.

D. Underground, storm drainage piping DN 200 and larger shall be any of the following:

1. Glass reinforced plastic (GRP) pipes and fittings.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Storm sewer and drainage piping outside the building are specified in Division 33 Section
"Storm Utility Drainage Piping."

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."

C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building
storm sewers. Cleanouts are specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping
Specialties."

D. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

E. Install wall-penetration fitting system at each service pipe penetration through foundation
wall. Make installation watertight.

F. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

G. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and
long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size
of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size
of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

H. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install
true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends
of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions
for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping
and pull past each joint as completed.

I. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping DN 80 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping DN 100 and larger.

J. Install engineered controlled-flow storm drainage piping in locations indicated.

K. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if

Newton Lusail School 221413 - 5

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

slab is without membrane waterproofing.

L. Install PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665.

M. Install underground PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

N. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Grooved Joints: Cut groove ends of pipe and assemble grooved ends of pipes, grooved-end
fittings, and grooved-end-piping couplings according to AWWA C606.

C. PVC pressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2855.

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty

Valves for Plumbing Piping."

B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each sump pump discharge.

1. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping DN 50 and smaller.

2. Install gate valve for piping DN 65 and larger.

C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sump
pump discharge.

D. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow.

1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
3. Backwater valve are specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Special-
ties."

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic

Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

Newton Lusail School 221413 - 6

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

a. 30 m and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer Than 30 m: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 30 m, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 30 m or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment."

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 10-mm minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:

1. DN 40 and DN 50: 1200 mm with 10-mm rod.

2. DN 80: 1200 mm with 13-mm rod.
3. DN 100 and DN 125: 1200 mm with 16-mm rod.
4. DN 150: 1200 mm with 19-mm rod.
5. DN 200 to DN 300: 1200 mm with 22-mm rod.

G. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 1200 mm.

H. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
written instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition
fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or clos-

ing-in after roughing-in.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to ob-
serve tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

Newton Lusail School 221413 - 7

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in
absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been al-
tered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate re-
port for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or con-
cealed before it was tested.
3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, except outside leaders, on completion of
roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow,
but not less than 30 kPa. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of
inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops..

END OF SECTION 221413

Newton Lusail School 221413 - 8

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

SECTION 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

Newton Lusail School 221423 - 1

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping specialties:

1. Cleanouts.
2. Trench drains.
3. Through-penetration fire stop assemblies.
4. Roof drains.
5. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties.
6. Flashing materials.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties" for backwater valves, floor
drains, trench drains and channel drainage systems connected to sanitary sewer, air
admittance valves, FOG disposal systems, grease interceptors and removal devices, oil
interceptors, and solid interceptors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. FOG: Fats, oils, and greases.

B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

C. PUR: Polyurethane plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. For each type of product indicated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

Newton Lusail School 221423 - 2

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Refer to approved manufacturers list

2.2 BACKWATER VALVES

A. Horizontal, Cast-Iron Backwater Valves

2.3 AREA DRAINS

A. Cast iron area drains (AD):

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.

2. Pattern: Area drains with inside gasket.
3. Body Material: Gray iron.
4. Seepage Flange: Not required.
5. Anchor Flange: Required.
6. Clamping Device: Not required.
7. Outlet: Bottom.
8. Backwater Valve: Not required.
9. Sediment Bucket: Suspended Bucket.
10. Top or Strainer Material: Gray iron.
11. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Paint coated.
12. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 300 mm square, Medium duty .
13. Top Loading Classification: Medium duty
14. Trap Material: Cast iron.
15. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.

2.4 TRENCH DRAINS

A. Trench drains (TD):

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for trench drains.

2. Material: Ductile or gray iron.
3. Flange: Seepage.
4. Clamping Device: Required.
5. Outlet: Bottom or Side.
6. Grate Material: Ductile iron or gray iron.
7. Grate Finish: Painted.
8. Dimensions of Frame and Grate: 150 mm dia, nickel bronze strainer with dome grate,
combination invertible membrane clap, trap primer connection and sediment bucket.
9. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
10. Trap Material: Cast iron.
11. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.

Newton Lusail School 221423 - 3

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

2.5 ROOF DRAINS

A. Metal roof drain (RD):

1. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M.

2. Pattern: Scupper drain.
3. Body Material: Cast iron.
4. Dimensions of Body: 200 mm x 300 mm oblique scupper drain side outlet.
5. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required.
6. Flow-Control Weirs: When required.
7. Outlet: Side or Angle.
8. Dome Material: Cast iron.
9. Extension Collars: Required.
10. Under deck Clamp: when required.
11. Sump Receiver: Not required.

2.6 CATCH BASIN

A. Cast-in-situ concrete rectangular chamber of size according to dimension as shown on

Drawings.

B. Bituminous coating shall be applied to buried surfaces.

C. Chamber covers and frames shall be heavy duty ductile iron.

D. Steps shall be of dimensions, shape, details and spacing as shown on Drawings.

E. Steps shall be painted with three approved coats of coal tar epoxy coating.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Downspout Boots:

1. Description: Manufactured, ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron casting, with strap or ears
for attaching to building; outlet; and shop-applied bituminous coating.
2. Size: Inlet size to match downspout.
3. Description: ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe.
4. Size: Same as or larger than connected downspout.

B. Conductor Nozzles:

1. Description: Bronze body with threaded inlet and bronze wall flange with mounting
holes.
2. Size: Same as connected conductor.

Newton Lusail School 221423 - 4

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

2.8 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Copper Sheet:

1. ASTM B 152/B 152M, 3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm thickness.

B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet:

1. ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 1.01-mmminimum
thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275) hot-dip galvanized, mill-
phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

C. Elastic Membrane Sheet:

1. ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 1.01-mm minimum thickness.

D. Fasteners:

1. Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

E. Metal Accessories:

1. Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for
installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

F. Bituminous Coating:

1. SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to DN 100. Use DN 100 for larger drainage piping
unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 15 m for piping DN 100 and smaller and 30 m for
larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

D. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush
with finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.

Newton Lusail School 221423 - 5

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

E. Install through-penetration fire stop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor
penetrations.

F. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's
written installation instructions.

1. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so that there will be no leakage between
drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where pene-
trated.
2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.

G. Install sleeve-flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with
waterproof membrane.

H. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy
access and maintenance.

I. Install manufactured, gray-iron downspout boots at grade with top 250 mm above grade.
Secure to building wall.

J. Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade.

K. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal
protruding pipe fittings.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 30-kg/sq. m, 2.4-mm thickness or thicker.
Solder joints of lead sheets 20-kg/sq. m, 1.6-mm thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors
and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 250 mm, and
skirt or flange extending at least 200 mm around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 200 mm around
sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 200
mm around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

Newton Lusail School 221423 - 6

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris
and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops..

END OF SECTION 221423

Newton Lusail School 221423 - 7

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223200 – DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT SYSTEM

SECTION 223200- DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT SYSTEM

Newton Lusail School 223220 - 1

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223200 – DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT SYSTEM

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions.

B. Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for plumbing piping strainers

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:
1. Multimedia sand filters.
2. Water softener

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: multimedia sand filters shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means that "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit
will be fully operational after the seismic event.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for filters and separators.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and

furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For water filtration equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For multimedia sand filters and/or any other used filters /
separators, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test
of assembled components or on calculation.

Newton Lusail School 223220 - 2

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223200 – DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT SYSTEM

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and

locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.

B. Certificates of Shop Inspections and Data Reports: For products required to have ASME
label, signed by product manufacturer.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Source quality-control reports.

E. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water filtration equipment to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Equipment supplied shall have local agents certified by the manufacturer to check, test,
adjust and commission the equipment.

B. Product data, certified pump performance characteristics with selection plotted, data on
equipment dimensions, service connections, operating weight and installation drawings and
instructions shall be submitted under provisions of the general conditions of Contract.

C. Manufacturer's / independent laboratory's test certificates confirming that the equipment

construction and performance meet or exceed the specified requirements, shall be submitted,
if required by the Engineer.

D. Packaged pump sets shall be assembled and tested at the manufacturers or licensee's own
premises. Furnish copy of manufacturing license along with material submittal, where
appropriate.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of water filtration equipment through one source from
a single manufacturer.

F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.

G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

Newton Lusail School 223220 - 3

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223200 – DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT SYSTEM

H. Comply with NSF 61 Annex, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for all
components that will be in contact with potable water.

I. The requirements and recommendations of the following organizations shall be conformed

to, in respect of equipment:

1. National Sanitation Federation (NSF).

2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
3. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).

J. Equipment shall have labels indicating the following, attached permanently to them:

1. Name of Manufacturer.
2. Model no. and Serial no.
3. Certified Ratings.
4. Maximum Operating Parameters.

1.9 HANDLING

A. Products shall be delivered to site, stored and protected under provisions of the general
conditions of Contract.

B. Weatherproof covering shall be retained on equipment until commissioning.

1.10 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. The contractor shall be responsible for the performance of the plumbing equipment to
achieve the design requirements and the Hotel operator special requirements indicated in the
Operator’s DCD Document as well as M/s Kahramaa requirements for drinking water
quality.

1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Feedwater Analysis:

1. Alkalinity: 60 - 120 (mg/L).

2. Arsenic: 0.01 (mg/L).
3. Calcium: 80 (mg/L).
4. Chlorine: 0.2 – 1.0 (mg/L).
5. Color: < 15 (TCU).
6. Hydrogen-Ion Concentration: 6.5 – 8.5 pH.
7. Hardness: <150 (mg/L).
8. Hydrogen Sulfide: NR (mg/L) not detectable.
9. Iron: 0.3 (mg/L).
10. Lead: 0.01 (mg/L).
11. Magnesium: 30 (mg/L).
12. Manganese: 0.05 (mg/L).
13. Potassium: 4 (mg/L).
14. Sodium: 80 (mg/L).
15. Total Dissolved Solids: 110 - 250 (mg/L).
16. Turbidity: <4 (NTU).

Newton Lusail School 223220 - 4

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223200 – DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT SYSTEM

17-Feed water analysis

B. Feedwater Properties:

1. Inlet Water Pressure: As per site condition.

2. Water Temperature: 45 deg C

1.12 DOMESTIC WATER QUALITY

A. Domestic water quality for treated raw water (domestic water) shall comply with the local
authorities requirements M/s Kahramaa.

B. All the quality of drinking water and / or water utilized for cooking purpose shall be comply
with M/s Kahramaa as well as WHO standard and EU guidelines. Refer to Kahramaa
Drinking Water Quality Requirement 2014 edition.

C. The water supply as distributed within the hotel to have the following characteristics:

1. Maximum hardness of 50ppmCaC03 with a minimum pH of 6.9.

2. Have chlorine residual of 0.1 mg/1.
3. Be chemically neutral (neither corrosive nor scaling) for both hot and Coldwater
systems as computed by the Langlier Stability Index.

D. Water Softening Systems

1. Laundry water and ware-washing equipment is to be softened to maintain 1to 3 grains
hardness. The water supply source exceeds 7 grains hardness.
2. For Laundry equipment, Kitchen dish and glass washers, boiler feed and ice-cube
machines the stability of zero hardness is required.

1.13 SPARE PARTS & MAINTENANCE

A. Provide complete spare parts and maintenance equipment for two (2) years maintenance of
all the plumbing equipment. Spare parts in a location designated by the Engineer or the
Employer.

B. All spare parts and maintenance equipment shall be brand new, same as being installed,
provided in original packing, clearly identified and labeled. Provide complete schedules of
spare parts and maintenance equipment clearly cross-referenced with the “Record Drawings”
and maintenance instructions and manuals.

C. All spare parts and maintenance equipment shall be as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer and shall be subject to the final approval of the Engineer.

D. Spare parts and maintenance equipment provided shall, as a minimum, equal the items used
during the two (2) years maintenance period. The Contractor shall carefully log all spare
parts utilized during maintenance period.

E. Provide spare parts and maintenance equipment for all pumps, control panel etc. requiring
maintenance and replacement.

Newton Lusail School 223220 - 5

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223200 – DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT SYSTEM

F. Provide two new complete sets of tools for the proper operation, routine maintenance and
adjustment of all components and equipment.

1.14 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturers shall provide their standard warranty for products furnished under this
Section.

1.15 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Refer to approved manufacturers list.

2.2 CENTRAL MULTIMEDIA FILTERS

A. Type: permanent media, pressure.

B. Function: Turbidity removal 10 microns filtration fineness in once through application.

C. Construction: ASME rated glass reinforced plastic shell with dished end, welded inlet and
outlet pipes with flanged ends, steel / ABS distribution and collection pipes and laterals,
access manhole with synthetic gasket and external locking bar, integral jack supports and
lifting lugs.

D. Protective coatings: Food grade epoxy internally and rust inhibiting primer and one coat of
enamel externally.

E. Face piping: Welded steel / ABS.

F. Valves: Hydraulically operated diaphragm type, steel body with flanged ends.

G. Controls: Electrically operated (240 v / 1 ph / 50 Hz) semi automatic controller (mounted on

the filter body) to perform back wash, rinse and put the filter to service; one initiated
manually.

H. Accessories: Air bleed valve, pressure gauge manifold, automatic control.

I. Working Pressure: Air Bleed valve, 862 Kpa minimum.

2.3 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTERFACE

A. Provide auxiliary contacts in system control panel for the required and necessary interfaces

Newton Lusail School 223220 - 6

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223200 – DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT SYSTEM

to building automation system as per the approved I/O points and / or related BMS drawings.

B. All activities as per I/O points shall be monitored on Dynamic colour graphics and graphic
control as prescribed in related Division. Submit Graphics for the Engineer’s approval.

2.4 WATER SOFTENER

A. Description: Factory-assembled, pressure-type water softener.

1. Standard: Comply with NSF 61 Annex, "Drinking Water System Components -

Health Effects."
2.

B. Standard: Comply with NSF 61 Annex, "Drinking Water System Components - Health
Effects

C. Function : Removal of hardness ions from water

D. Media : Zeolite

E. Softener tank material :

1. Composite vessel of PE inner shell, with epoxy coating and reinforced with fiber
glass.
2. Non metallic, rust proof tank, made of NSF/FDA approved material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of filters.

3.2 SELECTION

A. Pump motors shall be selected for the maximum loading of the selected impeller.

B. Pumps shall be selected with the operating points within 20 % on either side of the
maximum efficiency point.

C. The maximum and minimum impeller sizes shall not be selected for unit pumps, as far as
possible.

D. Coded colors shall be used for finishing equipment of different services.

3.3 COORDINATION

A. The size of doorways and other accesses to technical areas shall be coordinated to ensure that
these are amply sized to allow for the movement of equipment.

Newton Lusail School 223220 - 7

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223200 – DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT SYSTEM

B. Hooks, rails or other provisions shall be provided to allow for hoisting or movement of
equipment in technical areas.

C. Data on heat loss to surroundings from equipments located in air conditioned areas shall be
furnished to the HVAC trade.

D. Data on the required power supplies shall be furnished to the Electrical trade.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Standard clearances shall be provided around equipment for operation, maintenance and
ventilation.

B. Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be complied with in all respects.

C. Lifting devices shall be attached to equipment only at designated points. The equipment shall
not be dropped or subjected to any kind of shock.

D. The services of manufacturer's specialist representative shall be provided for commissioning

of equipment.

E. Softener to be a duplex, completely automatic and consisting of the following components:

a. Softening tank(s)
b. Brine tank, saturation type, complete with measuring indica1or, overflow,
strainer, brine drain-off and supporting gravel.
c. Hard water by-pass proportional controller, flow controls for backwash and
reuse, and an au1omatic reset water meter for controlling the regeneration
cycle.
d. Water testing kit.
e. Total by-pass line for maintenance and servicing.

3.5 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING

A. Equipment Mounting: Install filters and softener on concrete bases. Comply with
requirements for concrete bases specification.

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 450-mm centers around full perimeter of concrete
base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through
concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

Newton Lusail School 223220 - 8

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223200 – DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT SYSTEM

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Make piping connections between water filtration equipment and dissimilar-metal water
piping with dielectric fittings. Comply with requirements for dielectric fittings specified in
Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

1. Install shutoff valves on feed water-inlet and outlet piping of any water filtration
equipment and on inlet and outlet headers Comply with requirements specified in
Section 221119 – "DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES".

D. Install pressure gages on feed water-inlet and filtrate-outlet piping of each water filtration
equipment. Comply with requirements for pressure gages specified in Section 220519
"Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

E. Install valved bypass water piping around any water filtration equipment. Comply with
requirements specified in Section 221119 – "DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
SPECIALTIES".

F. Install drains as indirect wastes to spill into open drains or over floor drains.

3.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Install identifying equipment makers and equipment signs on booster pumps. Labeling and
identification materials are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment."

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections,
and to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper unit operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.

D. Domestic water filtration equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

Newton Lusail School 223220 - 9

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223200 – DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT SYSTEM

3.9 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service for

multimedia sand filters.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Sample filter filtrate after startup and at three consecutive seven-day intervals (total of four
samples), and prepare certified test reports for required water performance characteristics.

3.10 PERFORMANCE AND FUNCTIONALITY TESTS

A. Prior startup the system, Method of statement of testing and commissioning of the system
shall be submitted for the Engineer’s approval. All testing records shall be noted on the
Manufacturer’s standard forms

B. Check the installation of Equipment, pipe lines and valves are approved by the Engineer
prior start-up.

C. Check the pipe lines are tested and approved by the Engineer prior start-up.

D. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the system Equipment

performance and functionality testing

E. The domestic water filtration system shall be subject to testing and commissioning as per
manufacturer recommendations, local Authorities regulations and consultant / Hotel
Operator requirements

F. All testing shall be witnessed and approved by the Engineer.

3.11 WATER SAMPLE ANALYSIS REPORT

A. Water samples shall draw on site prior and post filtration system and sent for third party
laboratory for analysis in order to verify the proper performance of the filtration system.

B. Third party Laboratory chemical analysis and bacterial reports shall be analyzed based on
M/s Kahramaa drinking water quality requirement 2014 edition as well as WHO standard
and EU guidelines.

C. After satisfaction of the performance testing for the filtration system, Water sample shall be
drawn on site by the specialist contractor / supplier and witnessed by the Engineer. Analysis
reports shall submitted for the Engineer’s perusal and approval.

3.12 HANDOVER TO THE HOTEL OPERATOR

A. Refer to Division 22, section “PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS – HANDOVER TO

THE OPERATOR” and to comply.

3.13 SYSTEM OPERATION AFTER APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER:

Newton Lusail School 223220 - 10

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223200 – DOMESTIC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT SYSTEM

A. The Contractor and / or the specialist contractor shall keep the system in operation after the
system approved from the Engineer in order to avoid water contamination and algae growth.
Chemical to be injected continuously and the filtration system shall run regularly to
maintaining the water quality as per above said parameters.

B. After testing approval from the Engineer, the whole system shall run as a normal till the
takeover certificate issued by the Engineer. For this period, Chemicals to be provided under
the contractor expenses without additional cost to the client.

3.14 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS

A. Refer to Division 22, section “PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS – SPARE PAERTS

AND TOOLS” and to comply.

3.15 WARRANTIES

A. The Employer shall be furnished with guarantee and warranty certificates, duly registered
with the manufacturer.

B. All Filtration overall system of domestic water installed in this project shall have a minimum
warranty of five years of normal performing operation commenced from the takeover
Certificate issued by the Engineer and / or as per the contract as well as per standard
warranty whichever greater

C. During the warranty period, perform the periodic routine and preventive maintenance as per
the Equipment manufacturer’s requirement to verify its proper operation.

3.16 TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain the grey water treatment system

END OF SECTION 223200

Newton Lusail School 223220 - 11

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

SECTION 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

Newton Lusail School 224713- 1

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REALTED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and Division 1 “General Requirements”, apply to work of these sections.

B. General Provisions for plumbing work. Applies to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment accessories, services and tests necessary to
complete and make read of operation by owner.

B. All piping and equipment for recalculating, filtering, disinfecting and heating water in the
swimming pool.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Detailed shop drawings indicating piping valves, pumps, gauges, flow meters, controls, etc.
Shop drawings shall show at least the following general categories of information:
1. Penetrations through floors, walls, and other structural members;
2. Plinth details.
3. Equipment positions and operating weights;
4. Entry positions, access routes, Maintenance allocated space ,weight of
equipment or components during delivery to site;
5. Services access openings;
6. Location, details of concealed/buried conduits, inserts, and pipes;
7. Temporary openings in floors/walls;
8. Detailed workshop and manufacturing drawings;
9. Equipment schedules;
10. Electrical wiring and control diagram;
11. General layout plans and sections (1:50 scale for plans and 1:20 scale for
sections);
12. Schematic / P&I (Piping and Instrumentations) diagram;
13. Support and mounting details and schedule;
14. Material/Component specifications;
15. Setting out dimensions and level; and
16. Interfacing BMS & FA (wherever applicable) details and co-ordination with
Engineering, structural and all installation Works.
17. Plant Configuration and Sequence of operation.
18. Bund wall for backwash line discharge.

B. Manufacturers Literature and data sheets for the following:

1. Pumps (include pumps curves)

2. Filters
3. Chemical dosing system

Newton Lusail School 224713- 2

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

4. Supply and return fittings

5. Piping and fittings, valves, pressure gauges, thermometers, solenoid valve,
strainer, side manhole cover, internal and external ladders, visual level
indicator , float switches, etc .
6. Pool Fittings and Accessories and indicated below.
7. Heat Exchanger
8. System Control Panel and Controls

C. Manufacturer’s installations instructions.

D. When written instruction on items requiring maintenance and recommended spare parts list.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of equipment of the types and
capacities required, whose product have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than five years. Provide products produced by a manufacturer listed as an accepted
manufacturer in this section.

B. Standard: Compliance with requirements is applicable, local codes, NEC, UL, NEMA,
IBEEE and ANSI standards pertaining to products. Provide products and components which
have been listed and labeled.

1.5 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. During the course of the Contract, the Contractor shall keep progressive record
drawings of all installation works.

B. As-built drawings shall be submitted prior to the issue of Taking over

Certificate by the Engineer.

C. As-fitted schematic system diagrams, properly framed, shall also be provided

and mounted on the wall inside each plant room.

D. The As-Built Drawings shall be stamped and signed by specialist contractor /

supplier (wherever applicable) prior to submit for the Engineer’s review and
approval.

E. The As-Built drawings must be checked and verified by the Contractor prior
submission to the Engineer for final Confirmation and Approval.

F. Prior to close any of false ceilings, the Partial As-built drawing for the
Particular area should be arranged by the Contractor and accepted by the
Engineer.

G. The Contractor shall submit three /3 set of Hard copies (prints) and One/1
AutoCad copy on CD for each As-Built drawings submitted for the Engineer’s
review and approval.

H. No final payment shall be made until the As-built drawings are completed in all
respects and approved by the Engineer.

Newton Lusail School 224713- 3

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

I. Indicate the following on the lower right hand corner of each As-Built
drawings:

i - The submittal identification number;

ii - Title of the sheet or brochure;

iii- Name and location of the project;

iv- Names of the Project Manager, Architect, Consultant, Contractor,

subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier and vendor;

v- The date of the submittal and the date of each correction.

vi- Version and Revision.

vii- Number all pages and drawings in product data Brochures consecutively
from beginning to end.

1.6 SUBMITTALS AND REVIEWS

A. Submit co-ordinated installation drawings, manufacturer’s shop drawings, and

product data sheets, materials with physical samples and test reports as
specified.

1. Following notice to proceed by the Project Manager, include the following

on the construction schedule to ensure submittals are provided in a timely
manner.

2. Within one month after notice to proceed by the Project Manager, submit a
complete typed list of all equipment manufacturers and material suppliers for
the equipment proposed for this project, as well as names of all subcontractors.

3. Within one month after notice to proceed by the Project Manager, prepare an
index of all submittals for the project. Include a submittal identification number,
a cross-reference to the Specification sections or Drawing number, and an item
description. Prefix the submittal identification number by the Specification
sections to which they apply. Indicate on each submittal, the submittal
identification number in addition to the other data specified.

4. After the Contract is awarded, obtain complete shop drawings, product data
and samples from the manufacturers, supplier’s vendors, and all subcontractors,
for all materials and equipment as specified. Submit data and details of such
materials and equipment for review. Prior to submission, certify that the shop
drawings, product data and samples are in compliance with the Contract
Documents. Check all materials and equipment upon their arrival on the job site
and verify their compliance with the Contract Documents. Modify any work,
which proceeds prior to receiving accepted shop drawings as required to
comply with the Contract Documents and the shop drawings.

5. A minimum period of Fifteen /15 days from the date of receiving the
submittal and / or as per the Contract documents, exclusive of transmittal time,

Newton Lusail School 224713- 4

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

will be required in the Consultant’s office each time a shop drawing, product
data and/or samples are submitted for review. A minimum of Twenty one /21
days from the date of receiving the submittal and / or as per the contract
documents required for review the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

6. Submit three prints / hard copies (prints) and one AutoCad on CD of all
drawings. Submit three copies of manufacturer’s product submittals.

7. The work described in shop drawing submissions shall be carefully checked,

by all trades, for clearances (including those required for maintenance and
servicing), field conditions, maintenance of architectural conditions and co-
ordination with other trades. Each submitted shop drawing shall include a
certification that related job conditions have been checked by the Contractor
and each subcontractor, and that conflicts do not exist.

B. Review of submittals is for general compliance with the design concept and
Contract Documents. Comments or absence of comments shall not relieve the
Contractor from compliance with the Contract Documentations. The Contractor
remains solely responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming and for co-
ordinating the work with that of other trades. The Contractor is not relieved of
the responsibility for dimensions or errors that may be contained on
submissions, or for deviations from the requirements of the Contract
Documentations.

C. Submittals to be stamped and signed by the Consultant as follows:

Status Stamp Interpretation

A Approved Fabrication, manufacture, or construction may

proceed, the submittal complies with Contract
Documents.

B Approved Except Fabrication, manufacture, or construction may

as Noted proceed after providing submittal complies with
the contract documents and the consultant’s
comments are complied with.
The submittal does not comply with the Con-
C Revise and tract Documents; do not proceed with fabrica-
Resubmit tion, manufacture, or construction. The work,
material and shop drawings are not permitted at
the job site. Resubmit appropriate material and /
or shop drawings.
The submittal does not comply with the Con-
D Rejected tract Documents; do not proceed with fabrica-
tion, manufacture, or construction. The work,
material and shop drawings are substandard ,
not as per the specified and / or approved ven-
dor list and have various delivery and function
problems in the previous projects and not per-
mitted at the job site. Don’t Resubmit the mate-
rial and / or shop drawings.

Newton Lusail School 224713- 5

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

D. Submittals shall be provided in the following format:

1. Identify each sheet or printed submittal pages (using arrows, underlining or

circling) to show applicable sizes, types, model numbers, ratings, capacities and
options actually being proposed. Cross out non-applicable information. Note all
options specified or provided.

2. Submit materials and equipment by specification section number,

manufacturer, trade name, and model number. Include copies of applicable
brochure or catalogue material.

3. Include dimensional data for roughing in and installation and technical data
sufficient to verify that equipment meets the requirements of the Contract
Documents. Include wiring, piping and service connection data.

4. Inadequate or incomplete shop drawings, product data, and/or samples will

not be reviewed and will be returned to the Contractor for resubmittal.

5. Unless the above information is included, the submittal will be returned for
re-submission. Re-submittals of product data or brochures shall include a cover
letter summarizing the corrections made in response to the review comments.

E. Maintain a complete set of reviewed and stamped shop drawings and product
data on site.

F. For Material and Equipment submittals, the Contractor shall provide full
compliance statement to the Specifications. Full Comparison between the
proposed and specified itemes in case of the material deviates from the
specified. At any Case, the propsed item/(s) shall be higher quality and / or
equal to the specified item/(s).

G. Refer also to below Section “SUBMISSION” and to comply.

H. Indicate the following on the lower right hand corner of each shop drawing and
on the front cover of each product data brochure cover:

i - The submittal identification number;

ii - Title of the sheet or brochure;

iii- Name and location of the project;

iv- Names of the Project Manager, Architect, Consultant, Contractor,

subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier and vendor;

v- The date of the submittal and the date of each correction.

vi- Version and Revision.

vii- Number all pages and drawings in product data Brochures consecutively
from beginning to end.

Newton Lusail School 224713- 6

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL

A. Refer to Division 22” PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS - OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL” and to comply.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Refer to approved manufacturers list.

2.2 FILTERS

A. Type

1. High flow rate, sand filter, pressure type, designed for specified filtration
rate and operating pressure and hydrostatically tested at factory to specified
test pressure. Quality of filtrate to be guaranteed to be in the 2 micron range.

2. Cylindrical, vertical type with diameter under Design Premise to allow a

deep media structure. Filter heads to be dished to radius equal to diameter of
shell.

B. Operation

1. Filters to be designed with efficient influent and under drain systems to

ensure uniform water flow through filtering and backwash operations and to
prevent migration, mounding or channeling of filter bed. Minimum
freeboard of 300 mm to be provided between top of filter bed and influent
water distribution system. Influent and under drain systems to be corrosion
resistant materials.

C. Filter shell and heads

1. High grade tank steel welded internally and externally and of adequate
thickness for specified operating and test pressure.

D. Face piping and valves

1. To be provided and arranged for parallel operation of filtering, backwash

and rinse. Face piping to be flanged, pressure PVC or pipes. Valves to be
either flanged PVC gate valves. Valves to be same size as face piping.

E. Aaccessories

Newton Lusail School 224713- 7

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

1. Filters to be complete with the following accessories and appurtenances

whether indicated in the drawings and BOQ or not:

a. Standard size manhole on top dished head with boiler type cover.
b. Four jack type supports individually adjustable for filter level adjustment and of
adequate strength to carry filter and contents.
c. Automatic air release valve on top dished head.
d. Gauge panel of cast bronze with two 100 mm minimum diameter dial pressure
gauges connected with copper tubes to filter inlet and outlet connections.
e. Filter drain valve.
f. Substantial lifting lugs.

F. Paint
1. Supply filters painted inside and outside with two coats of chemical resistant
epoxy paint.

G. Filter media

1. To be as recommended and as provided by filter manufacturer specifically

for the filters. Components to be shipped separately in clearly marked bags.

H. Filter media

1. Provide clear instructions for field application of filter media in filters.

I. Filter media
1. To be graded rock and gravel to fine sand from bottom up, in layers of
thickness to manufacturer's recommendations.

J. Rock and gravel

1. Clean, hard, round stones with average specific gravity of not less than 2.5,
free from shale, mica, clay, sandstone, sand, loam or other impurities.
Gravel is not to have more than 2% by weight of thin, flat or elongated
pieces.

K. Sand

1. Hard, durable grains of round or sub angular silica sand, free from clay, loam,
dirt and organic matter. Not more than 1% to be flat particles. Sand is to
meet screen requirements given in the following table and have effective size
of 0.35 to 0.45 mm and uniformity coefficient of 1.45 to 1.69.

Sand Screen Requirements

Sieve No. % Retained on % Passing Through
U.S. Tyler Successive Screens Successive Screens
16 14 0-6 94 - 100
20 20 3 - 23 71 - 97
30 28 24 - 40 31 - 73
40 36 43 - 25 6 - 25
50 43 22 - 6 0-3

Newton Lusail School 224713- 8

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

2.3 POOL FITTINGS

A. Generally

1. Pool fittings to be ABS,

B. Inlet fittings

1. Underground type with outer face fixable in any position for regulating flow
of water into pool, with 50 mm IPS female threaded connection.

C. No-leak flanges

1. Pipe spool with center flange and gussets, with 50 mm IPS female threaded
pipe connections at both ends and fitted to inlet fittings within concrete wall
of pool.

D. Gutter drains

1. 90 degree angle type, 140 mm long x 50 mm wide on both faces, with 50

mm IPS female threaded pipe connection at 45 degree angle and removable
angle grate 6 mm slotted opening in horizontal and vertical faces secured to
drain body with four nickel plated bronze screws.

E. Main drains

1. Square grate and frame anti vortex type to cover sumps. Grate is to fit frame
closely and be flush at surface.

F. Wanchors

1. For securing ladders and are to be embedded, flush type, with integral
anchor flange and webs, cast bronze inwardly tapering body with removable
bronze locking wedge and stainless steel draw bolt and washer and suitable
for use with 48 mm OD tube or 40 mm IPS pipe.

G. Escutcheons

1. Used with each wedge anchor are to be specifically designed for use with
wedge anchor. They are to be cast bronze with polished chrome finish and
fitted with locking screws.

H. Underwater lights

1. Cooper and brass appear shall be the selected material for light body and
niche, and silicon bronze for the light rings.

2.4 POOL SIDE ACCESSORIES

A. Ladders

Newton Lusail School 224713- 9

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

1. 48 mm OD corrosion resistant stainless steel tube, polished to give a brilliant

finish, complete with anti-skid steps, chlorine resisting white rubber buffers,
stainless steel escutcheons and rounded, corrosion resistant metal fixing
screws.

B. Pool cleaning equipment

1. Supply equipment loose and hand to the Employer in original containers

after tested and proved as working satisfactorily.

C. Vacuum cleaner

1. Hard ware plastic cleaning bush 50 m working width, curved head and
adjustable wheels, suitable for use with 50 mm vacuum hose and with 15 m
of 50 mm white, corrugated, floating, flexible plastic hose with formed
polyethylene ends and 4.8 m long x 32 mm diameter anodized aluminum
telescopic handle complete with bolts and wing nuts.
2. Hose to wall fitting to connect vacuum hose to vacuum fitting is to be solid
aluminum with 25 mm IPS male thread one end and 25 mm hose sleeve
other end.
3. Telescopic handles to be anodized aluminum consisting of two concentric
tube sections that can telescope from 2.4 m to 4.8 m, with positive locking
device. They are to be 32 mm diameter and fluted for added strength. Inner
tube to be 29 mm diameter drilled for two 6 mm mounting bolts at 76 mm
centers and with bolts and wing nuts.

D. Algae brushes

1. 150 mm long x 76 mm wide, consisting of two dense rows of 25 mm long

stainless steel wire bristles permanently set in strong synthetic molded back.
Rear bristles to be at right angles to back and front bristles inclined forward.
Die-cast aluminum handle holder with two punched holes is to be securely
attached to back.

E. Wall brushes

1. 450 mm long with curved ends, consisting of four dense rows of 29 mm long
nylon bristles permanently set in strong molded synthetic back reinforced
with extruded aluminum section. Die-cast aluminum handle holder with two
punched holes is to be securely attached to back.

F. Leafe rake

1. Synthetic fiber mesh screen set in plastic covered aluminum frame with
aluminum tube handle attachment and 25 mm OD anodized aluminum fluted
handle.

2.5 SURGE / BALNACING CONCRETE TANK

A. Refer to related Structural / Architectural specification

Newton Lusail School 224713- 10

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

2.6 SUNDRIES

A. Strainers

1. On pump suctions to be straight, in-line, flanged type, designed for

swimming pools, with cast iron body and stainless steel basket, suitable for
working pressure of 2 kg/cm2 (30 psig) and with quick opening cover lid,
positively sealing O-ring, yoke type cover clamp with threaded tightening
bolt and 40 mm IPS drain plug.

B. Backwash sight glass indicators

1. Heavy cast bronze with clear plastic or Pyrex cylinder with bottom 50 mm
male threaded connections for easy removal.

C. Venturi tube

1. Heavy duty, close grain cast iron, with flanged ends, with two 20 mm IPS
tapped holes in side of body for pressure differential connections.

D. Water quality test kit

1. For checking pH, free residual chlorine, Alkalinity and Calcium Hardness of
pool water to be complete with Electronic Pool Tester (Photometer 6 in 1
kit), test tablets, operating instructions and carrying case. At any case time,
the amount shall be within the recommended allowable limits were
mentioned below.
2. The free residual chlorine shall be tested at shallow and deep end at least two
times a day (directly after shock dosing and 3.30PM) till the free residual
chlorine in the pool during shock dosing drops to 1.5 ppm.
3. The pH and free residual chlorine shall be tested at shallow and deep end at
least three times a day (8.30 AM, 12.30PM and 3.30PM) for three days
period normal operation test.
4. Total Alkalinity, cyanuric Acid and Calcium Hardness are to be tested at
shallow and deep end in conjunction with PH and Free residual chlorine at
least Two times for three days period normal operation test.
5. Add the chemical and set the Controller in order to achieve the mentioned
below allowable and recommended limits.

2.7 PUMPS

A. Motors: Supply pumps complete with electric motors. Horizontal base mounted pumps to
have motor mounted on common cast iron or steel base properly aligned at factory.

B. Shaft packing or mechanical seal: to be compatible with pump design and nature of liquid
pumped, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Impellers and rotating assemblies: to be statically and dynamically balanced at factory.

D. Plugged connections:to be provided for casing vent, drain and suction and discharge pressure
gauges.

Newton Lusail School 224713- 11

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

E. Operating point of flow and head: is to fall near point of maximum efficiency obtained from
manufacturer's published data. Do not select pumps to operate near the end of their curve.

F. Horsepower rating of electric motor: is to ensure non- overloading throughout capacity range
of pump.

G. Electric motors: to be supplied for available current. Speed is not to exceed 1450 rpm unless
otherwise specified.

H. SUBMISSIONS

1. submit the following for approval for each pump prior to shipment:
a. certified performance curves showing job number, customer, customer order
number, pump designation number shown on the Drawings, date of manufac-
ture, model number, pump size, impeller diameter, impeller type, maximum im-
peller diameter pump can accommodate, rpm, flow- head characteristic curve,
consumed horsepower curve, pump efficiency curve parts numbers and parts
lists.
2. Outline dimensional drawing showing overall dimensions, location of
foundation bolt holes and size, location and rating of suction and discharge
nozzels.
3. Recommended list of spare parts.
4. Installation, operation and maintenance instruction manual.
5. Details and wiring diagrams of pump controllers, starters, controls or other
electrical device or accessories.
6. Special instructions for installation and connection of each electrical device,
control or accessories.
7. Motor data such as make, model number, serial number, horsepower rating,
rpm, voltage, phase, frequency, class of insulation, allowable temperature
rise, full load amperes and locked rotor amperes.
8. Starter data such as make, model number, size, heater sizes, ampere rating,
line voltage, control voltage and frequency.

2.8 CIRCULATING PUMPS

A. Type: Horizontal, base mounted, end suction, single stage, centrifugal type, directly
connected to motor through heavy duty flexible coupling, with heavy gauge coupling guard.

B. Base: Pump and motor to be mounted on common cast iron base reinforced against
deflection, with drip rim, drain tapping, bolt holes and grouting hole.

C. Pump casing: high tensile strength close grain cast iron with smooth waterways, register
fitted and bolted to bearing frame for permanent alignment, with bronze wear rings and
tapped and plugged bottom drain and top vent connections.

D. Impeller: bronze, enclosed type, fitted to shaft with key and locked in place.

E. Shaft: one piece stainless steel, sized to carry axial and radial thrust with minimum
deflection.

F. Mechanical seal: Ni-resist face, carbon washer and stainless steel metal parts.

Newton Lusail School 224713- 12

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

G. Bearings: Pump rotating element to be supported by two heavy duty grease lubricated ball
bearings mounted in heavy iron frame with supports to base for maximum rigidity.

H. Electric motor: totally enclosed, squirrel cage, induction type with permanently lubricated
and sealed ball bearings.

2.9 UV DISINFECTION

A. The UV treatment unit shall have the following futures:

1. Type: Medium pressure UV irradiant Unit
2. Maximum treatment Capacity: 1.5 times the filtration flow.
3. Wiper System: Automatic.
4. Power: 3.5 kw, 3 phase.
5. Connections: As indicated in the drawings for pipe size, PN-16.
6. The Equipment comprises: SS chamber with quartz thimble and arc tube,
‘Photon’ Control with UV intensity monitor and Alarm, Stainless steel inlet
and outlet pipe bends.

B. The UV treatment unit shall have the bypass line to enable isolation for the recirculation line
and permit essential maintenance without shutting down the system.

C. Pipe Line Strainer for UV treatment unit:

1. Type: In line conical top hat strainer.
2. Material: Stainless Steel.
3. Size: As indicated in the drawings, PN-16.
4. Mesh Size: 20 mesh (0.9mm).

2.10 PRESSURE uPVC PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Flanges: to be of same pressure rating, facing, drilling and thickness as mating flanges on
valves, accessories and equipment.

B. Gaskets: for flat face flanges to be full face ring type with punched holes.

C. Pressures PVC pipe: to be sch 40 and comply with ASTM D1785, and shall withstand a
minimum continuous 30º c water flow rate.

D. Pressure PVC fittings: integral parallel sockets with solvent welded joints for pipes up to 65
mm, and couplers with rubber sealing rings for pipes 82 mm and larger.

E. Sealing rings on PVC pipes to provide for expansion and contraction to be rubber to BS 2494
Part 2.

F. Storage: handle pipes with care. Store in the shade. Support along entire length on level
ground free from loose stones. Do not stack more than three layers high. Place sockets at
alternate ends of stack and protruding beyond pipes. Stake stacks to prevent movement. For
long term storage provide pipe racks with continuous supports. Comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for storage.

G. Pipes and fittings: to have cleanly cut square ends. Pipes to be reasonably straight.

Newton Lusail School 224713- 13

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

H. Joints: make rubber ring joints or welded solvent joints in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Use solvent made and supplied by manufacturer.

I. Underground pipes: anchor at changes in direction and at valves and stop ends.

J. Underground pipes excavation: trench is not to be open too far in advance of pipe laying and
then backfilled as soon as possible.

K. Underground pipe bedding: use free draining sand, gravel, loam or soil. Compact fill firmly
between side of pipe and trench. Bedding to be thoroughly compacted in layers not
exceeding 150 mm to give uniform bed. Lay pipes directly on bedding. Do not use brick or
hard material under pipe. Further bedding material to be placed around pipe and thoroughly
compacted in 75 mm layers by careful tamping.

L. Underground pipes: backfill trench above pipe in layers 300mm thick each layer well
rammed.

M. Underground pipes: comply with manufacturer's recommendations for laying underground

pipe.

2.11 SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL

A. Wall and / or floor mounted manufactured system control panel, RAL 7032 powder coated,
IP 55 ingress protection, incorporating the required and necessary switches, transformer
contactors, indication lamps, adjustable thermal overloads, circuit breakers, controllers, etc .

2.12 HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. Frame-and-Plate Heat Exchangers:

1. Description: Assembly of nonfixed-position, heat-exchanger plates, with frame, for

using heating hot water to heat swimming pool water.
2. Working-Pressure Rating: 1600 kPa minimum.
3. Frame:

a. Carrying and Guide Bars: Stainless steel.

b. Fixed, Frame Plate; Pressure Plate; Support Column; and Nuts and Bolts:
Carbon steel.

4. Channel Plates:

a. Type: Single wall.

b. Material: ASTM A 666, Type 316 stainless steel.
c. Gasket Material: Butyl or acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber, suitable for potable
water.

5. Connections: Stainless steel suitable for potable water.

a. DN 50 and Smaller: Threaded.

b. DN 65 and Larger: Flanged.

Newton Lusail School 224713- 14

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

6. Protective Shroud: Steel, covering channel plates.

7. Insulation: Complying with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, unless otherwise indicated, and
suitable for operating temperature. Surround entire heat exchanger except
connections.
8. Capacity and Characteristics as per drawings.

2.13 DOSING CONTROL AND ANALYZING SYSTEM

A. Dosing Pump:
1. Calcium Hypochlorite (disinfectant), Sodium Bisulphate (PH Regulator):
Diaphragm type, continues interlocks with filtration pump /(s), synchronous
motor driven, 12 LPH, power 20 watt max, 100:1 turndown, completed with
foot valve, multifunction valve, 6/9mm dosing tubing with suction filter,
control cable, and wall bracket
2. PAC / Aluminum Bisulphate Coagulant / Flocculent: 28mm Diaphragm
type, stepper motor driven, side fitted control panel with function valve and
wall bracket, 1.8 LPH, 1000:1 turndown, manual control , continues
interlocks with filtration pump /(s), PE 4/6mm suction discharge and venting
dosing tubing with suction filter , power 20 watt max., control cable, and
wall bracket

B. Injector:
1. Calcium Hypochlorite (disinfectant) and Sodium Bisulphate (PH Regulator):
Withdrwal solution lance with isolating ball valve, Lacing ending flapper
valve, pipe mounting R ¾” (BSPT male), NRV ½” BSP m inj / NRV, feed
connection 6/9 mm od tubing, injector saddle DN 150 bronze pipe saddle
tapped Rc ½”.
2. PAC / Aluminum Bisulphate Coagulant / Flocculent: R ½” injection pipe
with spring loaded NRV for 4/6 mm tubing, injector saddle DN 150 bronze
pipe saddle tapped Rc ½”

C. Dosing Controller and Analyzer

1. A combined PH and Chlorine dosing controller and analyzing unit for
continuous measuring , monitoring and controlling of the pool chlorine and
PH values in the pool shall be provided with the following:
a. Unit shall incorporate transparent flow cell with multi-sensor for temperature
measuring , flow rate monitoring, sample water earthing and for accommodation of up
to three sensors Cl2, PH and Redox (optional) electrodes and pressurized.
b.Measuring cells:
i- CL: 0 -10 mg/liter, amperometric Pt – Cu electrode with mechanical cleaning.
ii- PH: 4 -9
iii- Temp.: 0-50 degree centigrade.
iv- sample flow: 30 liter/hrs. directed to waste.
c. Interfaces:
i- RS 485 for connection to visualization software.
ii- RS 232 for direct connection of protocol printer.

D. Dosing Drums / tanks along with Bund wall and Agitator

Newton Lusail School 224713- 15

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

1. Calcium Hypochlorite (disinfectant), Sodium Bisulphate (PH Regulator) and

PAC Coagulant / Flocculent:
a. Dosing tank : MDPE natural colour Split level top with screw cap, 200 liters
capacity, complete with Level indicator, tablet basket, bund tank and motorized stirrer.
b. Bund wall: Concrete as specified in structural specification, 220 liter capacity with
400 mm height.
c. Agitator / Stirrer: Motorized propeller type agitator suitable for 200 liter tank
capacity, Viton sheathed stainless steel shaft and propeller, with motor 110 w, single
phase.

2.14 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTERFACE

A. Provide auxiliary contacts in swimming pool water system control panel for interface to
building automation system. Include the necessary and required interfacing recommended
by the manufacture’s supplier, the Engineer and / or the Hotel Operator :

1. On-off status of each pump.

2. Normal – Fault status of each pump.
3. Surge tank’s Low level alarm of each pump.
4. Surge tank’s High level alarm of each pump.
5. Other interfaces as per I/O points and / or related BMS drawings.

B. All activities as per I/O points shall be monitored on Dynamic colour graphics and graphic
control as prescribed in related Division. Submit Graphics for Engineer’s approval.

PART 4 EXECUTION

4.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install piping, fittings and jointing as indicated in accordance with manufacturer’s written
instructions, applicable codes and regulations and in accordance with recognized industry
particles to ensure that installation complies with the requirements and serves intended
function.

B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of piping, fittings and jointing with other
work.

C. Do not run piping through electric rooms, electric spaces, electric closets and other electrical
or electronic equipment spaces.

D. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping system of super flow materials and prepare for
application of specified coatings (if any). Flush out piping system with clean water before
proceeding with required tests. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints,
supports and accessory items.

E. Install equipment so that sufficient clearance is provided to permit adequate serving of the
component.

F. Set equipment of 3” high housekeeping pads.

Newton Lusail School 224713- 16

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

G. Refer to “Execution” of related works.

H. Provide three complete sets of printed instructions for the proper care and operation of the
swimming pool.

4.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prior startup the piping leak test, Method of statement for piping leak testing shall be
submitted for the Engineer’s approval. All testing records shall be noted on the
Manufacturer’s standard forms.

B. All Testing shall offer for the Engineer’s witnessing and approval

C. Check the installation of the valves, piping are approved by the Engineer prior conducted the
test.

D. Provide temporary equipment for testing including pumps and gauges.

E. Test piping system before insulation is installed wherever feasible and removes control
devices before testing.

F. Test each natural section of each piping system independently but do not use piping system
valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valves pressure rating. Fill each section
with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time as follows:
1. Test period: 2 hours
2. Pressure: For long run of schedule 40 pipe, 150 psi, except where fittings are
lower class or pressure rating; for each piping system, 150% of operating
pressure indicated but not less than 25 psi test pressure.

G. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or
if pressure drop exceed 5% of test pressure.

H. Repair or replace piping system section which fail required piping test. Do not use chemical,
stop-length compounds, mastics or other temporary repair methods.

I. All pool re-circulating, return and supply piping shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure of
100 psi, vacuum piping tested at 50 psi which pressure shall be maintained without pumping
for a period of four (4) hours.

J. All gravity drainage piping, shall be tested under hydrostatic pressure corresponding to a
head of at least ten (10) feet of water above the highest point of the piping tested. Test
pressure shall be maintained without loss for a period of (4) hours.

K. All equipment to be recommended by the manufacturer.

4.3 START-UP SERVICE

A. As prescribed below in “START-UP, PRE-COM., PERFORMANCE AND

FUNCTIONALITY TESTS”.

Newton Lusail School 224713- 17

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

4.4 CALIBRATION OF PH AND CHLORINE CONTROLLER

A. Chlorine Controller:
1. Prior to utilize the dosing system, The Controller shall be calibrated as per
Manufacturer’s recommendations. Chlorine level amount being shown on
the controller display shall be verified with the same pool water by
photometer test kit. Adjust the value shown on the controller display based
from the reading being shown on the Photometer display accordingly

B. PH Controller:
1. Prior to utilize the dosing system, The Controller shall be calibrated as per
Manufacturer’s recommendations. Probe to be immersed with PH -7 and
PH-9 standard buffer solution to compare with the value being displayed on
the controller. Adjust the value shown on the controller display base on the
buffer solution concentration accordingly.

4.5 CALIBRATION OF TESTING INSTRUMENTS

A. Contractor Must arrange the necessary and required testing Devices / instruments / tools with
a valid due calibration along with its Calibration Certificate and all of necessary pertinent
documentations during the testing inspection of the system with the Engineer and the
Operator as well.

4.6 WATER SAMPLE STATION

A. The water sample station (water sample collecting discharge, water filter, Union, Isolating
Valves and by pass line) shall be provided in the network inside the plantroom at location as
recommended by the system manufacture for further sample collection purpose.

4.7 COAUGULANT / FLOCCULANTION

A. The system shall have flocculation / coagulant feeding facility in order to solve any further
water clarity problems and / or to avoid draining the entire swimming pool water in case of
sandstorm climate.

4.8 QUALIFIED ENGINEER OR TECHNICIAN

A. From equipment manufacturer is to supervise installation, start-up equipment, make

necessary adjustments, calibrations and tests in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
and instruct and train the Employer's personnel.

4.9 EMBEDDED POOL FITTINGS AND PIPING

A. Install pool fittings and piping embedded under pool and in concrete walls of pool and plant
room during concreting.

Newton Lusail School 224713- 18

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

4.10 CONCERNING

A. member of the setting crew is to be present during concreting to check grade and alignment
of embedded fittings and pipe work and to correct any displacement before concrete has
hardened.

4.11 LAY

A. Embedded fittings and piping to proper elevation, line and grade and support and anchor
during concreting.

4.12 COAT AND PLUG

A. Fittings and piping to prevent damage and ingress of concrete.

4.13 NO-LEAK FLANGES (PUDDLE FLANGES)

A. Provide on pipe connections to inlet and drain fittings within concrete pool wall.

4.14 PIPE CONNECTIONS

A. Through plant room walls to have no-leak flanges fitted centrally in wall.

4.15 EQUIPMENT

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

4.16 STRAINERS

A. Provide on suction of each pump.

4.17 PREESURE GAUGES

A. Install pressure gauge at the following:

i- Suction and discharge of each pump.

a. Suction pressure gauge: 100 mm dial gauge diameter, (- 0.10 to 1.0 bar) range,
stainless steel, Bourdon type, glycerin filled.

b. Discharge pressure gauge: 100 mm dial gauge diameter, (0 to 4.0 bars) range,
stainless steel, Bourdon type, glycerin filled.

ii- Primary and secondary inlet and outlet of each heat exchanger.

a. Primary inlet pressure gauge: 100 mm dial gauge diameter, (0.10 to 4.0 bar) range,
stainless steel, Bourdon type, glycerin.

Newton Lusail School 224713- 19

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

b. Primary outlet pressure gauge: 100 mm dial gauge diameter, (0 to 7.0 bar) range,
stainless steel, Bourdon type, glycerin.

c. Secondary inlet pressure gauge: 100 mm dial gauge diameter, (0 to 4.0 bar) range,
stainless steel, Bourdon type, glycerin.

d. Secondary outlet pressure gauge: 100 mm dial gauge diameter, (0 to 4.0 bar)
range, stainless steel, Bourdon type, glycerin.

4.18 THERMOMETER

A. Install thermometer at the following:

i- Primary and secondary inlet and outlet of each heat exchanger.

a. Primary inlet and outlet Thermometers: 100 mm dial gauge diameter, (0 to

120 deg C, with 1-degree scale division), bimetal with G ½” Stainless Steel
Pocket.

b. Secondary inlet and outlet Thermometers: 100 mm dial gauge diameter,

(Minus 1 to plus 82 deg C, with 1-degree scale division), bimetal with G ½”
Stainless Steel Pocket.

4.19 BUND WALL / CONCRETE UPSTAND FOR FILTER BACKWASH DISCHARGE

A. The Area floor drain for filter backwash line discharge shall have a concrete up-stand / bund
wall to avoid the water floor flood during the backwash. Bund wall size and height shall be
constructed to accommodate the water volume and water velocity during backwash without
floor flooding and / or water splashing on the floor.

B. Water proof recommended type shall be applied to the Bund wall wet surfaces.

4.20 BUND WALL / CONCRETE UPSTAND FOR CHEMICAL DRUMS

A. The chemical drums shall have its own bund wall as prescribed above in “DOSING
CONTROL AND ANALYZING”.

B. Water proof recommended type shall be applied to the Bund wall inner surfaces.

4.21 BACKWASH SIGHT GLASS INDICATORS

A. Install on backwash pipe from each filter to provide visual check of backwash flow.

4.22 LEAK TESTS

A. As indicated above in “FIELD QUALITY CONTOL”.

Newton Lusail School 224713- 20

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

4.23 POOL FLOOD / LEAK TEST

A. Upon the completion of waterproofing of the pool, the pool shall be offered for flood test.

4.24 SHOCK DOSING / SUPER CHLORINATION AND POOL TILES ACID WASHING:

A. Prior to fill the pool with fresh water, the pool shall be clean properly with acid. After
satisfaction of tile cleaning and acceptance by the Engineer, the contractor shall drain and all
of residual waste acid and ensure all tile grouting in a good condition.

B. Upon Completion of filling the pool by fresh water, the shock dosage with minimum
chlorine initial concentration of 9.0 ppm shall be demonstrated and witness by the Engineer.

C. During the shock dosage, the filter multi-port manual valve shall be on recirculation position
and dosing pumps and controller are in off mode.

4.25 WATER QUALITY

A. Make chemical and bacterial analysis in accordance with procedures recommended in the
Standard Methods of the Examination of Water, Sewage and Industrial Wastes of the
American Public Health Association and / or SPATA standards in so far as these methods are
applicable to swimming pool water.

i- After satisfaction of the performance and functionality of pool Equipment and approved
by the Engineer, the water sample shall be drawn on site from the pool water and to
send to third part Laboratory for chemistry and bacteriological / bacterial analysis.
The allowable / permitted limits as follow:

a. pool shall Pool Water chemistry Standard Quality parameters

PARAMETERS PERMITTED RANGE

Free Residual Chlorine 1-2 mg / liter

Bromine 2-4 mg / liter

PH 7.4 – 7.6

Total Alkalinity 70 – 100 ppm

Calcium Hardness 100 – 500 ppm

Saturation Index -0.5 to 0.5

Cyanuric Acid 20 -60 mg / liter

b. Pool Water Microbiological / bacteriological parameters

Newton Lusail School 224713- 21

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

PARAMETERS MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LIMITS

Total Coliforms 0 MPN / 100 mliter

Fecal Coliforms 0 MPN / 100 mliter

Heterotrophic Plate Count 1,000 CFU/mliter

Ps. Aeruginosa 0 CFU/100 mliter

Fecal Streptococci 0 CFU/100 mliter

i- Water sample shall be drawn close to the handover of the project.

ii- Water sample analysis reports comparing against the above said water chemistry and
biological allowable limits shall send to the Engineer for review and approval.

B. Water to be clear: When pool is in use, water is to be sufficiently clear to permit a 150 mm
diameter black disc on a white background placed on bottom of pool to be clearly visible
from side walls of pool at all distances up to 10 m measured from a line drawn across the
disc.

Water to be sterile: When pool is in use not more than 15% of samples of water taken
covering any considerable period are to contain more than 200 bacteria per milliliter or are to
show positive test in any of five 10 ml samples of water. Primary fermentation tubes
showing gas should be confirmed.

4.26 START-UP, PRE-COM., PERFORMANCE AND FUNCTIONALITY TESTS

A. Carry out tests as necessary and as directed to demonstrate that equipment meets design
requirements as noted on the Drawings , in the Specification and in accordance with the
approved Method of Statements.

B. Prior startup the system, Method of statement of testing and commissioning of the system
shall be submitted for the Engineer’s approval. All testing records shall be noted on the
Manufacturer’s standard forms.

C. Manufacturer’s and / or equipment supplies authorized representative shall spend not less
than 5 consecutive days on job site during and after installation to check equipment, plant it
in operation, balance and adjust all equipment, and inform the Engineer and the owner’s
representative in its operation, in addition, the service of the manufacturer’s and/or
equipment suppliers authorized representative shall be provided for two days during the first
year of operation.

D. All Testing shall offer for the Engineer’s witnessing and approval

E. Check the installation of the Equipment, valves, piping and instruments are approved by the
Engineer prior carry-out the start-up.

Newton Lusail School 224713- 22

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

F. All instrument / tools will utilize for testing shall have a valid due calibration and calibration
certificate.

G. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following start-up and

functionality testing for the system as:
1. Perform the tile cleaning acid washing as prescribed above in “SHOCK
DOSING / SUPER CHLORINATION AND POOL TILES ACID
WASHING”.
2. Verify the quality of tile grouting. Re-grout if required.
3. Fill the pool with fresh water and perform the shock dosage as prescribed
above in “SHOCK DOSING / SUPER CHLORINATION AND POOL
TILES ACID WASHING”.
4. Calibrate the Dosing controller prior start-up as prescribed above
“CALIBRATION OF PH AND CHLORINE CONTROLLER”
5. Perform the pre-commissioning, Testing and commissioning approved and /
or recommended testing activities for the pump control panel as well as the
MCC panel, under water lights and under water lights’ transformer.
6. Perform the start-up, performance and functionality testing for the system
Equipment as per the approved Method statement.
7. Perform the approved system sequence of operation and associated scheme
interlocks.
8. Perform the necessary and required safeties, BMS interfaces and related
Graphics.
9. System testing will considered as accepted only when the values being tested
are equal to the design parameters and or within the allowable limits /
tolerances ±10%
10. After satisfaction of the system Equipment water sample shall be drawn on
site and to send for Third party Laboratory for analysis as prescribed below
in ” WATER QUALITY”.
11. All above said procedures shall be witness and approve by the Engineer.

H. Demonstration of Cooling Heat exchanger shall be conducted at peak seasonal summer

months (July and / or August) when the initial water temperature at 40 o C. Capacity of Heat
Exchanger shall be selected to maintain a uniform water surface temperature of 28o C.
Calculation shall be submit for the Engineer’s review and approval.

I. Demonstration of Heating Heat exchanger shall be conducted at minimal seasonal winter

months (December and / or January) when the initial water temperature at 18o C. Capacity of
Heat Exchanger shall be selected to maintain a uniform water surface temperature of 28 o C.
Calculation shall be submit for the Engineer’s review and approval.

J. Demonstration of Electric Heater shall be conducted at minimal seasonal winter months

(December and / or January) when the initial water temperature at 18o C. Capacity of Heat
Exchanger shall be selected to maintain a uniform water surface temperature of 28 o C.
Calculation shall be submit for the Engineer’s review and approval.

4.27 SYSTEM OPERATION AFTER APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER

A. The Contractor and / or the specialist contractor shall keep the system in operation after the
system approved from the Engineer in order to avoid water contamination and algae growth.

Newton Lusail School 224713- 23

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

Chemical to be injected continuously and the filtration system shall run regularly to
maintaining the water quality as per above said parameters.

B. After testing approval from the Engineer, the whole system shall run as a normal till the
takeover certificate issued by the Engineer. For this period, Chemicals to be provided under
the contractor expenses without additional cost to the client.

4.28 HANDOVER TO THE HOTEL OPERATOR

A. The Contractor is full responsible to arrange and perform any necessary testing
requested by the Hotel Operator without any additional cost to the Client.

B. Contractor Must arrange the necessary and required testing Devices /

instruments / tools with a valid due calibration during the testing inspection of
the system with the Operator.

C. Contractor shall action all of the Hotel Operator’s comments that are critical for
Hotel Operation prior the issuance of take-over certificate by the Engineer.

D. At the time of handover to the operator of the Works after the Taking Over
Certificate, the whole installation shall be in ‘as-new’ conditions. The
Contractor shall, during the course of the Contract, protect all plant and
equipment and shall restore/repaint as necessary before handover of the installa-
tion.

4.29 WARRANTIES

A. The Contractor shall warrant that the capacity, rating or duty of all equipment
used in the installation shall not be less than the performance specified on the
Drawing or in the Specification when operating under the specified conditions
and in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Any
equipment/system not meeting this requirement shall be rejected.

B. Both main and Specialist Contractors / supplier shall provide written guarantee
that when pool equipment is operated in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, pool water will be crystal clear, sparkling bright, free from
suspended matter and completely sterilized at all times.

C. Any other Notices as required by all local Authorities.

D. Warranty Certificate by both Contractor and specialist shall be issued.

E. All Swimming Pool overall system installed in this project shall have a
minimum warranty of five years of normal performing operation commenced
from the takeover Certificate issued by the Engineer and / or as per the contract
as well as per the standard warranty whichever is greater.

F. During the warranty period, perform the periodic routine and preventive
maintenance as per the Equipment manufacturer’s requirement to verify its
proper operation.

Newton Lusail School 224713- 24

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

4.30 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS

A. The Contractor is obliged to provide a written guarantee that the spare parts for
the Works or other equal and approved spare parts will be available for a period
of fifteen (15) years beyond the issue date of Taking over Certificate for the
Works. Failure to provide the guarantee may, at the sole discretion of the
Employer, result in the Tender being rejected.

B. The Contractor to liaise with the Engineer to determine the recommended lists
of spare parts for three years operation and maintenance covering all systems
and sub-systems of the specification. This list will be subject to the Engineer’s
discretion; by which the Contractor is committed to order these spare parts in
part or in whole at any time up to the issue of the Performance Certificate
without any cost escalation.

C. All spare parts and maintenance equipment shall be provided in original

packing, clearly identified and labelled. Provide complete schedules of spare
parts and maintenance equipment clearly cross-referenced with the “Record
Drawings” and maintenance instructions and manuals.

D. All spare parts and maintenance equipment shall be as recommended by the

equipment manufacturer. List of spare parts shall be subject to the final
approval of the Engineer.

E. Spare parts and maintenance equipment provided shall be branded new,

originally manufactured parts similar to the materials being installed. Spare
Parts to be delivered for the three (3) years maintenance period started from the
date of take over Certificate. The Contractor shall carefully log all spare parts
utilized during maintenance period.

F. Spare Parts as mentioned in “E” above shall be supplied and handed-over by the
Contractor under his expenses without additional cost to the Employer prior
Take over Certificate.

G. Provide spare parts and maintenance equipment for all pumps, control panel etc.
requiring maintenance and replacement.

H. Provide two new complete sets of tools and repairing kits for the proper
operation, routine maintenance and adjustment of all components and
equipment.

4.31 TRAINING

A. The Tenderer shall submit a schedule in the Tender submission list all works
and systems for which the Contractor has to provide training. The Schedule
should have information include list of recommended training courses within
each works/systems, location of the training courses (local/overseas). Trainers
details (from the manufacturers premises where applicable), courses duration,
unit rate of the training in per head basis.

Newton Lusail School 224713- 25

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

B. The Contractor shall provide sufficient and proper instructions to the trainees
nominated by the Employer in the commissioning, operation, maintenance,
servicing and trouble-shooting of the various plant and systems.

C. The Contractor shall provide training facilities and training courses and ensure
that the trainees nominated by the Employer / Hotel Operator will acquire full
knowledge and appreciation of all aspects of the day to day operation,
breakdown and routine maintenance, and fault diagnosis of all plant, equipment
and system installed under this Contract. Detailed syllabus and the timing of the
training courses shall be submitted.

D. The Trainees nominated by the Employer will attend the training courses, and
the Contractor shall allow them reasonable access to technical information and
documentation required for proper operation and maintenance. The Contractor
shall also explain this information and documentation to allow the trainees to
become fully conversant with all aspects of the systems.

E. When training is required to be held in overseas facilities, all necessary costs

for airfare, hotel accommodation, local transportation, food, etc. shall be
included.

4.32 TAKING OVER PROCEDURE

A. The Contractor shall adhere to the sequence of handover described below:

1. The Contractor shall submit the arrangement of the commissioning to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. The Engineer and reserves the right to reject any
person.
2. The installation shall be ‘practically complete’ following satisfactory com-
missioning and the submission of final commissioning data prior to the issu-
ance of Taking Over Certificate by the Engineer. It is solely the Contractor’s
responsibility to ensure that all plant/equipment shall have their respective
warranty by the respective equipment/plant supplier directly.
3. A joint inspection shall be held among the Employer / Hotel operator, the
Engineer and Contractor to establish an outstanding works and defects list.
All outstanding works/defects shall be completed within one month from the
date when the Taking Over Certificate was issued.
4. If, at the end of the one month’s period from the date of issuing the Taking
Over Certificate, any defects/outstanding works mentioned in the list still ex-
ist, the Engineer is empowered to appoint a body to rectify all de-
fects/outstanding works and deduct the cost involved from the Contract sum.
5. The Contractor shall close / action all of the Non Conformance and Field
Observation Reports that are critical for hotel operation prior issuance of the
take-over Certificate by the Engineer.
6. Room and Field Demonstration Training to the Employer / Hotel Operator
as detailed below in this Section “Tuition / Training” shall be Conducted
prior the issuance of Take-over Certificate.
7. The Engineer’s instructions (if any) shall be actioned by the Contractor prior
the issuance of takeover Certificate. The Contractor shall submit installation
Inspection against each An Engineer’s Instruction for the Engineer’s ap-
proval.

Newton Lusail School 224713- 26

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 223600 - SWIMMING POOL

B. The Contractor shall also refer to other requirements in the relevant clauses of
the Contract.
1. Before the Taking Over Certificate is issued, the following must be complet-
ed:
a. Operation and Maintenance Instructions Manual, test data and “as-built” draw-
ings must be submitted and approved by the Engineer. Computer “soft” copies
of these manuals and drawings shall also be submitted.
b. The Employer or his representative /Hotel Operator must be fully instructed in
the operation of the system. A written acknowledgment from the Employer
shall be required.
c. All tools, Repairing kits and spares shall be handed over. A written acknowl-
edgment from the Employer shall be required.
d. Written confirmation from the Contractor to indicate the installation is complet-
ed according to Performance Requirement.
e. Submit and obtain the approval by the Engineer. Maintenance schedule for the
installation during the Maintenance and Defect Notification Period.

4.33 MAINTENANCE DURING DEFECT WARRANTY / LIABILITY PERIOD

A. Immediately answering the breakdown calls, the Contractor shall attend to such
calls within a maximum time limit of three hours during Night and Two hours
during Daytime of receiving such Calls.

B. During the defects warranty period, the Contractor shall at his own cost repair
all faults or defects in the works which in the opinion of the Engineer are due to
faulty materials and workmanship.

C. If the Contractor fails to remedy such faults and or defects within a reasonable
time, the Employer may deploy other Contractor to do such work under the
expenses of the contractor and without prejudice to such other rights as the
Employer may have under the contract.

END OF SECTION 224713

Newton Lusail School 224713- 27

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00
 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 224000 - 1
 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components:

1. Faucets for lavatories bathtubs bathtub/showers showers and sinks.

2. Toilet seats.
3. Protective shielding guards.
4. Fixture supports.
5. Shower receptors.
6. Dishwasher air-gap fittings.
7. Water closets.
8. Lavatories.
9. Kitchen sinks.
10. Service sinks.

B Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 10 Section "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories."

2. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers,
floor drains, and specialty fixtures not included in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people
with disabilities.

C Cast Polymer: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material. This material includes cultured-marble

and solid-surface materials.

D Cultured Marble: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material with surface coating.

E Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings
specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub
spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are
included where indicated.

F FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

G PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 224000 - 2
 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

H PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

I Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-,

scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and
trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate
materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.

B Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.

D Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each
category through one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single
manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that
category.

B Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.

C Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and

Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and
Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people
with disabilities.

D Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy

Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

E NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health
Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

F Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.

G Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
plumbing fixtures:

1. Stainless-Steel Commercial, Hand wash Sinks: NSF 2 construction.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 224000 - 3
 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

2. Stainless-Steel Residential Sinks: ASME A112.19.3.

3. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
4. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.
5. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.

H Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
lavatory and sink faucets:

1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M.
2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet:
ASME A112.18.3M.
3. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
4. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
5. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
6. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
7. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
8. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.
9. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

I Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for bathtub
and shower faucets:

1. Backflow Protection Devices for Hand-Held Showers: ASME A112.18.3M.

2. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets:
ASSE 1016.
3. Deck-Mounted Bath/Shower Transfer Valves: ASME 18.7.
4. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
5. Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014.
6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
7. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444.
8. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.

J Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous fittings:

1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.

2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.
3. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
4. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
5. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409.
6. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

K Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:

1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430.

2. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
3. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.
4. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3.
5. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.
6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 224000 - 4
 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

7. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.

8. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
9. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
10. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

1.6 WARRANTY

A Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of whirlpools that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures of unit shell.

b. Faulty operation of controls, blowers, pumps, heaters, and timers.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period for Commercial Applications: One & Three year(s) from date of
Substantial Completion.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
3. Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed,
but no fewer than 12 of each type.
4. Provide hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, with separate
compartments for each type and size of extra materials listed above.
5. Flushometer Tank, Repair Kits: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed,
but no fewer than 2 of each type.
6. Water-Closet Tank, Repair Kits: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed.
7. Toilet Seats: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A Refer to approved manufacturers list .

2.2 WATER CLOSETS

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 224000 - 5
 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

A Water Closets Type (WC1):

1. Description wall-mounting, back-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed for flush me-

ter-valve operation.
2. Style: Flush meter tank.

a. Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design. Include bolt caps matching fix-
ture.
b. Height: Standard Accessible.
c. Flush range: Low flush as per GSAS (3.75 LPF).
d. Color: As per architectural package.

3. Supply: DN 15 chrome-plated brass or copper with screwdriver stop.

B Water Closet Type (WC2):

1. Identical as type (WC1) and provided with heavy duty chrome plated brass back
and side grab bars for physical challenged individuals.
2. Style: Flush meter valve.

2.3 LAVATORIES

A Lavatories, (LAV1):

1. Description: Counter-mounting & under counter-mounting, vitreous-china fixture.

Model identification according to interior designer and engineer approval.

a. Type: Self-rimming.
b. Lavatory Size: as indicate in architectural drawings.
c. Faucet flow rate for public Lavatories: as per GSAS (1.5 LPM)
d. Faucet (tap) aerators 1.5 LPM outlet accepted by the Architect shall be fitted to
the tap.
e. Faucet Hole Punching: One hole.
f. Faucet Hole Location: Top.
g. Color: As per architectural package.
h. Faucet: Lavatory with pop-up waste.
i. Supplies: DN 10 chrome-plated copper with stops.
j. Drain Piping: DN 32 chrome-plated, cast-brass P-trap; (DN 32), 1.1-mm thick
tubular brass waste to wall; and wall escutcheon.
k. Drain Piping: Schedule 40 ABS or PVC, (DN 32) P-trap; (DN 32), tubular
waste to wall; and wall escutcheon.

B Lavatories, (LAV2):

1. Description: Wall-and-pedestal-mounting, vitreous-china fixture.

a. Type: Ledge back Shelf back Slab wall Pedestal.

b. Faucet flow rate for private Lavatories : as per GSAS (5.7 LPM)
c. Faucet (tap) aerators 5.7 LPM outlet accepted by the Architect shall be fitted to
the tap.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 224000 - 6
 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

d. Faucet Hole Punching: One hole.

e. Faucet Hole Location: Top.
f. Pedestal: Required.
g. Color: As per architectural package.
h. Faucet: Lavatory with pop-up waste.
i. Supplies: DN 10 chrome-plated copper with stops.
j. Drain Piping: DN 32 chrome-plated, cast-brass P-trap; 1.1-mm-thick tubular
brass waste to wall; and wall escutcheon.
k. Drain Piping: Schedule 40 DN 32 P-trap; tubular waste to wall; and wall es-
cutcheon.

2.4 SHOWERS

B. Shower (Two Valve Mixer with Thermostatic Mixing Valves): As indicated below.
1. Thermostatic mixing valve with lever handle, individual angle check stops, GPM
shower head with adjustable spray, arm and flange.
2. Flow rate for private shower : as per GSAS (5.7 LPM).
3. Shower head equipped with vacuum flow valve / flow control.

2.5 SINKS

A Kitchen Sinks, (KS)

1. Description: Two, residential, counter-mounting, stainless-steel kitchen sink. Model

identification according to interior designer and engineer approval.

a. Overall Dimensions: as indicate in architectural drawings.

b. Metal Thickness: 1.3 mm
c. Bowl:

1) Dimensions: Refer to architectural drawings

2) Drain: (89-mm) grid.

a) Location: Near back of bowl.

d. Sink Faucet: Required.

e. Supplies: DN 15 chrome-plated copper with stops.
f. Drain Piping: DN 40 chrome-plated, cast-brass P-trap; 1.1-mm- thick tubular
brass waste to wall; continuous waste; and wall escutcheon(s).
g. Drain Piping: Schedule 40 ABS or PVC, DN 40 P-trap; tubular waste to wall;
continuous waste; and wall escutcheon(s).
h. Faucet flow rate : as per GSAS (5.0 LPM)

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 224000 - 7
 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

B Janitor Sink Type (JS)

1. Description: White color enameled fire clay sink with stainless steel bucket grating
and hard wood rim as model selected by interior designer, or approved equal.

a. Chrome plated, 40 mm waste fitting with chain stay, chain and plug screw pipe
connection with chrome plated anti-syphon tubular trap.

b. Faucet flow rate : as per GSAS (6.8 LPM)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.

B Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be
installed.

C Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to

manufacturers' written instructions.

B Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.

C Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.

D Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building

substrate.

E Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

F Install floor-mounting, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate and wall
bracket and onto waste fitting seals.

G Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

H Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 224000 - 8
 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

I Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind
fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with
fixture. Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for
Plumbing Piping."

J Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected
to sanitary drainage system.

K Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to
drainage system.

L Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side
of compartment.

M Install toilet seats on water closets.

N Install trap-seal liquid in dry urinals.

O Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets
are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

P Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop
valves.

Q Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if
faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

R Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.

S Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.

T Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal
protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."

U Set bathtubs & shower receptors in leveling bed of cement grout. Grout is specified in
Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

V Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified
in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 224000 - 9
 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

A Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

C Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."

D Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where
installed.

B Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified
components.

C Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

D Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate
properly.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,
fittings, and controls.

B Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.

C Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

D Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.

3.6 CLEANING

A Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning
methods and materials. Do the following:

1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall
strainers and spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

B After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings,

inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 224000 - 10
 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

3.7 PROTECTION

A Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by
Ministry.

END OF SECTION 224000

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 224000 - 11
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

SECTION 328400 - PLANTING IRRIGATION

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 1
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
A.
1.2 SUMMARY
B.
C. Section Includes:
1.
2. Pipe And Fittings

3. Application Devices

4. Spray Pop-Up Sprinkler

5. Rotor Pop-Up Sprinkler

6. Integrated Dripper Line

7. On- Line Dripper For Irregularly Layed-Out Shrubs

8. Bubblers

9. Electrical Control Solenoid Valves

10. Quick Coupling Valves

11. Gate Valves

12. Air/Vacuum Release Valves Specifications

13. Check Valves:

14. Valve Boxes

15. Filters

16. Controllers

17. Power Source

18. Irrigation Control Cables

19. Irrigation Pump

20. Flow Meter

21. Master Control Valve

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 2
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

22. Miscellaneous

23. Boxes for automatic control valves

D.
E. Related Sections:

1. Section 321400 LANDSCAPE

F. The contractor shall prepare the shop drawings showing but not limited to The Main
line, Laterals, solenoid valves, control wires route and numbers, Irrigation
Controllers, integrated dripper lines, on line drippers, Bubblers and flush valves.

1. All equipments and materials shall be supplied, installed, tested and

commissioned by an irrigation specialist employed by the contractor and
approved by the engineer.

2. The contractor shall submit for Engineer’s approval the technical information
and samples of the material he intends to use which should be in accordance
with the material specifications of this project.

3. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor specialist to ensure that the plant
and equipment supplied by them produces the desired results. The Specialist
shall include all equipment, materials, accessories, finishing materials etc.,
required so as to have a complete functional system. This shall include all
items of a minor nature necessary to complete the installation and usually
included in similar work whether or not specifically mentioned in the contract
documents.

4. All materials and workmanship not fully specified herein or covered by BS or

BSCP or approved alternative shall be of such a kind as is used in first class
work and is suitable for the climatic conditions of the state of Qatar.

5. The complete irrigation system for each site shall be fine-tuned to efficiently
and evenly irrigate all areas in accordance with the engineered design and shall
be complete in every respect. The system shall be set in operation and adjusted
to the satisfaction of the Engineer’s.

6. All irrigation equipment and components shall be the product of one

manufacturer having a local representative Engineer capable of advising and
assisting in making the required adjustments to the system.

7. The contractor shall commission the irrigation system upon completing the
work and then shall be handed over.

8. The contractor and upon completing the work shall provide the Engineer with
four original sets of As-Built drawings accurately reflecting the executed works
and installation details.

9. The contractor shall upon completing the works provide the Engineer with
detailed Operation and Maintenance Manuals (With applicable Arabic
translations) in four originals. The manuals shall include but not limited to;
complete and marked literature of all products used on the project and its
reordering part numbers. It shall also include a list of the recommended spare

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 3
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

parts for a period of 5 years. It shall include original color print and softcopy of
the As Built drawings.
10.
11. The Engineer prior to issuing the Project Handing Over Certificate shall
approve the As-Built Drawings and the Operation & maintenance Manual.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Comply with the requirements of the following standards and regulations:

1. QCS 2010 - Section 28 specifications are applied unless conflicted with this
project specification. In case of a contradiction this project specification should
prevail.

2. ISO R 161 - Confirming to German Standards Din 8061 & 19532

3. SASO 14&15 - Conforming to Saudi Pipes Standards

4. ASTM D1785 - American standard for testing of material for PVC pipes.

5. ASTM D2219-02 - Specification for PVC insulation for wire and cable

6. ASTM B-3 - Bare soft and annealed copper un-insulated uncoated 14-4 AWG
solid wire.

7. ASTM B-8 - Class B concentric-lay-stranded copper conductors

8. ASTM D1248 - Standard specification for polyethylene plastic

9. BS: 1780 - Specification for bourdon tube pressure and vacuum gauges.

10. BS: 3505 - Specification for UPVC pressure pipes for cold potable water.

11. BS: 4346 - Joints and fittings for use with UPVC pressure pipes.

12. BS: 5150 - Specification for cast iron wedge and double disk gate valves for
general purposes.

13. BS: 5154 - Specification for copper alloy globe, globe stop and check, check
and gate valves for general purposes.

14. BS: 8010 - Code of practice for pipelines.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 4
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

B. Where more than one applicable standards are specified or in case of differences
with this specification, use the most restrictive provisions and recommendation or as
directed by the engineer.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of irrigation equipment,

control systems, pumps, pipes and fittings whose products have been in satisfactory
use in similar service for not less than 5 years and backed by a recognized local
agent or to the approval of the engineer.

B. Installers: Firms regularly engaged in the installation of irrigation works of a similar

quality and scope as this project and to be approved by the Engineer.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to start of any work at site the contractor has to approach all Service Authori-
ties in Qatar to get their no objection for the work included in this contract and rec-
ord drawings for their existing services. Copy of these drawings and no objection
certificate should be submitted to the Engineer before starting the actual work at
site.

Shop Drawings - The contractor to prepare the project shop drawings in 3 sets of
black hardcopies, one set colored hardcopy and a soft copy, which to be approved
by the Engineer representative prior to commencing installation work. The shop
drawings shall show but not limited to valves, control wires route and numbers, con-
trollers’ location and flow balancing.

Please note that the contractor to make detail survey of existing levels in the contract
area.

Trial pits should be taken at every 50 meter interval, mark all the existing services in
reference to the road edge & building line along with its depth from existing the
ground level & the proposed Landscape finish level. Contractor to check availability
of all the existing ducts that are marked on the tender drawings. Contractor to pro-
pose the route of Irrigation piping based this information. All this information re-
garding trial pits, existing and proposed levels, availability of existing ducts shall be
made available to the Engineer within mobilization period of the contract. All this
information shall be made available on hardcopy & in Digital format to the Engineer
as it is required for adjusting landscape and pipes/services alignment.

Any delay to provide the above-mentioned information regarding trial trenches, ex-
isting services & levels which affects the progress of works shall be the responsibil-
ity of the Contractor

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 5
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

The successful contractor shall submit shop drawings, for approval by the Engineer,
for the following:

1. In case of any conflict between contract drawings and any existing or future
services which may necessitate re-routing proposed irrigation Main or laterals,
the contractor has to prepare the shop drawings accordingly and submit it to the
Engineer for approval. This should be considered as integral part of the con-
tract.

2. The Pump /Filtration Chamber mechanical, electrical and civil works shop
drawings. Necessary modifications to the existing feeding chambers ( civil and
mechanical). Valve chambers including valves, pipe works and civil works.
Electrical control equipment with circuit diagrams.

3. Details of mainline, Profile drawings for Mainline, lateral pipes and other typi-
cal connections.
4. Wiring diagrams including conduits, pull boxes, sizing and calculations to veri-
fy that cable sizing is in accordance with Kahramaa regulations and equipment
manufacturer’s recommendations.

5. Electrical power and control wiring diagrams for irrigation controllers, field
wiring and grounding.

6. Sketch plans for drip line layout.

7. Sketch plans for Sprayer and Sprinkler layouts.

8. Detail of valve chambers and any modification to the existing feeding cham-
bers.

9. The approval shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibility under
the contract for successful completion of the work

B. Products – The contractor shall submit for Engineer’s approval prior to commencing
installation works; the products he intends to use with all technical details and litera-
ture in accordance with the specifications below. Material submittal should includ-
ing all irrigation system component, fitting and accessories including but not limited
to warning tape, PVC cement and cleaner, wires, Teflon tape. A sample board
should be submitted for approval. A material submittal list and form is as per Table
#1 below.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals-The contractor shall submit 4 sets of black

hardcopies, one set colored hardcopy and a soft copy of detailed Operation &

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 6
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

Maintenance Manual and one softcopy with equipment reordering codes and litera-
ture.

D. As-Built Drawings- The contractor shall submit 3 sets of black hardcopies, one set
colored hardcopy and a soft copy of the complete project as-built drawings reflect-
ing the actual site installation.

E. Calculation: The contractor shall submit a friction loss calculation for the irrigation
system installed including a full system flow balance calculation.

F. Guarantees: The contractor should submit manufacturer and supplier material guar-
antees for materials submittal as specified in the material specification below.

G. All catalogue cuts, diagrams, samples, drawings and such other data may be re-
quired to demonstrate compliance with the specification.
TABLE #1: MATERIAL SUBMITAL LIST AND FORM

MATERIAL SUBMITTAL FORM

SUBMITTAL
DATES

ITE ABBREVIATIONS
DESCRIPTION
M#

AIR RELEASE VALVE AP APPROVED

APPROVED
SCREEN FILTER AN
AS NOTED
ADDITIONAL
POLYETHYLENE IN LINE DRIP AI INFORMATIO
N
NOT
ON LINE DRIPPERS NA
APPROVED
PRESSURE COMPENSATING SAMPLE
SR
BUBBLER REQUIRED
GUARANTEE
ROTOR SPRINKLER GR
REQUIRED
NOT
POP UP SPRAY NS
SUBMITTED
TEST
CENTRAL IRRIGATION SYSTEM TR
REQUIRED
IRRIGATION CONTROLLER OT OTHERS
WEATHER STATION
IRRIGATION CONTROL WIRE
FLOW METER
Newton Lusail School
Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 7
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

MATERIAL SUBMITTAL FORM

SUBMITTAL
DATES
SOLENOID VALVES
QUICK COUPLING VALVE
100 MM GATE VALVE
GATE VALVE
CHECK VALVE
VALVE BOXES
PVC PIPES
PVC FITTINGS
PVC CEMENT
PVC CLEANER
DC ALUMINUM COVER
SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL
FLOW BALANCE SUBMITTAL
IRRIGATION PUMPS & Panels
SUBMERSIBLE PUMP
WATER TANKS
WATER COOLER

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. All primary distribution pipe work shall be Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride

(UPVC) class E or equivalent for all lateral and mainlines.

B. PVC pipes shall be manufactured according to ASTM D1785 or equivalent.

C. All primary distribution pipe fittings shall be solvent welded UPVC 16 bars.

D. All Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe fittings shall be manufactured to ASTM

D1785 or Equivalent and class E or equivalent.

E. Flexible Piping for on line drippers:

F. Flexible Pipes for irrigation on line drippers shall be in the required sizes as shown
on the drawings and extruded from linear low density polyethylene version raw ma-
Newton Lusail School
Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 8
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

terial. Pipes shall be resistant to algae and ultraviolet deterioration with Carbon
Black content not less than 2.25%.

G. Pipes and fittings manufacturer should be ISO certified with 5 years manufacturing
experience, test certificate from reputable labs should be available prior to material
ordering.

2.2 APPLICATION DEVICES

A. Spray Pop-Up Sprinkler

1. The spray pop-up sprinkler shall be equipped with an adjustable arc (25-360)
nozzle discharging at half circle as shown in design drawings.

2. The spray pop-up sprinkler nozzle shall automatically adjust the flow depend-
ing on the arc setting in order to have a matched precipitation rate.

3. The sprinkler shall have arc and radius reduction capability. It shall also be
possible to adjust arc and radius from the top of the riser assembly, using an
adjustment key.

4. The sprinkler shall have an inlet screen. The body and riser of the sprinkler
shall be constructed of non-corrodible, heavy duty A.B.S

5. The sprayers should be located 25 cm from grass edge or as noted on design

drawings

6. Refer to design drawing for exact radius of coverage and flow needed for each
sprayer.

7. Sprinkler flow and radius coverage should be as per design drawings.

8. The sprinkler shall carry a one-year manufacturer and supplier exchange war-
ranty (not prorated).

B. Rotor Pop-Up Sprinkler

1. The rotor pop-up sprinkler shall be of the gear-driven, closed case rotary type
or as specified in the design drawings.

2. The rotor pop-up sprinkler shall have a gear drive reversing or non-reversing
mechanism.

3. The rotor pop-up sprinkler shall be available with standard nozzles discharging
from .9 to 8.2 GPM.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 9
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

4. The sprinkler shall have minimum 25% radius adjustment capabilities by

means of a stainless steel nozzle retainer/radius adjustment screw.

5. The sprinkler shall be available in both full-circle and adjustable part-circle

configurations.

6. The adjustable part circle unit shall be minutely adjustable from 40° to 360°.
The adjustable unit shall be adjustable in all phases of installation (i.e., before
installation, after installation while static and after installation while in opera-
tion).

7. The sprinkler shall have a constant rotation speed irrespective of the nozzle in-
stalled.

8. The sprinkler shall have a minimum of 4-inch (10 cm) pop-up stroke to bring
the rotating nozzle turret into a clean environment.

9. The sprinkler shall have a thick rubber cover firmly attached to the top of the
sprinkler riser.

10. The sprinkler shall be equipped with a drain check valve to prevent low head
drainage, and be capable of checking up to 10 feet (3, 0 m) in elevation change.

11. The sprinkler shall be serviceable after installation in the field by unscrewing
the body cap, removing the riser assembly, and extracting the inlet filter screen.

12. The body and riser of the sprinkler shall be constructed of non-corrodible,
heavy-duty A.B.S.

13. It shall have a stainless steel spring for positive retraction of the riser when ir-
rigation is complete.

14. Sprinkler flow, radius coverage, and operating pressure should be as per design
drawings.

15. The sprinkler shall carry a one-year manufacturer and supplier exchange war-
ranty (not prorated).

C. Integrated Dripper Line

1. The dripper line shall consist of a ultra violet resistant low density Linear poly-
ethylene tube with internal pressure compensating continuously self-cleaning
integral flat drippers welded to the inside of wall of the tube at the specified
spacing as an integral part of the tubing assembly.

2. The tube shall have a 15 to 17 mm outside diameter.

Newton Lusail School
Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 10
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

3. The dripper shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm re-
tainer and a self-cleaning diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. It
shall have an inlet filter raised from the wall of the tubing. It shall have the
ability to independently regulate discharge rates with a constant flow at an inlet
pressure of 7-70 psi.

4. The dripper discharge shall be as specified on the design drawings utilizing a

combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism
and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. It shall also be continu-
ously self-cleaning during operation and under pressure.

5. The dripper flow versus pressure shall be tested by an independent reputable

organization, and shall have available reports to be presented upon request by
the Engineer.

6. The dripper flow shall not be affected by temperature up to 60 degrees Celsius

and shall not have a spike at start up.

7. The filtration requirement of the dripper shall be a maximum of 120 mesh

Type of Planting Drip Spacing Line Spacing Flow GPH

Hedges 40 cm 2 lines 40 cm 1.02 GPH
Ground Covers 40 cm 40 cm 1.02 GPH
Seasonal 40 cm 30 cm 1.02 GPH

8. The dripper line shall have a 5 years guarantee against solar radiation and 5
years manufacturer and supplier warranty against manufacturing defects.

D. On-Line Dripper for Irregularly Layed Out Shrubs

1. Single outlet, pressure compensating drippers are acceptable.

2. Pressure compensating design deliver uniform flow at a pressure variable from

15 to 50 psi

3. Made of durable plastic construction and UV resistant

4. Diaphragm resistant to chemicals

5. Built in self-flushing action

6. Available in self-piercing inlet barb.

7. The flow is as per design drawing.

Newton Lusail School
Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 11
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

8. On-line dripper should be extended with a distribution component made of a

UV resistant polyethylene resin materials, 4 mm inside diameter.

9. Polyethylene and UV resistant pipe 16 mm is used to insert in the on line drip-

pers, this pipe is laid underground at 5 cm depth including the online dripper,
only the distribution component is extended out the ground to a maximum of
25 cm length.

10. The dripper line shall have a 5 years guarantee against solar radiation and 5
years manufacturer and supplier warranty against manufacturing defects.

E. Bubblers

1. The bubbler shall be of the pressure compensating type having a fixed flow un-
der a pressure range of 20 to 90 PSI. It shall be constructed of corrosion and
UV resistant plastic material.

2. The bubbler shall have an integral flow bushing to maintain a constant flow at
different pressure range.

3. The bubbler shall have a plastic screen filter to protect it from debris that could
be available in the water.

4. The bubbler shall be available in 0.25 to 2.0 GPM flow rates.

5. Bubblers flow and numbers are as per design drawing details and two bubblers
are needed for each tree or palm, one bubbler at opposite corner of the tree.

6. The bubbler shall carry a two years manufacturer and supplier replacement
warranty.

F. Electrical Control Solenoid Valves

1. The electrical control solenoid valves shall be of the electronically actuated, di-
aphragm operated.

2. The valve’s body and bonnet shall be molded of non-corrodible, glass-

reinforced nylon, rated at an operating pressure of 200 PSI. The body of the
valve shall have brass inserts, with through holes, which will accept the bonnet
Stainless steel bolts.
3. The valve shall be equipped with an internal filter as well with a self-cleaning
metering rod, so only clean water can enter the solenoid chamber. A filter
cleaning system, that continuously cleans the filter when the valve is operating,
shall be available.

4. The valve shall be equipped with a flow control mechanism with handle, which
regulates the flow from full on to completely off. It shall have an accurate set

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 12
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

pressure regulator, to keep the downstream pressure constant after setting it.
The regulator shall be of the top dial model with clearly shown pressure values
in bars and PSI. It shall regulate the flow at a pressure range of 20 to 100 PSI.

5. The valve shall be available in 1, 1.5, 2 and 3” inch sizes and it shall have a
BSP female thread inlet and outlet. It shall accommodate a flow rate from 0.1
gpm (1”size) to 100 gpm (3”size)

6. The valve shall be equipped with automatic self-cleaning system for filter.

7. The valve sizes, number and flow rate are shown on the design drawings.

8. The valve shall carry a five years manufacturer and supplier exchange warran-
ty.

G. Quick Coupling Valves

1. The Valve shall be operated by insertion of a compatible hollow coupler key.

2. The Valve shall be operated by insertion of a compatible hollow coupler key.

3. The valve shall be operated by a 90º turn in clockwise direction with reverse
turn for closure and be capable of 360-swivel action.

4. The valves shall be of the low-pressure loss type.

5. The Valve Body shall be made from brass material and have the two-section
type with removable upper body. It shall be supplied with spring loaded lock-
ing cover made from thermoplastic rubber. The cover spring shall be of stain-
less steel material.

6. The valve size is 1”.

7. The valve shall carry a five years manufacturer and supplier exchange warran-
ty.

H. Gate Valves

1. Gate valves shall be designed for a working pressure of not less than 10 bars
and water operating temperature of 45° C.

2. Valves shall be the same size as the incoming line size with a clear waterway
equal to the full nominal diameter of the valves and shall be opened by turning
counterclockwise.

3. The operating nut or wheel shall have an arrow cast in valve indicating the di-
rection of opening.
Newton Lusail School
Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 13
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

4. Valves smaller than 4” shall be all bronze or brass conforming to BS 5154 with
screwed end connections. Valves 4” and larger shall be cast iron body, and
shall conform to BS 5150 with flange end connections.

5. The valve shall carry a five years manufacturer and supplier exchange warran-
ty.

6. PVC valves up to 4" diameter, with working pressure of not less than 10 bars
and watering temperature of 50° C are acceptable with 10 years manufacturer
and supplier exchange warranty.

I. Air / Vacuum Release Valves Specifications

1. Air relief valves shall be 2” size as shown on the Drawings and shall be of the
kinetic/automatic type that will automatically release air when the lines are be-
ing filled with water and when air entrapment occurs while the system is work-
ing.

2. The Valves shall be of plastic or brass male base.

3. The body of the valve shall be constructed of heavy duty plastic or 100% cor-
rosion resistant materials.

4. The valve working components shall be constructed of 100% corrosion re-

sistant materials to ensure maximum life and minimum water loss due to leaks.

5. The Valve shall remain open even when pipeline air pressure reaches 10 psi.

6. The air release valve shall employ rolling seal mechanism made of EPDM.

7. The valve shall carry a five years exchange warranty.

J. Check Valves

1. The valve shall be having constructed of Aerospace quality composite and

stainless steel (SAE 303) materials, 100% non-corrosive.

2. The valve shall allow flow in one direction by the action of a spring loaded flap
which closes against a rubber seal.

3. The spring and the flap shall be connected via a moment arm in order to ensure
that the spring pressure is maximum when the valve is closed.

4. The valve shall have a pressure rating of 16 bars

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 14
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

5. The valve shall have an external position indicator that may be made electric
for signaling a control system.

6. The valve shall be available in 3”, 4”, and 6”size.

7. The valve shall carry a five years exchange warranty.

K. Valve Boxes

1. The valve boxes shall have enclosures, which are injected molded polyofin
plastic with ultra violet additives, according to ASTM-D-V1248. It shall be
light in weight with reduced side angles and increased break resistance.

2. The valve box shall be non-conductive or sparking.

3. The valve boxes shall be available in sizes to fit the solenoid valve assembly
including the union fittings and allow for easy removal of valves for mainte-
nance.

4. The valve box should have a two years replacement warranty against buckling
and five years against cracking. All valve boxes should be name tagged with
aluminum or brass name tags, placed inside the valve box and riveted to the
outside box cover. The name tag size should be 2" by 3" and 2mm thick.

L. Filters

1. Use a 3” disc filter on all distribution chambers with a disc filters of 120 mesh
size of 0.10 mm.

2. Disc filters should be corrosion resistant, with minimum pressure and high par-
ticle retention filter area.

3. Filters should handle a pressure of 8 bars minimum.

4. The filter shall carry a five years manufacturer and supplier exchange warranty.

M. Controllers

1. The controllers should be capable of running the irrigation system as sched-

uled; it should have a seasonal adjustment option, 4 programs, running 2 sole-
noid valves at the same time using one station.

2. The controllers should have a stainless-steel or plastic pedestal and should be

weatherproof and resists the elements.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 15
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

3. The number of stations for each controller should be equal to the total of exist-
ing stations for all used solenoid valves, the extra spare wires for future use and
wires for future flow meter and master gate valves at each chamber.

4. Additional 2 numbers of 10 gauge wires should be laid as provisional for future

installation of flow sensor and master gate valves at each distribution chamber.

5. The controller should have 2 years minimum warranty against malfunctioning

and 10 years available software upgrade. Irrigation schedule should laminated
and placed in each controller cabinet.

N. Power Source

1. The contractor shall be responsible for providing the electrical power source to
the controller from any nearby distribution panel board.

2. The location of the controllers should not be changed and the power sourcing
should be done to suit that condition. All coordination and permits should be
arranged by the contract and at his own expense.

O. Irrigation Control Cables

1. The irrigation control cables shall be used between the solenoid valves and the
irrigation controllers. The cables shall be of the single conductor type UF and
they shall be engineered for direct burial use. The common wire should be
gauge 14 and the control wire should be gauge 12.

2. For master control valves and flow meter wires use 10 gauge wires.

3. The wires shall be of the solid or stranded construction with soft bare copper
conductor. They shall have extra heavy thickness of special polyvinyl chloride
insulation highly resistant to the saline, acid or alkaline contaminants.

4. The copper conductors of the wires shall meet the requirements of ASTM B-3,
B-8.

5. The thermoplastic insulation shall meet ASTM D-2219. All irrigation wires
shall have surface printing on insulation.

P. Irrigation Pump

1. The irrigation pumping system should consist of a main irrigation pump, a

booster pump. The size of the pump is as specified in each project specifica-
tion.

2. The irrigation pump should have a variable frequency drive that controls and
keep pressure constant with a variable drive system.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 16
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

3. The pump should be made of the best materials and made by a reputable manu-
facturer.

4. The operation and maintenance schedule should be submitted.

5. The minimum replacement warranty for the pump should be 2 years if defect
occurs more than twice per year.

6. The supplier should submit a guarantee of 2 days maximum repair time for the
pump including availability of spare parts.

7. The pump warranty should cover all parts of the pumping system including the
control board piping and check valve to a minimum of five years against manu-
facturer defects.

Q. Flow Meter

1. The flow meter should be of an Electromagnetic insertion type, operated with

24 V direct current

2. It should be compatible with the irrigation control system.

3. Capable of reading flow from 0 to 25% higher than the maximum flow in the
largest mainline pipe.

4. Frequency of sampling and reading flow should be selectable from 10 times

per second to one time in 10 minutes.

5. The warranty should include the flow meter and the signal converter and
should be for 5 years suppliers’ warranty.

R. Master Control Valve

1. The master control valve should be cast iron compatible with the existing con-
troller and operated with 24 V direct Electrical current.

2. The warranty should be for 5 years suppliers warranty and 2 years minimum
manufacturer warranty.

3. The local supplier should be an existing Qatari firm with minimum 5 years of
operational history.

S. Miscellaneous

1. Irrigation Drip Line Stakes: Stakes for securing flexible pipes shall be heat
resistant plastic.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 17
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

2. Keys: the Contractor shall provide Keys for all valves, controller cabinets,
boxes, quick couplers, etc. The number of keys to be provided to the Engineer
for each type of fitting shall be six (6).

3. Hoses: Hoses, quick couplers and appropriate connectors shall be provided by

the Contractor for quick coupling valves, drain down points, etc. The number
of hoses/connectors shall be: 1 (one as sample) the hose should be fifty (50)
meters of industrial weight double nylon cord reinforcement of an untangling
and high pressure type.

4. Quick couplers Swivel end unit: One (1) quick coupler with swivel end unit
should be provided for each installed eight (8) quick coupling valves.

5. Distribution chamber: Should be made of reinforced concrete as specified

and approved by the drainage department, it should allow for easy installation
and removal of component inside and should be water proofed with water-
proofing paints and membrane. The membrane should be protected with a pro-
tection board.

6. Chamber Aluminum cover:

The aluminum cover should be made to fit the new chambers shown on the
project details drawing and it should have the following:

a) Hinged aluminum access cover shall be obtained from an approved expe-

rienced manufacturer and shall be fabricated from checker-plate. The
cover shall be capable of withstanding a load of 750 kg/m2 without de-
flecting more than 1% of the span, and without damage or permanent de-
flection.
b) Hinges shall not stand proud of the cover, and sealed lifting eyes shall be
provided completed with two lifting keys for each cover.

c) Covers should open to approximately 10 degree past the vertical, and

stays should be provided to hold the cover in this position.

d) All joints shall be welded/ soldered in an inert atmosphere.

e) The faces of the frame which will come into contact with the cement mor-
tar or concrete shall be painted with two coats of bituminous paint before
installation of the frame.

PART 3 - EXECUTIONS

3.1 PROTECTION

A. All materials shall be shipped or otherwise conveyed in such a manner as to assure

no damage. All boxes shall be securely sealed and clearly marked with the name of
the manufacturer. All pipes shall be protected from crimping, crushing and splitting.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 18
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

All non-metallic system components shall be protected from sunlight exposure as

per the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Work and materials shall be protected from damage during storage, handling and
construction. Particularly, non-metallic pipes and fittings shall be protected from di-
rect sunlight during storage. Facilities of the necessary dimensions shall be provided
and maintained for storage of all non-metallic irrigation materials in their entirety.
All non-metallic materials shall be handled carefully and stored under cover to avoid
damage. Pipes that have been damaged or dented will not be used in this work.

C. In addition to the provisions for the protection of non-metallic components, special

attention shall be given to the protection of the control system components; protec-
tion shall be provided as per the manufacturer's written recommendations.

D. Openings into the system, apparatus and equipment shall be securely covered, both
before and after being set in place, to prevent obstruction in the pipes and the break-
age, misuse or disfigurement of the apparatus or equipment.

E. Barricades, guards, warning signs and lights as necessary or required, for the protec-
tion of the public and the work force shall be provided.

F. Utilities: The location of existing underground utilities shall be determined and the
works performed in a manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavation,
as required shall be carried out to minimize the possibility of damage to existing un-
derground utilities.

3.2 PERFORMANCE

A. The Contractor shall stake-out the locations of all pipe and valves and the layout of
work as accurately as possible.

B. The Contractor shall verify all horizontal and vertical site dimensions prior to stak-
ing.

C. The Contractor will be responsible for relocating any existing services after first ob-
taining the Engineer's approval. The Contractor shall remove and relocate such ser-
vices, at his own expense, if so directed by the Engineer.

D. Before starting work on irrigation systems, the Contractor shall carefully check all
grades to determine that work may safely proceed, keeping within the specified ma-
terial depths.

E. Fittings installed on pipes beneath pavements or walls shall be shown on drawings.

F. All changes shall be recorded daily on the “As-Built" worksheets.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 19
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

3.3 INSPECTION

A. The Contractor shall inspect all products for damage immediately before installa-
tion. Any products that are found to be damaged or not in accordance with the speci-
fications shall immediately be repaired or removed from the site and replaced. Re-
pairs shall not be undertaken without the Engineer's approval of Contractor's pro-
posed action.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Excavation and backfilling shall be in accordance with detail drawings.

1. Mainline should be placed at 70 cm deep and warning tape 20 cm above pipe

as shown in design drawings.

2. Lateral lines should be placed at 40 cm deep without warning tape above.

3. Width of trench to be 40 cm minimum width.

B. Sand bedding layer of 5 cm minimum is required under the irrigation pipe.

C. Sand surround to a minimum 15 around the irrigation pipe is required.

D. In bedding and backfilling granular material shall be used below and above the
pipes. The backfill material shall be free of stones bigger than

E. Cast-in-place concrete shall be in accordance shall be in accordance with the com-

mon civil works standards covering the concrete class, shattering work, curing pro-
cedures etc.

F. All products shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction and
the Drawings.

G. Location of Irrigation Lines:

1. Where the location of an irrigation line is not clearly dimensioned on the Draw-
ings, the irrigation line shall not be laid horizontally closer than 3.0 meters
from a sewer.

2. However, where the bottom of the irrigation line will be at least 0.3 meters
above the top of the sewer pipe, the irrigation line shall not be laid closer hori-
zontally than 1.5 meters from the sewer.

3. Where irrigation lines cross under gravity-flow sewer lines, the sewer pipe
shall be fully encased in concrete, for a distance of at least 3.0 meters each side
of the crossing or shall be made of pressure pipe with no joint located within
1.0 meters horizontally of the crossing.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 20
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

4. Irrigation lines shall, in all cases, cross 0.6 meter above sewage pressure mains.

5. Lateral lines should be 2 meters away from center of trees, palms and large
shrubs.

6. Generally, where the irrigation distribution or secondary main with accompa-

nying cable bundle is running under hard surfaces or landscaped areas the pipe
and the cables will be directly buried in a clean sand bed with a marker tape
above. At road junctions or other locations where pipes cross the road they
shall be contained in a direct buried PVC sleeve. The sleeve shall extend be-
yond the road crossing by at least one meter on both sides. The sleeve shall be
a minimum of 100 mm diameter and for larger pipes will be at least
25mm greater in diameter than the pipe running through it.

H. Placing and Laying:

1. Pipes shall not be laid in water or when trench conditions are otherwise unsuit-
able for the work. Water shall be kept out of the trench until the material in the
joints has hardened or until caulking or jointing is completed. When work is
not in progress, open ends of the pipe, fittings, and valves shall be securely
closed so that no substance will enter the pipes or fittings.

2. Pipe ends left for future connections shall be valved, plugged or capped, and
anchored, as shown or as directed. Pipes that have the grade or joint disturbed
after laying shall be taken up and re-laid.

3. All piping with the exception of the flexible irrigation drip line shall be sur-
rounded by a sand bed to the dimensions as shown on the Drawings.

I. Plastic pipes

1. Pipes with threaded joints shall be snaked from side to side of the trench to al-
low for expansion and contraction.

J. Jointing:

1. Pipe joints of uPVC shall be installed in accordance with recommendations of

the manufacturer. Excess jointing material shall be removed. Heavy duty joint-
ing material will be used only.

2. UPVC male adaptors with specified threaded joint compounds to make connec-
tions between plastic pipe and valves shall be used as detailed, and tightened
with light wrench pressure.

K. Concrete thrust blocks shall be constructed on main pipelines at all changes in direc-
tion or size. The thrust blocks shall be non-reinforced concrete and shall have a

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 21
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

minimum dimension of 300 mm. The pipelines shall be located centrally in the
thrust blocks.

L. Irrigation piping from the remote control valve boxes to the end of the irrigation drip
lines shall be buried to the depths as shown on the Drawings.

M. Closing of Pipe and Flushing Lines:

1. Closing: Openings in piping systems shall be capped or plugged, leaving caps

and plugs in place until removal is necessary for completion of the installation.
Dirt and debris shall be prevented from entering pipe or equipment.

2. Flushing: All pipes and tubing shall be thoroughly flushed out before installa-
tion of the emitter control valves. Butt joints, fittings and connections shall re-
main visible.

N. Tagging and Identification: All remote control valves, motor-operated valves, pres-
sure reducing valves, manually-operated gate valves and controllers shall be tagged
and identified. All identifying numbers shall be consistent with like designations in-
dicated on the irrigation controller schedule.

O. Site Equipment Installation:

1. Isolation Valve/Gate Valve: Shall be installed as detailed and where indicated

on Drawings.

2. Remote Control Valve Assembly: Shall be installed in the positions as indicat-

ed in the details, remote control valve assembly comprising gate valve, remote
control valve with pressure regulator, and all appurtenances. Valve boxes con-
taining the assembly shall not be placed closer than 300mm to paved areas.
When the pressure gauge has been properly attached, the outlet pressure shall
be set as required during coverage tests.

3. Valve Boxes: Shall be installed as detailed and where indicated on Drawings.

All valves and valve assemblies shall be mounted in boxes as detailed.

a) The top of all boxes shall be set parallel with the grade and as detailed in a
neat and orderly fashion.

b) Shall be placed parallel to paving, kerbstone, walls or similar structures

and where more than one box, parallel to each other.

c) All box locations shall be reviewed with the Engineer prior to installation
of valves.

d) Valve boxes shall not rest on or come in contact with the valve, piping,
hose or conduit.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 22
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

e) Solenoid valve boxes should have a weather proof tag attached on the in-
side showing the valve number, controller number and station number.

f) A filter fabric should cover the valve box and the soak away and taped to
the valve box side just 10 cm below cover.

P. Control System:

1. Irrigation Controller:
a) An irrigation controller shall be installed in locations approved by the En-
gineer, with the control cables, clearly marked with identification mark-
ers, attached to the appropriate terminals in the approved manner.

b) Shall be secure to a concrete pad with approved anchor bolts. Chipping,

cracking, or otherwise marring the finish of enclosure when securing to
the concrete pad shall be avoided.

c) Programming of Irrigation Controller: Using the controller schedule pro-

vided on the drawings, as a guide, the irrigation controller shall be pro-
grammed to correspond with the initial irrigation sequencing and duration
of the cycles for each zone. The Contractor may find that during estab-
lishment and maintenance the schedule has to be modified to achieve a
correct irrigation regime in accordance with good horticultural practice,
such modification should be approved by the engineer.

Q. Irrigation – Electrical

1. The contractor shall provide, install, test and commission all items of electrical
equipment associated with the irrigation systems.

2. All electrical works shall be in accordance with the BS and IEC.

3. The irrigation system shall commence at the controllers, which shall be fitted
into a dwarf type distribution cabinet with solar shade and shall have a bolting
down foot for mounting on a pre-formed concrete base. All incoming and out-
going cables shall be from below ground level. The cabinet shall have a hinged
lockable opening door to provide full front access to the controller and equip-
ment and shall be sized according to the equipment being installed.

4. All equipment, conductors, termination, etc., within the pillar and throughout
the irrigation system generally shall be fully insulated such that there are no
live parts or connections exposed and shall be to the complete satisfaction of
the Engineer.

5. The irrigation pillar shall have sufficient free space for fitting a kWh meter to-
gether with any additional equipment or accessories required to complete the
equipment.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 23
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

6. Each irrigation pillar shall have permanently fixed on the inside of the door, a
distribution diagram showing all circuits connections, ratings, cable sizes, etc.,
together with a current controller schedule.

7. All terminals shall be of the crimped spade type with insulated grip. At all con-
nection locations 150 mm of "slack" shall be provided.

8. Conductor markers shall be used throughout which shall clearly indicate the
circuit reference or number. These shall be white plastic with black letters or
numbers and of the type which acts as a sleeve over the conductor insulation.

9. Connections onto valves shall be made in a below ground PVC resin filled
molded waterproof connector with integral wire clamp.

10. Solenoid valve cables should be laid along the mainline 20 cm horizontal dis-
tance from the irrigation pipe.
R. Drip Line / Soft Line Testing

1. Drip lines shall be carefully uncoiled and laid in position without kinking. Any
kinked section shall be cut from the line and subsequently rejoined with a line
joiner section.

2. Drip lines shall be snaked as required for maximum coverage without the use
of compression fittings. Sharp bends shall be avoided where there is a likeli-
hood of causing kinks in the line.

3. Drip lines shall be laid on the ground surface for a minimum of 48 hours prior
to the installation of irrigation emitters or stakes.

S. Concrete Pads:

1. Installation as detailed and where shown on the Drawings of controllers manu-

facturer.

2. The exact location shall be confirmed to the Engineer prior to pouring.

3. Specified non-metallic conduit shall be provided as required to penetrate boxes

and enclosures as approved by the Engineer.

4. The anchor bolts shall be set in coordination with enclosure hole locations.

3.5 SYSTEM TESTING

A. Purging:

1. Immediately prior to hydrostatic testing, all irrigation lines shall be thoroughly

purged of all entrapped air.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 24
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

2. Mainline piping system may be tested in sections. Lateral Systems shall be test-
ed valve by valve.

3. Water shall be discharged from a single outlet by manipulation of isolation con-

trol valves and installation of temporary caps.

4. Water shall be introduced into lines to be tested at full operating head and the
water flow at end discharge point, and observed until all air and residual debris
has been expelled from the line.

B. Initial System Test:

1. Individual parts of the main network between isolation valve points having a
length not greater than 500 meters shall be tested together with dead legs before
backfilling operation.

2. Test shall be made only after completion of the above operations and not until at
least seven days after the last concrete thrust anchor block has been cast.

3. Contractor shall supply all testing material and equipment, including all caps,
valves, pumps, tanks, water and gauges as required.

4. Pressure gauges shall be dual reading in bar and psi units. Calibration shall be
such that accurate determination of potential pressure loss can be ascertained.

5. The section of the main pipeline to be tested shall be filled with potable water
and all air expelled. After the main pipeline has been completely filled, the pres-
sure shall be steadily and gradually increased until the specified test pressure
has been reached. Simultaneous pressure and leakage tests and separate pressure
test shall be made at 150 % of working pressure at the point of test, but not less
than 125% of normal working pressure at highest elevation. Separate elevation
test shall be made at 150 % of normal working pressure of the segment tested.
The minimum pressure test for mainlines is 9 bars and leakage test for lateral
lines. Duration of pressure and leakage tests shall be 4 hours. All testing shall
comply with AWWA M23-80, Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe Design and Installation.
Testing shall comply with AWWA specifications and requirements.

6. Separate tests shall be applied to the lateral distribution pipe work and the irriga-
tion pipe work from the remote control valves outwards. Test pressures for these
shall be as described above.

7. When testing the irrigation lines from the valves, discharge devices shall be re-
placed with temporary plugs or caps.

8. All trenches with pipe installed shall be immediately backfilled with preliminary
sand backfill sufficient to prevent arching or slipping under pressure. All joints,
fittings and connections are to remain exposed until successful completion of
hydrostatic testing.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 25
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

9. Other than for preliminary sand backfill over pipes, no work shall be covered
before it has been inspected, tested and approved by the Engineer.

10. During the tests, all exposed couplings, fittings and valves shall be carefully ex-
amined for defects and leakage. Leaking pipes, couplings, joints, fittings and
equipment shall be repaired or replaced and the section retested as previously
specified.

11. Upon receipt of approval of the Engineer to proceed, the remaining backfill
shall be placed and compacted to ninety percent (90%) of maximum dry density.

C. Final System Test: The tests as specified above shall be repeated for the entire net-
work after pipelines have been backfilled, cleaned and inspected. Each test shall be re-
stricted to pipes of one class and particular care shall be taken to isolate air valves, etc.
and not to apply higher pressures than specified at any point on the pipeline and to en-
sure that the pipelines are adequately anchored before any test is carried out.

D. Test Results: Written records of every test clearly identifying the tested section of the
pipe together with time of test and name of testing engineer in tabulated format shall
be submitted for review and approval by the Engineer upon completion of the tests.

3.6 FLUSHING

A. General: On completion of the system test, the system is to be thoroughly flushed, the
velocity of water being at least 1 m/s. Should the main water supply be unavailable or
inadequate for this purpose at the time of flushing, then a swab of adequate size shall
be used to remove all foreign matter from the pipeline. This process shall continue un-
til the pipeline is completely clean. Each control valve shall be opened separately and
the terminal systems also thoroughly flushed. After completion of flushing, the emit-
ters and other discharge devices shall be fitted.

B. Operation Test: After the hydrostatic test, emitters shall be installed and the system
completed and tested to demonstrate functional efficiency. This shall be prior to cov-
ering the laterals with mulch if used.

C. The lines shall be operated for a period of 24 hours, not necessarily in one continuous
period, and all emitters checked for satisfactory operation. Any faulty/blocked emit-
ters shall be replaced.

D. Testing and commissioning

1. On completion of the entire irrigation system installation, the system shall be

commissioned to demonstrate the proper functioning of the system. The process
of commissioning shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer’s Repre-
sentative.

2. Adjustment and re-testing of emitters, control valves etc., shall be carried out
until satisfactory result is obtained and the whole system is functioning to the
design requirement.

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 26
 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

3.7 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

A. Maintenance Personnel: to have experience in Qatar based landscape contracting

company specializing in installing irrigation system for landscape.

B. Maintenance Manual: Upon completion of work and prior to initial acceptance, pro-
vide the Engineer with Four (4) copies of a bound maintenance manual and one (1)
softcopy.

The manual shall contain a list of all irrigation system components including:

 Component description.

 Supplier name, address, telephone, email and contact person.

 Warranty start and end date.

 Spare parts available for each component.

 Maintenance program by date for each component and the description of the
maintenance procedure, cleaning, flushing, lubricating, changing parts, updating
etc.

C. The general manual headings and descriptions should be both Arabic and English.

3.8 OPERATIONAL PROGRAM

A. OPERATIONAL PERSONNEL: to have experience in Qatar based landscape con-

tracting company specializing in installing irrigation system for landscape.

B. OPERATIONAL MANUAL: Upon completion of work and prior to initial ac-

ceptance, provide the Engineer with Four (4) Hard copies of a bound operational man-
ual and one (1) softcopy.

The manual should contain a list of all irrigation system components including:

 Original operational manual.

 Operational schedules.

 The general manual headings and descriptions should be both in Arabic and Eng-
lish.

END OF SECTION 328400

Newton Lusail School

Mechanical Specification - Rev. 00 328400 - 27
 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item COUNTRY OF
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER
No. ORIGIN

PLUMBING
Lawton UK
Crane USA
Yorkshire UK
1 Copper Pipes & Fittings
Wednesburry UK

Victaulic USA/Europe

Mueller UK

Franklin Hodge UK
2 Steel Tank SUNNIK MALYSIA

BRAITHWAITE UK

Japan
bridgeston
Balmoral UK

Sekisui Japan

AC plastic UK
3 Water Tank (Sectional GRP)
SAMSUNG Malasia
POTAGLASS Malaysia
DAEJOO SOUTH KOREA
SUNNIK Malaysia

A.O. Smith USA

Heatrae Sadia UK
Reflex Germany
Lochinvar UK
Ecotherm UK
4 Water Heaters
PVI USA
Ariston Italy
RHEEEM USA
Viesmann Germany
WATTS ITALY

Newton Lusail School 1 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item COUNTRY OF
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER
No. ORIGIN

Durapipe UK

Redi italy

Nicoll France
5 UPVC Pipe & Fittings
FIP Italy

Pestan Serbia

Hepworth UK

THEMOCELL USA

ZOTEFOAM UK
6 Thermal Insulation (Fiber Izocam Turkey
Glass Insulation) Australia
Thermobreak
Kimmco Kuwait

ODE Turkey

Grundfos Denmark

KSB Germany

DP Netherland
7 Water pump Set
Xylam- Lowara Italy
Wilo EU
Pentair EU
ITALIAN CORRUGATI ITALY
Victolic USA/EUROPE
HDPE PIPES, FITTINGS and coestilen
8 italy
VALVES
Hepworth UK
akatherm Netherland
ABO EU
hattersley UK
9 Valves FLOWCON ITALY
WATTS USA
FRESE Demark

Newton Lusail School 2 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item COUNTRY OF
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER
No. ORIGIN

Wefatherm Germany
Hakan Turkey
PPR, PEX and Silent PIPES, Banninger Germany
10
FITTINGS and VALVES Interplast UK
Onur Turkey
Coes Italy

Crane UK

Zurn USA

FLOWCON ITALY

WATTS USA

WILKINS USA
11 Pressure reducing valve CLAVAL Swiss

Victaulic/Bermad USA

Viking USA

Singer Valve Canada

GOETZE ARMATUREN Germany

NIBBCO USA
Mason Industries, Inc.; Mercer Rubb USA
Manikin UK
VIMCO USA

Aero Duct India

12 Flexible Connections
WIECCO INDIA

FLOWCON ITALY

AYVAZ Turkey

TOZEN JAPAN

Newton Lusail School 3 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item COUNTRY OF
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER
No. ORIGIN

Mason Industries, Inc.; Mercer Rubb USA

VIMCO USA

FLOWCON ITALY

WATTS USA/CHINA
EXPANSION JOINT
13 TOZEN JAPAN
WEICCO INDIA
VICTAULIC USA
AYVAZ Turkey
Minikin UK

PUROFLUX USA/EUROPE

Filtrine USA

Culligan UK

CARESS USA
Water Filter and Terminal
14 Culligan ITALY
Filters
Pentair UK

METITO USA

STF VICAN SPAIN

WATTS USA
Weiss USA
Hunter USA
JOHANSON USA
WATTS USA
15 Instruments & Gauges FEBCO USA
LANDIS-GYR Europe
Winters Canada
BRANNAN UK
ASHCROFT USA
CANALETAS Spain
16 Stand-alone drinking fountain
ELKEY USA

Newton Lusail School 4 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item COUNTRY OF
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER
No. ORIGIN

Amberbooth USA
Kinetics USA
Vimco USA
MASON USA
Vibration Isolators WEICCO INDIA
17
DIAMOND INDIA

PACKLESS USA
INDUSTRIAL ACOUSTICS UK

TOZEN JAPAN

GETZNER AUSTRIA
Georg Fischer Germany
Sika Swirzerland
Tolico USA
Hilti USA
Fischer Germany
MUPRO GERMANY
18 Pipe Supports
MUNGO SWITZERLAND
FLAMCO UK
TEMPO INDIA
WEICCO INDIA
MASON USA
Tyco USA
PENTAIR USA
Fountains and swimming HYWARD
19 USA
pools specialist
ASTRAL SPAIN
Interfit France
20 Pipe Fitting Anvil USA
Victaulic USA

Newton Lusail School 5 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item COUNTRY OF
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER
No. ORIGIN

FOSTER USA
SANDFIRE UK
21 Fire stop material
Hilti Germany
MORGAN USA / INDIA
WATTS USA
ZURN USA
22 Water hammer arrestor Wilkins Canada
ALBION USA
FLOWCON ITALY
Hydrus-Hydrometer EUROPE
Itron-Echodis Compact PLUS USA
23 Water meter domestic SIEMENS EUROPE
SMART ENERG PLUS EU
Badger USA
ABB USA
24 Water meter bulk SMART ENERG PLUS EU
Siemens EUROPE

WATTS USA

Reliance Water Control UK

25 THERMOSTATIC Mixing valve
IMI (TA) EU
NIBCO USA
CRANE USA
Conex UK
26 Hose Bib Peglar UK
WATTS USA
Crane USA
Grinnel USA
27 NIBBCO USA
Y strainer FLOWCON ITALY
Victaulic USA/Europe
IMI (TA) EU/CHINA
TOZEN JAPAN

Newton Lusail School 6 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item COUNTRY OF
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER
No. ORIGIN

MASON USA
WEICCO INDIA
28 Anti- vibration mountin&pads KINETICS USA
TOZEN JAPAN
GETZNER AUSTRIA
CONEX USA
PERGLER UK
29 Ball Float Valve
NEWMAN HATTERSELY UK
WATTS USA
HOUSEMAN UK
METITO USA
30 Water Treament CULLIGAN UK
DEARBORN USA
DREW CHEMICALS USA
GASCO QATAR
31 LPG/SNG Qatar Gas QATAR
Uni Gas QATAR
Econosto Europe
32 Fuel oil system Pipes BIS Japan
Interpipe Ukraine
Any other product not listed in vendor list or have different origin subject to ENGINEER and DESIGNER
approval

Newton Lusail School 7 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item COUNTRY OF
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER
No. ORIGIN

DRAINAGE

MARLEY UK
Durapipe UK
1 uPVC pipes/Fittings Hepworth UK
HUNTER UK
REDI ITALY

ISCO UK

HEPORTH UK

2 HDPE pipes & fitting Akatherm Netherland

Victaulic USA/Europe

ADS USA

cose ITALY

3 PP silent pipes & fitting geberit UK

wavin Germany

ZURN USA
J R Smith USA
Thermax UK
Drainage Specialties, Manhole Saint Gobain PAM France
4
Covers & Frames WATTS USA/CHINA
KESSEL ITALY
FERPLAST ITALY
ACO UK
Wade UK
Frost UK
Hepworth UK
5 Floor Gulley JOSAM USA
ZURN USA
WATTS USA
J R Smith USA
ZURN USA
Floor drain, channel JOSSAM USA
6 SMITH USA
grating&cover
KESSEL GERMANY
WATTS USA

Newton Lusail School 8 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item COUNTRY OF
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER
No. ORIGIN

ZURN USA
OIL/SAND/LINT/ GREASE JOSSAM USA
7 SMITH USA
Interceptor
Thermax UK
WATTS USA
GBH Clay Pipes Malaysia
8 ESVC Pipe Naylor UK
Hepworth Qatar
Frost UK / USA
Wade USA
Oatey USA
9 Rain Water Drain Outlet SAB Italy
R Smith USA
Josem USA
Enpoco Canada
Lowera Italy

GrundFoss Denmark

Pentair Italy
10 Sump Pump KSB Germany

DP Netherland

HOMA Germany
XYLEM STEADY SWEDEN
SILIKA GERMANY
Caddy USA/ Europe

TYCO USA
Fischer Germany
MUPRO GERMANY
INKA TURKEY
11 Pipe support
MUNGO SWITZERLAND
FLAMCO UK
TEMPO INDIA
WEICCO INDIA
MASON USA

HILTI USA

Newton Lusail School 9 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item COUNTRY OF
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER
No. ORIGIN

Contra International QATAR

12 PWC Al Mahd Electro Mechanical & Services Co. QATAR

Equal approved from MARAFEQ QATAR

Any other product not listed in vendor list or have different origin subject to ENGINEER and DESIGNER approval

Newton Lusail School 10 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item COUNTRY OF
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER
No. ORIGIN

IRRIGATION SYSTEM
Pestan Serbia
Victaulic USA/Europe
1 HDPE Pipe
Gibrit Germany
Hepworth Qatar
Durapipe UK
Pestan Serbia
2 Pressure UPVC Pipe & Fittings
Sappco Aplaco (KSA) KSA
Hepworth UK
Gibrit Germany
MEAC KSA
3 Driper Pestan Serbia
Toro Italy
Rain Bird USA
Hunter USA
4 Solenoid Valve Rain Bird USA
WINGFIELD Australia
Hunter USA
5 Quick Coupler Valve Rain Bird USA
WINGFIELD Australia
Pegler UK
Hettersley UK
WATTS USA/CHINA
6 Gate Valve FLOWCON ITALY
ALBION USA
IMI (TA) EU/CHINA
Giacomany Italy
Hunter USA
7 Sprinkler / Bubler / Emitter Rain Bird USA
Wing field USA
Hunter USA
8 Irrigation Controller Rain Bird USA
Mottrolla USA

Newton Lusail School 11 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item COUNTRY OF
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER
No. ORIGIN

Ebara Germany
Grundfos Denmark
Willo Germany
KSB Germany
9 Irrigation Pump
DP Netherland
HYDRO SPAIN
PENTAIR EU
BIRAL SWITZERLAND
Hunter USA
10 Sprinkler / Bubler / Emitter Rain Bird USA
Wing field USA

PUROFLUX USA/EUROPE

Filtrine USA
Water Filter and Terminal Culligan UK
11
Filters CARESS USA
METITO USA
STF FILTERS SPAIN
WATTS USA
Georg Fischer Germany
Caddy Denmark / USA
12 Sika Swirzerland
Pipe Supports
Tolico USA
Hilti USA
Tyco USA
Any other product not listed in vendor list or have different origin subject to ENGINEER and DESIGNER
approval

Newton Lusail School 12 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item COUNTRY OF
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER
No. ORIGIN

FIRE PROTECTION

Victaulic USA/Europe

Globe USA

1 Sprinkler heads Reliable USA

Viking USA

Grinnel USA

Shield UK

Globe USA
Grinnel USA
Valves (OS&Y, Butterfly & Shield UK
2
Check Valves) Victaulic USA/Europe
CRANE UK
System Sensor USA
Moyne Roberts Ireland

Thorn Norsen UK

3 Fire Hose reel & Fire Hose NOHA NORWAY

Shield UK

NAFFCO QATAR

Kiddie UK

Hood Fire Suppression buckeye USA

4
System Ansul UK

FIKE USA

Newton Lusail School 13 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item COUNTRY OF
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER
No. ORIGIN

Econosto West Europe

Shield UK / RUSSIA
Nippon JAPAN
5 Steel Pipes
Van Leeuwen Europe
US Steel USA
Siilcoub Europe
Victaulic USA/Europe

UK
Galvanized threaded fittings Shield
6 and Grooved Fittings (UL Victaulic USA
listed and or FM Approved). Tyco
USA
Siam Japan
Viking USA
Reliable USA
Alarm Check Valves ,
7 Deluge Valves & Peracion Shield UK
Valves Victaulic USA/Europe
Tyco USA
System Sensor USA
Supervisory Switches , Flow
Potter Electric USA
8 Switches , Pressure
Automatic Sprinkler USA
Switches
Central / Tyco USA
Cla-val USA
Watts USA
9 Pressure Reducing Valves Wilkins USA
Singer Valve Canada
Shield UK
AGF USA
Winters USA
10 Pressure Gauges BRANNAN UK
Watts USA
Potter USA

Newton Lusail School 14 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item COUNTRY OF
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER
No. ORIGIN

Bell Flow UK
Global Vision USA
Potter Roemer USA
11 Water Flow Meter Gerand USA
SMART ENERG PLUS Europe
Flomag EUROPE
Potter USA
Patterson USA
Grundfos USA
Arrora USA
12 Fire Pump Set Peerless USA
Armstrong USA
XYLEM AC FIRE USA
R-B Pumps USA
Caterpillar USA
13 Diesel Engine Clarks USA
Cummins USA
Chub UK
Shield UK
ElKhart USA
14 Landing Valve Giacomini Europe
NAFFCO QATAR
Angus UK
Moyne Robert Ireland
Chub UK
Shield UK
Angus UK
15 Fire Extinguishers
Viking USA
NAFFCO QATAR
Amerex USA

Newton Lusail School 15 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item COUNTRY OF
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER
No. ORIGIN

FM200 — Siemens USA

FM200 — Fike USA

FM200 — Fike USA

16 Fire Suppression System Aerosol — statx Europe

Aerosol — Firepro Europe

Aerosol — DSPA Netherland

Chub UK

Shield UK
17 Fire Department Connection
Potter USA

NAFFCO QATAR

Magnum USA
Chemtron USA

Foam System / Equipment Viking USA

18
All Foam Concentrate National Foam USA
NAFFCO QATAR
Ansul Europe
Shield UK
ISCO USA
19 HDPE Pipes, Fittings
Performance Pipes USA
Victaulic USA/Europe
HELTI GERMANY /USA
SIKLA GERMANY /USA
20 Support System PHD USA
WEICCO INDIA
Shield UK

Newton Lusail School 16 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item COUNTRY OF
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER
No. ORIGIN

Taco USA
21 Automatic Air Vents Cla-val USA
National USA
Foster USA
Sander Fire UK
22 Fire Stopping Materials
Idenden UK
SVT GERMANY
Any other product not listed in vendor list or have different origin subject to ENGINEER and DESIGNER
approval

Newton Lusail School 17 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
No.

HVAC WORKS
DAIKIN Malaysia
York Malaysia
1 PACU /SPLIT (ECO-FRIENDLY) LG Korea
Petra Jordan
General Thailand
DAIKIN Malaysia
2 AIR HANDLING UNIT carrier Turkey
Trane Malysya
EUROCLIMA ITALY
DAIKIN Malaysia

3 FAN COIL UNIT carrier Turkey

Trane Malysya
EUROCLIMA ITALY
WILO GERMANY
Grundfos Denmark
4 PUMPS DESMI Denmark
Xylam- Lowara ITALY
XYLEM B&G USA
LIBERT USA

STULZ GERMANY

5 PRECISION UNIT BLUE BOX ITALY

CLIMAVENETA ITALY

EDPAC IRELAND
Sondex Denmark
Taco USA
6 HEAT EXCHANGER
Alfa Laval Sweden
Danfoss France
ELTA UK
SYSTEM AIR GERMANY
7 VENTILATION FANS
Flakt woods UK
S&P SPAIN

Newton Lusail School 18 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
No.

British steel UK
INTERPIPE ukraine
shield UK
CHILLED WATER SEAMLESS
8 surya india
PIPES
DALMINE ITALY
NIPPON JAPAN
Sumitomo JAPAN
SPPI KSA
EPPI UAE
PRE INSULATED CHILLED
9 INSAFOAM UAE
WATER PIPES
PERMAP PIPE UAE
BCCI UAE
SCHULTZ Germany
Delcorte France
CHILLED WATER PIPE National USA
10
FITTINGS BIS Japan
GRINNELL USA
Central USA
YOUN WOO Korea
CHILLED WATER GROOVED Central USA
11
PIPE FITTINGS GRINNELL USA
Victaulic USA
CRANE UK
OVENTROP GERMANY
KITZ JAPAN
CHILLED WATER VALVES AND
12 Frese Denmark
PICV VALVES
Danfose Denmark
IMI POLAND
Nibco USA
Hattersely UK
KITZ JAPAN
PEGLER UK
13 STRAINERS
CRANE USA
IMI (TA) EU/China
Frese Denmark
Taco USA
CRANE UK
ITT USA
14 PRESSURIZATION PACKAGE PATTERSON USA
Wilo GERMANY
Flamco Netherlands
GRUNDFOS DENMARK

Newton Lusail School 19 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
No.

ARMSTORNG UK
WEICCO India
FLAMCO ITALY
SPIRAX SARCO USA
15 AUTOMATIC AIR VENT
XYLEM B&G China
IMI (TA) Eu
Procedyne India
OVENTROP GERMANY
MASON USA
Hattersely UK
KINETICS USA
16 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS MINIKIN UK
KINFLEX USA
Ayvaz TURKEY
SHOURJOINTS USA
HOUSEMAN UK
METITO USA
CHEMICAL DOSAGE POT & CULLIGAN UK
17
CHEMICALS DEARBORN USA
Prominent Germany
DREW CHEMICALS USA
KIEBACK&PETER Germany
Honeywell HBS USA
BUILDING MANAGEMENT Siemens Building Technology Germany
18
SYSTEM Johnsons Control USA
SAUTER Switzerland
SCHNEIDER EUROPE
Yorkshire UK
Wednesburry UK
19 COPPER PIPES & FITTING Crane UK
Mueller UK
Lawton UK
Kimmco KUWAIT

Kflex UAE

20 DUCT & PIPE INSULATION AEROFOAM India

THERMOBREAK Australia

ARMACELL INDIA

Newton Lusail School 20 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
No.

Nippon Japan

Kobe Japan

21 G.I DUCT SHEET Jindal India

JEF Japan

Sumitomo Japan

Jersey manufacturer (KMC) Qatar

Air master Qatar

Ciaco KUWAIT
22 AIR TERMINAL
KBE Lebanon

Flowtech Qatar

DEVAC Qatar

Danfose Denmark

23 VFD ABB EUROPE

Emerson USA

MASON USA

Hattersely UK

KINETICS USA

MINIKIN UK

KINFLEX USA
24 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
SHOURJOINTS USA

FLOWCON ITALY

TOZEN JAPAN

Ayvaz TURKEY

WATTS USA

Newton Lusail School 21 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
No.

Jersey manufacturer (KMC) QATAR

SHIELD UK

25 FIRE & SMOKE DAMPERS KBE LEBANON

Flowtech UAE

DEVAC Qatar

BLE UK

SHIELD UK
26 SMOKE AND FIRE CURTAINS Colt Germany

Flowtech UAE

EPS UK

LEBANON
KBE
QATAR
KMC
27 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
Qatar
Flowtech
TURKEY
KES KLIMA
USA
KBE
SWEDEN
KMC
28 SILENCERS Singapore
SAFID
Qatar
Flowtech
QATAR
AIR MASTER
KBE USA

KMC SWEDEN
29 FLEXI DUCT
SAFID Singapore

AIR MASTER UAE

AM BIRAD AIRBLOC UK
Mars USA
30 AIR CURTAINS Panasonic JAPAN
Mitsubishi JAPAN
OLEFINI GREECE

Newton Lusail School 22 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
No.

AAF U.S.A/Europe
31 AIR FILTRATION SYSTEM METITO USA
THERMAX UK

Rubatex USA
32 RUBBER FOAM INSULATION ARMAFLEX INDIA

SUPERLON MALYSIA

Kamstrup EUROPE

Lanpis Denmark

33 BTU Meter Smart energ plus Eu

Danfoss Denmark

Landis-Gyr EUROPE

DURODYNE USA
DUCT FLEXIBLE UK
34 CONTRACT COMPONENTS LTD.
CONNECTIONS
DYNAIR ITALY

FOSTER USA
ADHESIVE, COATING,
35 Childers USA
SEALANTS
Pidlilite-FEVICOL INDIA

EVOTEK QATAR

S1KLA GERMANY
36 DUCT & PIPE SUPPORTS
Weicco Qatar

TYCO USA

MASON USA

AMBERBOOTH USA

KINETICS USA
37 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
Weicco India

TOZEN JAPAN

GETZNER Austria

Newton Lusail School 23 of 24 Rev.00

 MECHANICAL VENDORS LIST

Item
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION BRAND / MANUFACTURER COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
No.

Winters Canada

TAYLOR USA
38 INSTRUMENTS & GAUGES JOHNSON USA

Brannan UK

HUNTER USA

SPC UK

Thermax GERMANY
HEAT RECOVERY,AIR Denmark
Dantherm
39 PURIFICATION
&DEHUMIDIFIERS CALOREX UK

PoolPak USA

MUNTERS EUROPE

Promat UK/Belgium

Intumex Austria
FIRE STOP MATERIAL AND
40
FIRE RATED DUCT
Hilti Germany

MORGAN USA
Any other product not listed in vendor list or have different origin subject to ENGINEER and DESIGNER
approval

Newton Lusail School 24 of 24 Rev.00